Home

FOCUS User Manual

1. Disconnecting from PCC Disconnected Once the site has been disconnected the Select Site dialog can be closed by clicking Close or another site can be connected using the connection procedure described previously The tray icon will now be red indicating a site is disconnected the tool tip will indicate the selected site is disconnected FOCUS Multi Site Server Site 11 Disconnected Monday ee 28 06 2004 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Audit Viewer Audit Viewer 138 7 Audit Viewer The FOCUS system uses an audit log to track important events user actions errors and general information This audit log can be used by a site manager to check for possible fraudulent behaviour e g dispenser tests and by support personnel to diagnoses faults The PCC also records many different events that occur with the devices it is in communication with and activity occurring internally The Audit Viewer application provides an interface to view filter delete and report on FOCUS audit and PCC event records The audit table is purged during a database purge operation to prevent its size from growing to an uncontrollable level by default audit data older than one month is permanently deleted during the purge process Login The Audit Viewer may require a user to login this allows the access to the audit data to be restricted Enter a valid user name and password to login to the Audit Viewer Only the passwo
2. Logto file Keeplogsfor 7 days Go Live Statement Save Folder the default location statements will be saved to using the Print to file option Default Account Limit the account limit default for a new account Receipt Width the width of the receipt that will be printed by the 4DET default is 31 Maximum Sale Value this limits the maximum value of an individual sale The Whole dollar sale value only checkbox determines whether sale values are allowed to have decimals or not Grid Options preferences for the grid line setup Confirm delete options set whether to prompt when deleting accounts or card holders Go Live this option will permanently clear all existing transactions for all accounts in the database use this following commissioning and testing of the system It is strongly recommended that this function is NOT used once the system has been used with customers as it will result in the loss of transaction data Logging set the log file on off for the LAM application and specify the log file roll period Server 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Local Accounts General Settings Manager Server PCC Communication Card Number Masking Enable PCC Interface Method No Masking IP address 192 168 0 150 z bs a Example Unmasked 1234561234567801 Masked 1234561234567801 PoS Communication Y Enable PoS Interface Transactions Method of Payment 3 Serv
3. 162 44 ong 100 00 Payment afefe Remaining Bag Total 62 44 Cancel o e cr Select an attendant from the list only attendants with tag numbers assigned are displayed The current bag total is the total value of sales the attendant has made and hence what should be in his her bag When an attendant is selected and he she has made no sales No Sales will be displayed as the current bag total and the keypad will be disabled Attendant Attendant 1 Enter a payment using the keyboard or buttons provided the remaining bag total is displayed When the payment made by the attendant is less than the current bag total the remaining bag total is displayed in red Click OK to confirm the payment this will set the current bag total to the remaining bag total or click Cancel to discard the payment the current bag total will then remain unchanged When OK is selected the Print Receipt dialog will be displayed click Yes to close and print a receipt or No to close without printing a receipt 5 3 8 Dispenser Lighting Control The dispenser lights can be switched on or off by using the dispenser Ready function as follows 90 Ready Turns all dispenser lights off 91 Ready Turns all dispenser lights on OR click the Lights menu item in the Console Menu QB FMS TINMIGHIIE way Y Lights y tia A a MA ce 4 A tick appears beside its menu item when Lights are ON The PCC will always keep the li
4. The FOCUS system provides numerous wetstock reports these are available from the Forecourt Manager and can be setup to print out automatically at an end of shift or day The following descriptions provide a brief description and details the fields displayed for each of these reports 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 14 8 1 Real time 14 8 1 1 Hose Totals This report presents the three sets of real time dispenser hose value and volume totals maintained by the controller shift accumulated and electronic dispenser The following fields are displayed for each line of this report Dispenser and hose number Grade name assigned to that dispenser and hose The current shift volume total for the specified dispenser hose The current shift value total for the specified dispenser hose The current shift EFT money total for the specified dispenser hose The current accumulated controller volume total for the specified dispenser hose The current accumulated controller value total for the specified dispenser hose The current dispenser electronic volume total for the specified dispenser hose The current dispenser electronic value total for the specified dispenser hose The shift value and volume is reset to zero during every FOCUS shift change or end of day The accumulated controller value and volume is only reset by a master reset It is not reset during a FOCUS shift change or end of day This value will continue to increase until it reaches
5. 39 FOCUS E bu Corl Sols An individual cell within the console represents each dispenser Each cell consists of a grade title the current grade in use the dispenser status and two transaction buffers High resolution coloured images are used to represent the current status of a dispenser allowing the attendant to quickly assess the state of his her forecourt while working behind the shop counter User Interface The Visual Console provides a graphical representation of the forecourt The user interface provides control of the forecourt and processing of the fuel transactions generated on the forecourt The user interface can driven by keyboard mouse touch or a combination of these The appearance and behaviour of the Visual Console including dimensions line mode console menu items etc are configured using the Forecourt Manager Settings The Visual Console is made up of a status bar dispenser status icons which include transaction buffers control keys and a console menu Status bar Status icon Di ber an TL ZN Lol IJS fixijeil re niz y pees IIZ FOCUS Visual Corsolz Despensa gt Super MPD Diesel MPD status cell MPD Unleaded Diesel Unleaded MPD MPD M Sensete mena Authorise all 1 3 5 7 9 b calling dispensers f AA J PA Po gt gt Scroll buttons Emergency stop 44 ES all dispensers O 10 lt lt Login Lo
6. 5 1 4 Alarms Some events occurring within the controller will generate alarms these may be related to tanks UPIs the internal hardware etc When an alarm occurs the alarm bell will appear in the Visual Console s status bar shown below a Click the bell icon and the alarm status box will appear this dialog lists the current alarm descriptions These alarms are also logged in the Audit log The alarms can also be accessed via the Alarms item when it is displayed in the Visual Console s menu Alarm List Automatic Tank Gauging Offline Stick error Low product level High product level High water level Leak detected Theft detected General error UPIS e Offline e Communications line fault e Checksum error e EPROM error e CPU RAM error Auxiliary Devices e Checksum error Controller e EPROM failure e Internal RAM failure e External RAM failure e Emergency stop activated Price Sign e Offline PIPI Customer Display e Offline from the controller e Offline from the PC OPT Offline Paper out Paper low Printer offline Door open Buffer full Self test failure Power failure Battery charge low 2012 POSTEC Data Systems FOCUS User Manual 5 2 e Unrecoverable error e Diagnostic reset Keyboard The Visual Console can be driven from a keyboard mouse touch or a combination of both The Visual Console makes use of the Numeric keypad of a standard PC keyboard for most operator fu
7. 5 2 3 Autohold Prepay Mode Transactions Dispensers can be put into Autohold Prepay mode When in this mode the dispenser appears the same as in Autohold mode i e dispenser locked Unlike Autohold mode where clicking the dispenser immediately authorises it Autohold Prepay mode causes a dialog to appear and gives multiple options on how the dispenser should be authorised Authorise Dispenser Dispenser 1 To authorise the pump with no limits just click OK To authorise the pump with a limit 1 Choose either a or L limit The displayed symbols depends on the unit configuration Lis for New Zealand 2 Choose either Fill or PrePaid 3 Enter the amount to be authorised using the keypad 4 Click OK If Fill is chosen the pump is authorised to dispense up to a maximum of the amount entered The customer must pay for their fuel afterwards if PrePaid is chosen the customer is charged for the entered amount before fuelling The process is the same as for a Prepay Mode Transaction refer to this section for more information 5 24 Transaction Expiry The FOCUS system can be configured to highlight a transaction that has not been processed after a configurable amount of time This time is set by the Transaction Expire Timeout located in the Forecourt Manager or in the Timers configuration node on the Forecourt Configuration application This functionality can be used to highlight a possible
8. FOCUS Suite Setup is used to manage users gt Local Account Database Maintenance Operations t Upgrade gA Restore A Options X Delete Logs Click Close to close the Database Maintenance Utility Note Local Accounts Database Maintenance Utility requires administrator priveleges If you are running on Windows Vista or newer then you will be prompted to elevate the application Options The Options dialog is used to configure when and how a database purge is executed Click Options to open the Database Options dialog s Database Options Purge options Purge transaction data after 2 Months z Perform purge Manually O Automatically Show dialog during automatic purge During the purge process historical transaction data is permanently deleted from the database to 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 174 FOCUS User Manual 13 7 2 13 7 3 13 7 4 13 7 5 stop the database size growing too large Use the drop down controls to select the period of time each data type should be saved i e data older than this time will be purged The purge can be performed manually from the Database Maintenance Utility or automatically when the Forecourt Manager Local Accounts page is accessed Select how the purge will be performed using the radio buttons provided and check the Show dialog during automatic purge to display the purge progress dialog during an automatic p
9. Includes TCP IP Protocol PCC Client Serial Cable Specification A RS 232 serial interface cable is required to connect the FOCUS PC to the PCC refer to the diagram below for the cable specification 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Setting up Controller Connection ta POS PC Female Pin 2 Rx Pin 3 Tx Pin 5 Gnd Multi drop Serial Connection The other option is a multi drop serial cable that can be used to connect the PCC with up to eight PCs running the PCC Server Using the PCC Connection Wizard a local serial connection is configured on each PC Async Serial PCC Client Server Multi drop Cable Specification A Multi drop RS 232 serial interface cable is required for the multi drop configuration mentioned above refer to the diagram below for the cable specification 2012 POSTEC Data Systems E FOCUS User Manual PCC POS PC 1 tale Female lt 2 Pin 2 Tx AMIA Pin 2 Rx gt mer many Pin 7 Gnd APO oy ey prey pe Pin 5 Gnd me 2000000000000 90 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 elolplolal ligt alla T a Oo tg N POS PC 2 Female 1 13 Pin 2 Rx 7 T 3 E O 3 Pin 3 Tx 3 z Ti O H t lo 12 9 75 Pin 5 Gnd 5 5 o 15 Dri POS PC 3 Female to Pin 2 Rx 7 5 7 i Pin 3 Tx Ha Pace 3 O Pin 5 Gnd 5 oP POS PC 4 Female o Pin 2 Rx 7 a 7 O Eo Pin 3 Tx Lo Pcs 3 f E Pin 5 Gnd 5 z OP ak Notes 1 A small signal diode is used to sum
10. 14 7 2 12 Modem PCC Internal Modem P24 P336 GSM External modem or Hayes command emulation device Event Online PCC established communications with the modem Offline PCC lost communications with the modem Device Enabled Auto answer enabled Description contains 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Appendix e Number of rings to answer after e Whether the override answer switch or PCC answer window is active Device Disabled Auto answer disabled PCC will still answer after 10 rings Description contains informs the override answer switch or PCC answer window was deactivated Ringing detected Modem detected incoming call detected Sequence Error Incoming call ringing detected but a connection was not established This is often because another device picked up the call before the PCC modem Description contains the number of rings counted Auto Dial PCC Modem dial out Description contains the phone number called Master Reset PCC reset the modem as e The connection exceeded the max time 1 hour e The modem did not respond correctly to supervisor AT command sent every 100 seconds when not online 14 7 2 13 PCC Node PoS Console number where appropriate The PCC has restarted The PCC has stopped operating Self Test Test Performed on PCC restart Description contains e Test results e PCC Hardware Software version and release date Master Reset Master reset has been applied to the PCC Memory cleared to default
11. 2012 POSTEC Data Systems a FOCUS User Manual 3 2 6 The dispensers may be configured while the controller is offline in this case the data will be saved to the database but not sent to the controller This allows the user to send the data to the controller using the Send Configuration function at a later date Request When the controller is online and the advanced user option is on the current grade configuration may be requested from the controller by clicking Request Operations Request The requested data will be stored in the database and will replace any previous changes made Ensure the controller is in a working state i e not master reset before requesting the dispenser configuration Auxiliary Devices The PCC interfaces to a wide range of forecourt devices These devices connect to the PCC through sixteen configurable auxiliary ports The Auxiliary Devices configuration node allows the configuration of the devices connected to these auxiliary ports The auxiliary device configuration is stored in non volatile configuration memory within the PCC EEPROM and is NOT lost on a flat battery or during the master reset process These settings have been factory preset and should only be changed by authorised personnel There are rules controlling mapping devices to auxiliary ports If these rules are not followed the PCC may operate in an undetermined way The auxiliary devices should only be configured in accordance with Po
12. 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Forecourt Manager wizard button to open this setup wizard The scheduled price change wizard accessed from the Visual Console s menu by default allows a user to schedule a price change for a particular schedule or all schedules To only allow the user to select all schedules check the Only allow price change on all schedules option External Auto Price Change Program It may be desirable to run a program after a schedule price change has been completed this may be a custom reporter etc Select the file using the Browse button or alternatively type the file path name directly into the File control provided Should any run time parameters be required enter these into the Params control Save Cancel Changes To save any changes that have been made to these settings click Save or click Cancel to cancel all changes These settings are saved in the windows registry 4 9 2 1 Start of Day Setup Wizard The start of day setup wizard is used to set up the start of day procedure Navigate through the wizard using the Next and Back buttons answer the questions to set up the start of day procedure as desired Please note some of the wizard pages may or may not be shown depending on the answers of questions on previous pages 24 Hour Site It is becoming more common these days for sites to run 24 hours a day In this situation there is no time delay between the end of one day and the start of the next S
13. 6 Advantage EPS EFT Canc EFT Cowl canoe dsprservancacion Y 14 7 2 8 F C Auth Term Postec 4DET Forecourt Authorization Terminal Card reader in Pump CRIP Controller Node Terminal number dispenser number if dispenser mounted Node 99 All Forecourt Terminals Node 0 Central Receipt Printer station Diagnostic Reset Forecourt Terminal State machine Error Customer dialog terminated Should not normally happen although can if Forecourt Terminal gets power cycled 14 7 2 9 Fuel Pump The Node number contains the pump number The description field contains the dispenser protocol PEC Gilbarco Australia Email Australia Dresser Wayne US Current loop Gilbarco US Compac NZ 2400 BAUD Tatsuno GX Series Tatsuno EX REX series Dresser Wayne DARTLINE European Tokheim Dong Hwa AG Walker Gilbarco South Africa Schlumberger PCC established communications with the dispenser Offline PCC lost communications with the dispenser Price Change Dispenser unit price change status detected Sequence Error PCC detected error in the sequence of a dispenser sale sale data may not have been recorded 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 203 FOCUS User Manual Device Error Dispenser reported an internally detected error code Most common error is a pulser check Error code will be recorded in event description if available otherwise it must be read from the dispensers display Stand Alone Mode Dispenser swit
14. Device disabled logged for all configured channels Nozzles mapped to the channels which have been shut down cannot be used until released by Supervisor currently by presenting Supervisor Tag at Tagging Visual Display Device Enabled AVI channel has been re enabled after being disabled Fall Back Mode Supervisor released nozzle for use after AVI channel fault New VIU Error A new VIU or vehicle tag has been detected during the same dispenser sale The transaction is terminated with the sale being recorded against the original vehicle VIU Sequence A VIU or vehicle tag has been detected part way through a non AVI Error transaction The transaction is terminated with the sale not being recorded against the vehicle tag Driver Vehicle No Driver card does not match the vehicle card The transactions can not mismatch proceed 14 7 2 5 Data File PCC s internal data files Description contains the file name where xxxxxx 6 digit site number ect P00 te dette by fone computer id 14 7 2 6 DataLogger Postec Serial Data logger Description contains the Data logger software version PCC established communications with the Data logger PCC lost communications with the Data logger E 14 7 2 7 EPS CRIP Electronic Payment Server Card reader in Pump CRIP Controller Node used to decode the specific EPS device 0 No CRIP 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Gilbarco GPC Hypercom NAC DCA POS F C Auth Dev Verifone 460
15. E Site 11 Grant s Gas Garage w Grades H Site 1232 Westgate Motors Tanks Once online the Logout button becomes available click this to logout of the connected site and return to the disconnected state i e working offline Disconnecting from a site When a connection to another site is required or the Multi Site Server needs to be shut down the currently connected site must be disconnected controlled by the Multi site Server application Client List To disconnect the currently connected site right click on the Multi site Server applications icon and select Disconnect the Select Site dialog will be displayed 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 135 FOCUS User Manual Site 11 Grants Gas Garage Modem 1 Password P455 fre connection details User dr Password Connection Type C Serial Modem C LAN Status via UDP WAN Status via TCP JW Use RAS IP Address 1192 168 0 200 Click Disconnect to initiate the disconnection process the disconnection progress is displayed in the bottom memo control 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Site Site 11 Grants Gas Garage Modem 351 Password Pass ooo RAS connection details User p dministrator Password M Connection Type C Serial Modem C LAN Status via UDP WAN Status via TCP V Use RAS Device Agere Systems AC 97 Modem v IP Address 192 168 0
16. If the PCC is fitted with an Ethernet Bridge but FOCUS is being connected serially node 6 is reserved and cannot be used by a client connecting serially 2 4 PCC Server When the FOCUS system is communicating with the PCC using the serial interface the PCCClient32 dll communicates with the PCC Server Service via TCP IP which in turn communicates serially to the PCC Therefore the PCC Server must be running for the FOCUS applications to communicate to the PCC through a serial connection The PCC Server is a Windows Servce It is configured to start automatically to ensure it is running after the PC has been rebooted The Windows Service is automatically installed when the user sets up a serial connection using the PCC Connection Wizard Alternatively to install the service manually run it once with the command line parameter INSTALL a confirmation message will be displayed If the FOCUS is communicating to the PCC using TCP IP i e using the LAN interface the PCC Server is NOT required if you wish to un install the service run it once with the command line parameter UNINSTALL a confirmation message will be displayed The PCC Server Service displays the Server PCC icon in the system task tray 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Setting up Controller Connection 22 ge 2 27PM gt Monday 14 06 2004 This may be hidden by setting the following registry setting to 1 and then restarting the service HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Postec FOCUS S
17. The send configuration does NOT send the following e Grade prices which will need to be resent if the dispenser hose tank assignment has changed A dialog will remind the user of this when the save send has been completed Warning If the dispenser hose tank grade configuration has been altered then the Grades Prices will need to be sent again even if they are correct Do you want to open the Grade Prices dialog now e PCC Date Time this is set as part of a master reset but should be checked anyway to ensure it is correct Request Configuration The request configuration function request all the configuration data that is currently setup in the controller in one go Click Request Configuration Tools Request Configuration to start this function The status panel shows the progress of the request configuration function as it works its way through requesting each configuration entity This function is useful when working with a site that has already being commissioned and should be done as the first step if the configuration is to be altered This ensures the data that is stored in the controller is the same as that stored in the database and avoids the problem of sending an old configuration to the controller if changes have been made since the last time the user was working with the site During a controller software upgrade if a master reset is required perform a request configuration FIRST this will ensure the
18. alternating with PoS Authorised Idle FPoS sale FPoS sale has been pre authorised by PoS cashier while still waiting for the EPS host authorization 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Appendix 192 PoS Authorised Calling FPoS sale FPoS sale has been pre authorised by PoS cashier while still waiting for the EPS host authorization Nozzle is lifted calling alternating with Nozzle Lifted The nozzle is lifted on an authorised dispenser prior to the delivery starting Delivery In Progress The dispenser is in delivery J v Temporary Stop The dispenser has been temporarily stopped during delivery Zero Fill A zero fill has occurred the dispenser nozzle was lifted and no fuel was dispensed i Transaction Available A transaction is available in the SALE buffer 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 193 FOCUS User Manual Refund Transaction Available A refund transaction is available in the SALE buffer This is due to the customer delivering less fuel than the prepaid amount Attend Mode The dispenser is idle in Attend mode Prepay Mode The dispenser is in Prepay mode and awaiting Preset Preset The dispenser has been authorised with a preset amount or volume EFT The dispenser is under control of an EFT unit e g CRIPS DCA Autoserve etc Where ever the card symbol is displayed alongside any of the other icons it means that it is part of an EFT transaction Exclusive Contro
19. or No to cancel Modify User The Administrator can modify any existing users properties and a standard user can only modify their own password Select the desired user and click Open the User Properties dialog will be displayed Enter the new password and confirm this click OK to save or Cancel to abort all changes Guest User When a site has been commissioned and access restricted to applications via the Setup Utility only certain users will be allowed to access certain functionality Sometimes the user who knows the administrator password may be away from the site when access is required e g in a support over the phone situation In this case the user should NOT be given the Administrator login therefore the philosophy of a Guest password has been introduced The Guest password is unique for the day and hour when it is generated Click Guest Password to create a guest password a dialog will be displayed showing the password and the date time it is valid for Note if the site being supported is in another time zone the PC clock will have to be temporarily changed to generate a valid guest password Only the Administrator can generate a guest password Service Management Utility The Service Management Utility is used to manage the two FOCUS services PCC Server and Multi site Server a Setup Utility Setup Utility Service Management Utility FOCUS PCC Server 8 a a Cisoftuware ProjectsiFocustSou
20. 16 47 00 15 Data File 0 Device Reset File 00000x EVT 7 07 2004 16 47 00 15 Data File 0 Device Reset File xxxxxx DAT 7 07 2004 16 47 00 0 Device Reset File xxxxxx EML 7 07 2004 16 47 00 0 Device Reset File xxxxxx PAR 7 07 2004 16 47 00 15 Data File 0 e File xxxxxx PTO 7 07 2004 16 47 00 15 Data File 0 File 200000 TOT 7 07 2004 16 47 00 15 Data File 0 File 000000 NRT 7 07 2004 16 47 00 15 Data File 0 Device Reset File 200000 TNK 7 07 2004 16 47 00 15 Data File 0 Device Reset File xxxxxx TP1 7 07 2004 16 47 00 15 Data File 0 Device Reset File 200000 TP2 7 07 2004 16 47 00 15 Data File 0 Device Reset File xxxxxx TP3 0 0 0 0 0 Viewing Event Records Each event records contains the following information e the date time the record was written e the event device e the event node number e the event code e the event data if relevant Click Open File Open to open an individual event record the record details dialog will be displayed Click Print to print the records details in report form A filter can be applied to these records to display only those that meet a certain criteria Click Apply Filter View Apply Filter to open the Apply Filter dialog and specify the filter settings Enable a field using the check box provided Some fields allow an operator to be specified i e gt a certain date time When a filter is applied the records are displayed in red i
21. 2004 10 47 55 a m A 1 Initial User Dispenser 04 Online 12 07 2004 10 47 55 a m A 1 initial User Dispenser 02 Online 362 records Refresh the audit viewer to display the latest audit records Viewing Audit Records Each audit records contains the following information e the type of record Information Warning or Error indicated by the symbol displayed the date time the record was written e the name of the application that wrote the record e the node number if relevant the application was communicating on the PC name this is the name of the PC the application was running on e the name of the user logged into the application Sometimes System is used if the user name is 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 139 FOCUS User Manual not relevant this is the case when an application is run that does not require a login e the details relating to the audit record Click Open File Open to open an individual audit record the record details dialog will be displayed Click Print to print the records details in report form A filter can be applied to these records to display only those that meet a certain criteria Click Apply Filter View Apply Filter to open the Apply Filter dialog and specify the filter settings Enable a field using the check box provided Some fields allow an operator to be specified i e gt a certain date time The character can be used as a wildcard in the Username and Detai
22. 29 11 08 7am 30 11 7am Receipts 100 30 11 08 7am 01 12 7am Receipts 200 01 12 08 7am 02 12 7am Receipts 300 Monthly Wetstock Summary Report November Day Receipts 29 100 30 200 December Day Receipts 01 300 So although the day ended on the 1st it is the date time of when the day is started that is used in the report somes Limited Configuration Functionality The FOCUS suite requires PCC software version 628 or greater to operate in full functionality mode When the software version is less than 628 the Forecourt Configuration software can still be used in limited functionality mode The FOCUS software should only be run in limited functionality mode for the support of old sites In this mode the following entities are configurable PCC Date Time UPIs Units Dispenser Modes Master Reset Grade Prices Grade Titles Dispenser Hose Tank Assignment Dispenser Allocation Limits Tank Record Gauge Data Station Configuration O 2012 POSTEC Data Systems e Operating Schedule 14 10 Upgrading from Forman 4 Due to the fact FOCUS has been build on Forman 4 technology a current Forman 4 installation can be upgraded to the FOCUS system by completing the following steps Step 1 Run the Forman 4 Forecourt Manager Forman4Manager exe and request the configuration from the PCC This is located under the Utilities Request Configuration tab The Forman4Manager exe can be run with the command line parameter C1
23. 999999 99 at which time it will reset to 0 and continue to increase again The dispenser electronic value and volume is read from the dispenser Not all dispensers support electronic totals in which case this field will display N A or Not Supported If the dispenser is still initialisation the field will display Initialisation in which case the report should be run a short time later once the dispenser has finished initializing Dispensers offline from the controller will display Offline and if the dispenser electronic totals are corrupted for any reason Corrupted will be displayed When the difference column is selected the difference between the electronic total and controller accumulated total is displayed under the dispenser electronic value and volume fields This is used during pilots or tests when the user synchronised the controller accumulated totals to the dispenser electronic totals After this test transactions are made and the difference checked Under normal operation this field holds no value and a difference here does not usually indicate a problem as there could be valid reasons for a difference Note This is a legacy report Sample 14 8 1 2 Grade Totals This report presents the real time shift and accumulated value volume totals maintained by the PCC for each grade of fuel setup in the system The following fields are displayed for each line of this report e Grade name e The current shift volume total for t
24. Account Management Accounts are used for the accumulation of transactions and subsequent billing via an account statement Accounts need at least one card holder but may have more as shown below Card Holder Card Holder Card Holder Card Hol Card Holder Card Holder der 13 6 2 1 Accounts New Account Select New Account to add a new account to the site Add Account Account Number fs Limit 5000 lt i JT Block all cards Contact Details Name accounts Address 232 Phone Notes Mobile An account is defined by an account number and limit in whole dollars All cards associated with the account can be blocked Enter in all relevant name address and contact data this is used on the account statements Click OK to create the account or Cancel to abort Edit Account Select Open Account to edit an existing account Click OK to save the changes to the account or Cancel to abort Delete Account Select Delete Account to permanently delete an existing account ALL card holders and transactions associated with the account will also be permanently deleted A prompt will be displayed for confirmation of the delete The user must have sufficient rights to 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Local Accounts 172 delete an account otherwise an error message will be displayed Blocking Unblocking All cards in an account can be blocked or unblocked The act of blo
25. Database Configuration Operation Registering Local Accounts requires one licence per site When FOCUS is first installed the Local Accounts functionallity is unregistered When a FOCUS Local Accounts site licence is purchased a registration key is issued The registration key is generated from the controller s internal electronic serial number which can be viewed when online to the controller from Forecourt Manager System tab and the Forecourt Configuration under General Properties This internal serial number and the external serial number of the controller box must be supplied to Postec to generate the registration key This will link the Local Accounts software installed on site to the PCC4 that is installed on that site The registration code is entered through the Forecourt Manager Local Accounts page by clicking Registration on the toolbar Enter the registration key supplied by Postec using the four edit 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 164 165 FOCUS User Manual 13 4 controls the cursor will automatically move from one to the next Once a valid hardware key has been entered the edit controls will be disabled and the controller serial number that has been registered to the LAMS software will be displayed Registration Code Registration Code if Key 2282 Hf2408 Mazos Berea Clear PCC Serial Number 00000761CF8F Unregistered Use The LAS service will run for 30 days unregistered A warn
26. Date Time See Note below Opening Dip volume at the beginning of the day Deliveries tank deliveries made into the tank during the day For ATG tanks this is measured deliveries and for logical tanks this is from entered deliveries using the FOCUS Tank Delivery Wizard This figure excludes dispenser tests Sales dispenser sales made out of the tank during the day This excludes dispenser tests Closing Dip the actual volume at the end of the day Closing Book the theoretical figure for the end of the day caluclated by Opening Dip Deliveries Sales Daily the daily loss gain Closing Dip Closing Book and as percentage of Sales Cumulative the cumulative loss gain and sales figures The relevant grand totals for the selected period are displayed at the bottom of each tank group The reporting period is displayed in the top right hand corner of the report Opening Date Time When a site is running 24 hours the opening date time is the time of the FOCUS start of day Example Day 1 23 11 08 7am 24 11 08 7am Day 2 24 11 08 7am 25 11 08 7am all deliveries and sales made between 23 11 7am 24 11 7am are accumulated in the deliveries made and sales fields for the report line that has and opening date time of 23 11 08 7am At the end of day and subsequent start of day at 24 11 08 7am both of these figures are reset to zero to accumulate up over the next period of 24 11 08 7am 25 11 08 7am which will have an opening date time
27. Delete a confirmation dialog will be displayed Click Yes to delete the mentioned attendant or No to cancel without deleting Save Cancel Changes To save any changes that have been made to these settings click Save or click Cancel to cancel all changes 4 5 2 Profiles Each attendant within the FOCUS system can be assigned a different security profiles depending on their job description Editing Attendant Profiles 2012 POSTEC Data Systems FOCUS User Manual The attendant profiles are configured from the Tanks or PoS or Dispensers Attendant Profiles page Select the profile you wish to edit clicking the Profile button above the profile check boxes Check the relevant functions you wish to grant access to and un check those you do not Click Unselect All to un check all items Click Select All to check all items The functions descriptions are displayed below Adding a Profile To create a new profile click New a new blank profile with no access rights will be created Deleting a Profile To create a delete a profile ensure the profile you wish to delete is the current profile click Delete a confirmation dialog will be displayed Click Yes to delete the mentioned profile or No to cancel without deleting Save Cancel Changes To save any changes that have been made to these profiles click Save or click Cancel to cancel all changes Function Descriptions Operation Operating
28. Dispenser Accumulate Totals Totals d Totals Tank Fuel Fuel Inventory Density Suppliers Attendant Attendant Profiles Dispenser Assignment FOCUS FOCUS FLIP Setup PoS Setup Products Keyboard FOCUS Transaction FOCUS Setup Expiry Setup Advanced Appearance Menu Forecourt Methods of Receipt Payment Allocation Dispenser Operating TVD Banner Limits Modes Schedule Grade Prices Tank Dips Attendant Details Site Details General Operation Management functionality is accessed via the page system as described above When editing is involved the data has to be either saved to the database sent to the controller or both In some cases specific data can be requested from the controller The control buttons located in the left hand panel change dependent on the option being accessed The editing process involves accessing the desired functionality via the page system and then editing the data using the controls in the editing area The Cancel button will be enabled once any changes have been made the changes can then be either saved to the database and or sent to the controller by clicking the Save Send button or cancelled by clicking the Cancel button When data is sent to or requested from the controller the progress bar displays the sent request progress Sending Dispenser Modes Site 337 PoS Test E j PCC Status Connected Logged In Online 6 34 14 04 08 Global The sta
29. Dispensers TVD Banner page The edit control on the right hand side of the page is used for editing the TVD banner Save Cancel Changes Click Save Send to save the data to the database and send it to the PCC or Cancel to cancel any changes The TVD banner may be configured while the PCC is offline in this case the data will be saved to the database but not sent to the PCC This allows the user to send the data to the PCC using the Forecourt Configuration application s Send Configuration function at a later date O 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Forecourt Manager 62 4 8 3 Transaction Expire Timeout The controller can be programmed to highlight a transaction after a configurable period of time This can be used to highlight an expired transaction which may be a potential drive off or for auto payoff When the auto payoff expired transactions checkbox is checked the transaction will be automatically payed off via the Visual Console when the transaction has expired Note that highlighting the expired transaction as a drive off and auto paying off expired transactions are mutually exclusive The expired transactions will be added to the audit log when the Log expired transactions in audit log checkbox is checked Editing the Transaction Expire Timeout The transaction expire timeout is configured from the PoS FOCUS Setup Transaction Expiry page The edit controls on the right hand side of the page is used for editing the timeout
30. Folder Management Adding Folders A new site folder can be added by clicking New File Newwhen the Sites root node is selected a dialog will appear allowing the selection of which new entity to be created Select Site folder and click OK the New Folder entry dialog will appear Enter the relevant site folder name and click OK to create the site folder The folder name must be unique if it is not an error will appear and you must re enter a unique name Should you wish to abort the site folder creation process click Cancel Deleting Folders A site folder can be deleted by clicking Delete File Delete when the Sites root node is selected and a site folder is selected in the right hand grid When the confirm delete site option is ona confirmation dialog will be shown click Yes to delete the site folder or No to cancel Any sites that are in the deleted site folder will NOT be deleted but instead automatically moved back to the Sites root node Renaming Folders A site folder may be renamed by right clicking on the desired site folder node in the tree view Select Rename Folder from the pop up menu Sites 7 OS a pao Rename Folder a Site 11 Grant s Gas ea Site 257 Albany Motor The Rename Folder entry dialog will appear Enter the new site folder name and click OK to rename the existing site folder Moving Sites into Site Folders A site node can be dragged from the Sites root node t
31. Forecourt Manager 2 test ofthe system during commissioning to ensure all sales made on the dispensers are being processed by the controller However this option should not be used lightly on a running site as if the synchronisation is performed inside a day reconciliation problems may occur Therefore this option can disabled to prevent accidental synchronisation Check the Allow accumulated total synchronisation option to show the Synchronise Totals button on the Wetstock Totals Accumulated Totals page Although the shift totals are reset at the end of every shift they can also be manually reset at any time from the Wetstock Totals Shift Totals page The reset button on this page is only visible when the Show reset shift hose grade totals button option is checked Sometimes it may be desirable to request data from the controller this can be enabled using the Allow configuration requests option This option should be used with caution as requesting data from a controller that has been master reset will cause the specific configuration data stored in the database to be replaced with default settings Dispensers Controlled by Visual Console In some cases on a large forecourt dispensers may be shared between two Visual Consoles i e two POS PC s In this case dispensers 1 16 may be controlled by Visual Console 1 and dispensers 17 32 may be controlled by Visual Console 2 Use the Dispensers controlled by Visual Console contro
32. New File New 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 149 FOCUS User Manual 9 2 Once a FPoS program has been edited it can be saved by clicking Save File Save The program can also be saved as a different name by clicking Save As File Save As When a FPoS program that has been changed and not saved is going to be closed this may be due to another program being opened or the application being closed a confirmation dialog will appear asking if the changes should be saved Click Yes to save the specified program and continue or click No to discard the changes and continue FPoS programs can be permanently deleted from the FOCUS system via the FPoS Program configuration node in the Forecourt Configuration application Program Development The code area provides a grid to edit develop FPoS programs There are six columns displayed e Line line number e Label used to define a label for a particular line of the program Labels are used as parameters by some FPOS instructions for exception states Instruction the FPoS instruction Address Parameter used to define a label for instructions that require an address parameter Numeric Parameter 1 used to define a number for instructions that require one or more numeric parameters Numeric Parameter 2 used to define a number for instructions that require two numeric parameters A new line of code can be added to the end of the program by clicking Append Line Edit
33. PC running FOCUS to ensure one PC in the system will always have a connection to the master database even if the entire network fails Master database is located on POS 1 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 185 FOCUS User Manual Master database is located on a central server not running FOCUS SERVER The loss of the connection to the master database is an error condition Therefore the transition from master to local mode and vice versa is actioned manually This process will probably be performed by the store user who has authority or a user guided over the phone by support personal A simple user interface has been implemented to switch from one mode to the next This can be activated from the Visual Console menu or run directly from program files Because the local mode is an error condition functionality is limited to minimize the amount of data synchronisation required during transition from local mode to master mode Therefore only the following essential services are allowed while the system is operating in local mode e Standard dispenser control e Transaction processing e Start of day Once only if the day has not already been started e Scheduled price change A shift change will not be performed even if configured to do so e Operating schedule change e Attendant tagging e Audit logging And only the following FOCUS applications may be run e Visual Console e PCC Serer e Audit Viewer Shoul
34. POS 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Visual Console Lights Turns lights on off indicated by a tick Auto Pay Turns Auto Payoff Mode on off indicated by a tick Dispenser Test Opens Dispenser Test dialog to process a transaction as a dispenser test Database Select Runs the database selection application to switch between master and local databases About Displays Visual Console version number and release date as well as company information e Exit Close the Visual Console Dispenser Status Cells The Visual Console represents each dispenser with a Dispenser Status Cell The following diagram shows the various parts that make up a dispenser status cell in the Console window Optional Dispenser Number Transaction Buffers Grade Colour Dispenser Status Icon Value Volume The current dispenser grade name may be displayed in the grade name panel when the dispenser is an MPD the name of the grade currently being used is displayed When no grade is assigned None will be displayed The dispenser number may be displayed inside the status icon as shown here or in the grade name this is configurable from the Forecourt Manager The dispenser status icon shows the current state of the dispenser ie Transaction Available In use On hold etc Refer Visual Console Status Icons Appendix for a list of available statii Click on this icon to toggle authorising de authorising of the dispenser The ic
35. POS interface and the login dialog will not be displayed 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 102 103 FOCUS User Manual 5 1 2 Menu The additional functionality within the Visual Console is accessed through the Console Menu The items shown in the menu are configurable using the Forecourt Manager Click M to access the console menu Manager Calculator amp Deliveries GS Tank Dips Price Change ae Start of Day Schedule Alarms amp Attendant Bag Y Lights J Dispenser Test About E Database Select i Exit The menu items perform the following functions e Manager Runs the Forecourt Manager application or brings it to the front if it is already running When the Forecourt Manager is run from this menu item it will automatically be logged in to with the attendant logged into the Visual Console Custom Runs the custom utility that has been setup Deliveries Opens the Tank Delivery Wizard to enter tank delivery details Tank Dips Opens the Tank Dips Wizard to enter tank dip details Price Change Opens the Scheduled Price Change Wizard to schedule a grade price change Start of Day Shift Change End of Day Executes the relevant shift control procedure Schedule Opens the Change Operating Schedule dialog to change the current operating schedule Alarms Opens the Alarm dialog Attendant Bag Opens the Attendant Bag Payoff dialog to allow and attendant to pay money from his her bag into the
36. Schedule access the operating schedule dialog in the Visual Console s menu and the Operating Schedule page in the Forecourt Manager Dispenser Test Price Change access dispenser test dialog through the Visual Console s menu access scheduled price change wizard through the Visual Console s menu and the Grade Prices page in the Forecourt Manager Start Of Day Shift Change access start of day item through the Visual Console s menu access shift change item through the Visual Console s menu and when a shift change is setup to run as part of a price change End Of Day End of Day Continue access end of day item through the Visual Console s menu access the Continue EOD functionality in the Visual Console when a POS check is enabled for EOD processes advanced option Database Select Attendant Bag Payoff Tank Deliveries Tank Inventory Tank Dips Tank Density Console Utility Wetstock Reports Shift Totals Accumulated Totals Dispenser Electronic Totals Dispenser Modes Dispenser Allocation Limits Manager System Information Reset Dispenser PEPS Manager Transaction Recovery Return Transaction System Date Time POS Fallback Control Manager Configuration Attendants Manager Attendant Dispenser Assign Manager access database select item through the Visual Console s menu access attendant bag payoff through the Visual Console s menu access tank delivery wizard through the Visual Console s menu acces
37. a dialog will be displayed showing the current progress of the EOD procedure End Of Day User Activated Uploading Grade data 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 123 FOCUS User Manual 5 3 6 5 3 7 Dispenser Test Periodically dispenser calibration tests may be performed on the forecourt This may involve dispensing a fixed volume from a dispenser into a measuring container to check the displayed volume of fuel dispensed is equal to the actual volume dispensed When tests are completed the dispensed fuel is usually returned to the relevant tank In this case it is necessary to process this transaction as a dispenser test to ensure tank reconciliation is not affected When a transaction is processed as a dispenser test the transaction is NOT transferred to the POS application and the volume dispensed is sent back to the controller as a delivery Dispenser test data can be reported on at a future date using the Historical Tank Deliveries report Due to the nature of the process dispenser tests can be used for fraudulent activity on the forecourt therefore it is important to restrict this function using the attendant profile functionality The Visual Console provides the Dispenser Test dialog to process a transaction as a dispenser test Select the Dispenser Test item in the console menu to open the Dispenser Test dialog yz r Dispenser Test Dispenser Ea apa E G E EA a E E E a a Ca
38. a dispenser before the request for authorisation Contact Postec development engineers for more details New FPoS programs should be thoroughly tested and approved before releasing into the field FPoS Program Report The current FPoS program can be printed in report form Click Print Preview File Print Preview or Print File Print to preview and or print an FPoS program report This report displays the program details code and compiled machine code FPoS Program Details The FPoS Program Editor allows the user to add details to a FPoS program for future reference this includes a author and description Open the FPoS Program Details dialog by clicking View Details Program View Details The program name is the name of the FPoS program the details relate to this name cannot contain spaces any spaces will be automatically replaced with an underscore An author and details about the FPoS program can be specified for future reference The system maintains a create date time when the program was created and a last compiled date time when this program was last compiled The compiled code is the actual machine code that is sent to the PCC during a send from the Forecourt Configuration application The Misc data 1 prompt and Misc data 2 prompt are 2012 POSTEC Data Systems FPoS Program Editor 152 used to tell the system what to display when the Enter Misc Data 1 and Enter Misc Data 2 commands are used in the FPoS p
39. are configured from the PoS FOCUS Setup Key Setup page Default Settings The default key assignment for Ready Hold Sale and Memory correspond to numeric keypad keys refer to the table below All default settings can be restored by clicking Default KEY DEFAULT DESCRIPTION Ready Authorise a dispenser and also to resume a dispenser delivery that has been temporarily stopped Temp Stop When the dispenser number specified is 99 all dispensers will be authorised Hold Place an authorised dispenser on HOLD or to temporarily Stop a dispenser in use When the dispenser number specified is 99 all dispensers will be held temporarily stopped Memory Coe off a sale transaction from the MEMORY buffer Dual Stack for the specified dispenser Pay off a sale transaction from the SALE buffer for the specified ds penser Ctrl L_ Open the attendant login dialog Fae ae a Toggle auto pa off functionalit on off ml ll inci dispensers in use tno password if the console s menu has restricted access a ec a receipt from the Visual Console for the last transaction that has been payed off Ctrl D Process transactions for the specified dispenser When there is only lone transaction a transaction in the sale buffer OR a transaction in the memory buffer that transaction will be payed off When there is a transaction in the sale buffer AND a transaction in the memory buffer a dialog will be displayed allowing selection of which transa
40. be unique so be sure to modify these after the duplication process Deleting Grades Only the last grade can be deleted to do this select the last grade and click Delete File Delete When the confirm delete option is on a confirmation dialog will be shown click Yes to delete the grade or No to cancel Note At least one grade must be present therefore if there is only one grade setup it cannot be deleted Grade 12 Multi product As mentioned earlier grade 12 is reserved by the system This grade is used to indicate a dispenser is a multi product dispenser The grade name can be modified depending on the user preference MPD MULTI etc However Grade 12 will only be displayed in the summary grid if there are more than 12 grades setup To edit the MPD grade name when there are less than 12 grades setup select Operations Edit MPD Grade Name the Multi product Grade Name dialog will be displayed Multi product Grade Name Enter name Maximum 8 characters MPD Cancel Enter the preferred MPD grade name and click OK to save or Cancel to abort This setting will be sent down to the controller the next time the grade configuration is sent Save Send Once the grade configuration is complete click Save Send Operations Save Send to save the data to the database and send it to the controller or Cancel Operations Cancel to cancel all changes As mentioned earlier the temperatu
41. by its name and a series of hashes represents its value The length of the name corresponds to the length of the currently configured label while the number of hashes corresponds to the maximum value size If the label length precludes visibility of the field name mouse over the field s label or value to see the full name To rearrange fields on the receipt click and drag them to a new location To remove fields from the receipt drag them back to the Available Fields list To insert or delete receipt rows right click a row and click either Insert or Delete or click a row to select it and use the toolbar Insert or Delete buttons To make a particular row double height right click the relevant row and click Double Height The procedure can be repeated to cause a row to return to single height Labels and values on double height rows will be printed in double height 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Forecourt Configuration 52 The preview to the right of the receipt will dynamically update as the receipt layout is modified It will display the currently configured label for each field along with an example value Double height text is represented with an underline on the preview Note Some fields can have multiple labels configured In these cases only the first label will be shown on the receipt preview All EPS configured sites should have both Customer amp Merchant receipt types configured in the forecourt layout sect
42. change details Select the Price Change item in the console menu to open the Scheduled Price Change Wizard Welcome The Welcome page is displayed navigate through the wizard using the Back and Next buttons click Cancel to close the wizard at any time and abort the price change entry procedure Price Change Date Enter the date when the price change is going to occur O 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Visual Console 116 Scheduled Price Change Enter Date 13 05 2004 7 lt Back Cancel Price Change Time Enter the time when the price change is going to occur Scheduled Price Change Enter Time 15 oo Up Down lt Back Cancel Price Change Operating Schedule The price change can be applied to all operating schedules or just one operating schedule The current operating schedule is selected on entry to the select schedule page The system may be configured to only allow All schedules to be selected 2012 POSTEC Data Systems FOCUS User Manual Scheduled Price Change Select Schedule 1 Day Mode 2 Night Mode 3 Not Used 4 Manual Grade Prices Select a grade for the price change and enter the new price using the keyboard or the on screen keypad The More Grades label will be displayed if there are more than 4 grades use the up down arrow keys buttons to the left of the grid to scroll to these grades Scheduled Price Change Unleaded 11 209 W Mor
43. communicate with a PCC Serial the FOCUS system uses RS 232 to communicate with the PCC LAN the FOCUS system uses TCP IP to communicate with the PCC the PCC must be fitted with an Ethernet bridge The PCC Interface Type page defines what type of interface the system will be using select the appropriate interface type and click Next Note When setting up a PC that is communicating with the PCC Server application running on another PC the PCC interface type must be set to Serial as this is still the type of interface being used to physically connect to the PCC Quick Start Serial Quick Start Local Serial Connection Start PCC Connection Wizard Welcome page click Next PCC Interface Type select Serial POS Port click Next PCC Server Location select This PC Local click Next Client Node Address setup node numbers as required click Next Summary click Finish O01 Bw NN Remote Serial Connection 1 Start PCC Connection Wizard 2 Welcome page click Next 3 PCC Interface Type select Serial POS Port click Next 4 PCC Serer Location select Another PC Remote click Next 5 Remote PC IP Address enter IP address of remote PC where the PCC Server is located click Next 6 Client Node Address setup node numbers as required click Next 7 Summary click Finish 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Setting up Controller Connection 2 2 3 1 2 LAN Quick Start LAN Connection Start PCC Connecti
44. configuration 3 2 2 Dial Properties The site dial properties node provides the configuration of a sites internal dial properties should a modem be installed in the PCC on site These properties determines how the PCC reacts to incoming and outgoing calls To edit a sites dial properties select the Dial Properties node and click Open File Open the Dial 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 35 FOCUS User Manual Properties dialog will be displayed The dialog consists of two tabs Dial In and Dial Out Information Dial In The Dial In tab contains parameters relating to the dialing in to the PCC Dial Properties Site 10 Dial in Dial out asatesesssessenced Modem init string Default aux device Terminai Logon Answer time Answer Every Day after 11 rings e 24hrsiday Between hours E E Co oa Auxiliary the Modem Init string to specify any special initialisation that is required for the modem This string will be used when dialing from the PC using FOCUS into the PCC The PCC answer time can be restricted this is useful when the PCC s modem shares a phone line with some other device person at the site Use the controls in the Answer time group box to specify which day s the PCC will answer the number of rings the PCC will answer after and the answer time either 24 hours a day or during a certain time period The Default Auxiliary Device property defines which Auxiliary port which in turn defin
45. configured while the PCC is offline in this case the data will be saved to the database but not sent to the PCC This allows the user to send the data to the PCC using the Send Configuration function at a later date Request When the PCC is online and the advanced user option is on the current OPT configuration may be requested from the PCC by clicking Request Operations Request The requested data will be stored in the database and will replace any previous changes made Ensure the PCC is in a working state i e not master reset before requesting the OPT configuration FPoS Program The FOCUS system provides the user the ability to create a FPoS Program This program is a series of instructions that will be carried out on the forecourt FPoS equipment The FPoS Program Editor application is used to modify compile import and export FPoS programs The FPoS Program configuration node allows the selection of which FPoS program will be sent to the PCC as well as management of FPoS programs Active FPoS Program The PCC can have one FPoS program configured this is referred to as the Active FPoS program The summary grid displays all the available FPoS programs within the system these are global to all sites Select the active FPoS program for a specific site by clicking Set as Active FPoS 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 3 3 Forecourt Configuration Program Operations Set as Active FPoS Program The active FPoS program is c
46. connection to the master database it can be manually switched over to a local mode In this local mode the FOCUS applications on that PC will use a local database located on that PC and operate in a limited functionality mode The database location utility Start Program Files FOCUS Utilities Database Location is used to specify where the master and local databases are located Of course if the system is not using a central database the master and local are the same file on each PC In a system using the master database configuration one PC may also have the master and local database as the same file This 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 193 FOCUS User Manual is a good idea on a POS machine as it would mean if the entire network is down there will still be one PC connected to the master database If the database is stored on a PC that is not running FOCUS i e a back office server then each PC will require a local database location to be specified ec Database Location Utility Master database PosPct C Program Files POSTEC FOCUS Database FOCUS GDB F Master database is local database Local database C Program Files POSTEC FOCUS Database FOCUS GDB v Locate Test Master Database Use the controls in the Master database group box to define the location of the master database The drop down list box allows the selection of past databases although this is probably only useful in devel
47. control price changes POS setup keyboard assignments and fuel suppliers User Interface The Forecourt Manager application uses a page based graphical user interface Each editing area contains different controls depending on the specific management functionality The status bar contains details of the current site number and name the Forecourt Manager is accessing this is particularly useful when using the multi site version The controller connection status displays the current connection state of the Forecourt Manager this can be one of the following four states Connected Logged In Offline site is connected and the Forecourt Manager is logged in but is offline Connected Logged In Online x xx dd mm yy c site is connected and the Forecourt Manager is logged in and online Connected Logged Out Offline site is connected but the Forecourt Manager has not logged in Disconnected Working Offline site is disconnected hence working offline The normal running state will be state two Connected Logged In Online x xx dd mm yy c where X XX Controller software version dd mm yy Controller software date C Controller software 8 char country description Note The last two states will only be observed when running multi site version GUI The Forecourt Manager application uses a page based graphical user interface Management functionality is broken into logical main GUI pages based on
48. dispenser range should only be limited when a second UPI serves a bank of dispensers which are the same type as in example 2 Save Send Once the UPI configuration is complete click Save Send Operations Save Send to save the data to the database and send it to the PCC or Cancel Operations Cancel to cancel all changes When the advanced user or allow offline editing of UPI configuration options are on the UPIs may be configured while the PCC is offline in this case the data will be saved to the database but not sent to the PCC This allows the user to send the data to the PCC using the Send Configuration function at a later date Once the UPI configuration has been sent to the PCC the PCC will do a warm boot and start communicating with any dispensers that are connected Request When the PCC is online and the advanced user option is on the current UPI configuration may be requested from the PCC by clicking Request Operations Request The requested data will be stored in the database and will replace any previous changes made The request can be performed safely at anytime as the UPI configuration is stored in non volatile configuration memory within the PCC EEPROM and is NOT lost on a flat battery or during the master reset process Timers The Timers configuration node allows the configuration of timer values used by the controller The default settings for these timers and a description of each timer are contained in
49. drive off or be used for auto pay off When a transaction has expired the relevant transaction buffer will be highlighted in red as shown below and an appropriate sound will be played every 10 seconds until the transaction is manually processed or auto payed off by the Visual Console 2012 POSTEC Data Systems i 13 FOCUS User Manual Unleaded 5 3 5 3 1 5 3 2 Operations Change Operating Schedule There are four configurable operating schedules Each operating schedule allows a set of dispenser operating modes and grade prices to be configured The current operating schedule can be changed from Forecourt Manager and the Visual Console Select the Schedule item in the console menu to open the Change Operating Schedule dialog Change Operating Schedule Day Mode Night Mode Not Used Manual Select the desired operating schedule using the buttons provided or using the numeric keys 1 4 The operating schedule names will be dependent on the current settings The Accept button will only be enabled if a different operating schedule to the current operating schedule has been selected Click Accept to set the current operating schedule or Cancel to close without changing the current operating schedule Tank Deliveries When logical tank gauging is being used tank deliveries need to be entered into the system to ensure tank reconciliation is accurate If automatic tank gauging is configured ta
50. entebtcniaduansasusivandvesneunsanbanedudsaena 73 EAS TOA PP a ono o 74 5 Attendant Management ceiconocinncnonin ea e 74 A A ON 74 A sun EE E 74 Dispenser ASSIQGNMENE innninninnanicninnnsinranianrcrrarrn rara 76 G6 Re porting is nE EAEE EAEN EEE ENANA NEA 76 TUNIS A A ceca eg ce Se T cece E A 78 System Date Time ccscssssssssssssessesssssssnssnessssssssossassasnnsnnsnnsessansaneusausaussessesasenseasenseaseasanausauansnasanseasansascusense 79 PROS OE oy e EEE E E E E E E 79 Transaction RECOVELY mimica 79 POS Fallback Control nnininncnninnnniciiciicinian rara ara 80 Return Transaction 8 Sile Selpr a aves cee aA sctetessececewses actevsseneuevasscctesveccceewdss eds Forecourt Receipt sccccscscescsessesesssesessestaeseseeseaescessseaesesteneaesesssseaeseeeeaeacsesseanaeseeeeasaeseessaeaesesseanaestentanseeses BAABA aT ne nn E E E S E dei sssvasentineveusnwauuauuaaden Transaction Expire Time out ccccccssesseseesesessessessessessevsevseeseeseeseesnenaesaesseseuseeseeseesaesaesaesaevaevanvaneaneanes Site Details siscicci ci ccisssctsiscwsccsassecasnssescedtcssnassancadsadcincastcoasoessetdasasacssci ccssetenesncvacendensanudatsneddedscvnscateattaensandansscins Methods of Payment TE Supplier s Se EEE E EESE EE E E A E EE E 9 FOCUS Setup saioa a EEOAE ENA a ae a EE aed cae EENE ENERE GOSEE AREA Appearance M nU ccceccetetssessessessevsevsesseeseeseeneesaesaessesseeseeseeseesaesaesaesaesaesaevaesaneaesa
51. failed view the audit log and log files for more details Purge Using this parameter will perform a silent database purge Parameter P Return Code 0 Purge succeeded 1 Purge failed view the audit log and log files for more details Backup Using this parameter will perform a silent database backup Parameter B Return Code 0 Backup succeeded 1 Backup failed view the audit log and log files for more details Restore Using this parameter will perform a silent database restore Parameter R Return Code 0 Restore succeeded 1 Restore failed view the audit log and log files for more details Delete Logs Using this parameter will perform a silent database log file deletion Parameter L 176 FOCUS User Manual 13 8 Return Code 0 Log file deletion succeeded 1 Log file deletion failed view the audit log and log files for more details Advanced Database Configuration As mentioned in earlier sections the Local Accounts system uses an Firebird database for data storage This database by default resides on the PC that FOCUS was installed on this is the recommended setup If however the database needs to reside on another PC that PC will need Firebird to be installed and the Local Accounts database to be copied The database location utility Start Program Files FOCUS Local Accounts Database Location is used to specify the location of the Local Accounts database Click Locate to change the location of the L
52. has been entered the edit controls will be disabled and the controller serial number that has been registered to the FOCUS software will be displayed Unregistered Use The main applications Forecourt Manager Forecourt Configuration and Visual Console in the FOCUS suite will run for 30 days unregistered A warning will be displayed for 5 days leading up to the end of the 30 day grace period 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Introducing FOCUS MN FOCUS is UNREGISTERED 4 day s remaining before functionality is reduced Please register FOCUS or discontinue use Generate a registration support file and contact your distributor Close After the 30 days the suite functionality will be severely limited and an error message will appear on start up and periodically alerting the user to the fact the software is unregistered FOCUS is UNREGISTERED Suite functionality has been limited Invalid software registration Invalid hardware registration Please register FOCUS or discontinue use Generate a registration support file and contact your distributor Close These suite limitations are as follows Visual Console transaction processing will be disabled this will prevent transactions from downloading to a POS application VC COM Interface transactions will be prevented from downloading to the connected POS application Forecourt Manager only the About and System tabs will be acce
53. in minutes and seconds Save Cancel Changes Click Save Send to save the data to the database and send it to the controller or Cancel to cancel any changes The transaction expire timeout may be configured while the controller is offline in this case the data will be saved to the database but not sent to the controller 4 8 4 Site Details A site s details are used for identifying a site in a network and labeling reports etc that are produced by the FOCUS system These details will be displayed in the header of all FOCUS reports Editing the Site Details The site s name address and contact details are configured from the Site Sign Site Details page Use the controls provided to specify a site name address and contact details The site number is displayed for reference only this can be changed using the Forecourt Configuration application Save Cancel Changes Click Save Send to save the data to the database and send it to the controller or Cancel to cancel any changes Ifthe controller software does not support these calls an error message will be displayed however the details will still be saved to the database The site details may be configured while the controller is offline in this case the data will be saved to the database but not sent to the controller 4 8 5 Methods of Payment The attendant tagging system allows transactions to be finalised using different methods of payment e g Cash Card Account etc Th
54. information is displayed to assist the price change process Should the price change be configured to perform a shift change on confirmation this will be performed accordingly Shift Control The FOCUS system provides shift control functionality that enables a logical day to be created that contains multiple shifts The Visual Console provides start of day shift change and end of day functions A day is started using the start of day function this is shift 1 the day can then be broken into the required number of shifts using the shift change function The day is ended using the end of day function Should the site run 24 hours the shift control can be configured to perform a start of day immediately after an end of day has been performed 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 118 no FOCUS User Manual Shift Change Shift 3 End of Day Start of Day Shift Change Day Shift Change End of Day Start of Day Shift Change Shift 1 Hon 24 hour site 5 3 5 1 Start Of Day l Shit Change End of Day Shift Change Shit Change Shift 3 End of Day Shift 1 Shift Change 24 hour site A SOD Start of Day will request hose and tank data from the controller and store it in the database This procedure will start a new day i e shift one The requested stored data is used at the shift change and end of day procedures to generate wetstock reports The SOD must be performed before using the console to make sales at th
55. is running in local mode and will connect to the local database The PC MUST BE REBOOTED to complete the process click Close and then reboot the PC Ifthe transition fails for any reason it will be reported in the status window if the problem cannot be rectified contact your support person While in the local mode the configuration in the PCC should NOT be changed 24 Database Select Utility Populate local database using PCC data Request site number OK 11 Request site configuration OK Request grade configuration OK Request dispenser hose configuration OK Request tank configuration OK Request dispenser misc configuration OK Request dispenser mode configuration OK Request unit configuration OK System is now in the OFFLINE state Please REBOOT your computer Local to Master mode When the system has been put into local mode the problem connection to the master database should be rectified as soon as possible and the system then restored to master mode Select the Database Select option in the Visual Console menu or run Database Select application from the FOCUS program group in the start menu 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Appendix 188 24 Database Select Utility Use Master Database Test Master Test Local Use the Test Master button to ensure the connection to the master database has been restored Click Use Master Database to
56. manually edited or a configuration template can be applied To manually modify a specific AVI channel value select the appropriate channel and click Open File Open The AVI Channel Properties dialog will be displayed allowing the editing of the channel 2012 POSTEC Data Systems so FOCUS User Manual AVI Channel 1 Properties Site 10 VID channel Box number 0 Dispenser fi Hose Hose tag number ones The channel is assigned a dispenser using the drop down control available dispensers are listed with MPD or Single indicating whether the dispenser has more than one hose i e multi product dispenser or one hose i e single dispenser When a MPD dispenser has been assigned a hose must also be assigned in the case of a single hose dispenser hose one will automatically be selected When a channel is not assigned to any dispenser select None An optional hose tag number can be entered if required however this is currently not used anywhere In some cases more than one AVI box is required to achieve a higher number of AVI channels The box number is the communication address for a specific AVI box For the Orpak FuelOMat system valid addresses are in the range 32 36 OTI Easyfuel Pay at Pump functionality allows the use of Easyfuel Attendant Driver and Private Motorist tags For PCC software versions dated earlier than 11 11 05 if Pay at Pump is supported then it is always enabled For PCC s
57. of attendants are working the same dispensers on multiple days shifts the copy paste buttons can be used to copy one profile setup for a day shift and then paste it for another day shift combination Save Cancel Changes To save any changes that have been made to these assignments click Save or click Cancel to cancel all changes 46 Reporting The Back Office Reports page provides access to three types of report real time reports shift day reports and historical reports Real time Reports The real time reports provide a real time snap shot of totals and inventory The following reports are available e Hose Totals presents the current controller shift hose totals accumulated hose totals and electronic dispenser totals in report form This report can only be generated when the controller is online An optional sub heading can be entered when prompted this will be displayed at the top of the report The hose totals report can be used to check the accumulated totals against the dispenser electronic totals after a synchronisation has taken place The Show difference columns option determines whether a difference column electronic accumulated is displayed on the report 2012 POSTEC Data Systems FOCUS User Manual e Grade Totals presents the current controller shift grade totals and accumulated grade totals in report form This report can only be generated when the controller is online An optional sub heading can b
58. of the confirmation message Confirmation Dialog If the PC has been setup to perform the price change confirmation it can be performed either manually by the user or automatically by the Visual Console application When the price change is going to be manually confirmed using the confirmation dialog select Yes otherwise the system will automatically confirm the price change when it occurs Execute Shift Change A shift change can be performed as part of the price change procedure select Yes if this option is 2012 POSTEC Data Systems a FOCUS User Manual 4 9 3 required Finish Click Finish to save the price change settings or Cancel to discard any changes Advanced Options The FOCUS system has various advanced functionality which needs to be configured depending on the site operation this includes attendant tagging prepay transactions etc The FOCUS Setup Advanced page provides the controls to edit these advance options on standard post pay retail sites the default settings for these options are usually sufficient General Console Options When dispensers are running in Prepay mode a grade restriction can be applied i e not only is the value restricted to the prepaid value but the grade hose is also restricted This setting is compulsory in the Australian market Check the Enable prepay grade restriction option to enable this feature If a dispenser supports it prepay values can contain a decimal poin
59. records are selected the system will automatically select all of them for the delete or export process Find A search can be done on the currently displayed records click Find Edit Find and enter the text to search for the results are displayed in the grid below Double click an entry in the grid to jump to the location of the record found containing the text in the search Audit Report The currently displayed audit records can be printed in report form Use Print Preview File Print Preview or Print File Print to preview and or print an audit report O 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 7 2 Audit Viewer 140 Event User Interface When the Site Event tab is selected the Audit Viewer displays PCC events records in the grid Events records can be imported to the FOCUS database from a PCC events file or directly from the PCC mq L Audit Viewer Clay File Edit View Tools Help 2 amp x aa A H e Site Audit Site Events Current filter DateTime gt 02 Jul 2004 16 56 55 Event Records Device Node Eet Records Data bad Date Time 7 07 2004 16 47 00 15 Data File File 00000 TP4 7 07 2004 16 47 00 File xxxxxx TPS 7 07 2004 16 47 00 File xxxxxx TP6 7 07 2004 16 47 00 5 P 7 07 2004 pz Data File evice Rese File 07 200 Record Count Jata File Device Reset le n 435 records Customize current view File XXXxxx TP7 7 07 2004
60. reporting period will be back to the 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 4 7 Forecourt Manager start of last whole Week or Month E g Last 2 weeks on the 29 05 02 will result in a reporting period of 13 05 02 to 29 05 02 The reporting period will be displayed in the From To controls even if the custom period is not being used Click Default to restore the default reporting period of the last 30 days Historical Tank Reconciliation A Historical Tank Reconciliation report displays tank reconciliation data Select the Historical Reconciliation report and click Create Report The Historical Tank Reconciliation Report dialog will be displayed allowing the selection of the reporting period The reporting period can be selected by specifying the last x Day s Week s or Month s or by checking the Custom checkbox and selecting a From and To date When selecting the Last x Week s or Month s the start of the reporting period will be back to the start of last whole Week or Month E g Last 2 weeks on the 29 05 02 will result in a reporting period of 13 05 02 to 29 05 02 The reporting period will be displayed in the From To controls even if the custom period is not being used Click Default to restore the default reporting period of the last 7 days The tank reconciliation report can be presented in consolidated form by checking the Consolidate records for each tank checkbox This will consolidate all the records for each ta
61. search can be done on the currently displayed records click Find Edit Find and enter the text to search for the results are displayed in the grid below Double click an entry in the grid to jump to the location of the record found containing the text in the search Event Report The currently displayed event records can be printed in report form Use Print Preview File Print Preview or Print File Print to preview and or print an event report Refer to appendix Analysing PCC Events for details on interpreting the information contained in the site events report Requesting Importing PCC Events Events records can be imported to the FOCUS database from a PCC events file or directly from the PCC Click the Request button Tools Request Events File to retrieve the events file from the PCC via TFTP Please note the PCC must be fitted with an Ethernet bridge for this functionality to work The Request Import dialog displays the progress of the request process gt Request Import PCC events file Get 000011 EVT file from the PCC IP 10 0 0 154 Port 7022 000011 EVT file received Processing 000011 EVT Complete 126 event records added Close Click the Import button Tools Import Events File to open a PCC events file and import events from it Another file may be imported by clicking the Import File button on the Request Import dialog Once the events file has been successfully retrieved or i
62. sites configuration is backed up and can be easily sent back to the controller after the software has been upgraded using the send configuration function One of the first operations performed is to request the site number if the number returned from the controller is zero a warning will be displayed as a setting of zero could indicate a master reset has been performed Click Yes to continue with the request configuration if you are sure a master reset has not been performed or you are not worried about possibly overwriting your site configuration data stored in the database with default settings Click No to abort the request configuration and check your controller s condition When using the multi site version additional checks are put in place to ensure sites are not inadvertently overwritten if the site number requested is different to the currently selected sites version a warning will be displayed Click Yes to continue and overwrite the site s number with that requested or No to abort If Yes is chosen and a site with the number requested from the controller already exists the user is again prompted to ensure an existing site is not overwritten with another sites data This may indicate a user has accidentally connected to the wrong site Click Yes to continue and overwrite an existing site with the data requested from the controller or No to abort The request configuration process can be aborted at any time by clicking
63. start up configuration and state Totals Roll PCC End of Day executed or Remote Host requested Totals rolled Remote Access PCC remote access port accessed Description contains the access name of the application Applications names include e DOWN 4 PCC Software download modem access e HEAD O 4 Remote modem access e PDL Up Data logger Upload Otherwise the 4COM computer user name default Admini Administrator Data Set All clients are now offline Diagnostic Reset Console or Host computer requested complete PCC restart Used to log diagnostic data for development purposes Time Date Set Description contains the Date and Time value set Can be set by PoS Console and Remote Host computer Emergency Stop Temp stops dispensers currently in use and de authorises dispensers pre authorised 14 7 2 14 PCC Internal Crd PCC Intelligent Internal Card Node number identifies the card number if more than 1 card of the same type can be used The description field identifies the card type Current cards include e RS485 4Port Mux 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 204 25 FOCUS User Manual e Ethernet Bridge e 4 20mA Analog I F Event Description Online PCC established communications with the internal card Offline PCC lost communications with the internal card Device Reset Card reset by PCC either on start up or from fault condition detected Set PCC Network Used with Ethernet Bridge for setting IP address and Subnet ma
64. start the transition from local to master mode This transition performs the following operations 1 Connect to master database 2 Connect to local database 3 Transfer local data accumulated during local mode to the master database The progress of the transition process is displayed in the status window 24 Database Select Utility Close Connecting to master database OK Connecting to local database OK Transfer local database data to master database Transfer 31 Transaction record s OK Transfer 8 Price Change History record s OK Transfer O Shift Totals Data History record s OK Transfer 0 End Of Day Tank Data record s OK Transfer 77 Audit record s OK Transfer 1 Attendant Totals record s OK Transfer 0 Attendant Bag record s OK System is now in the NORMAL state Please REBOOT your computer lest Master lest Local Once this is complete the PC is running back in master mode and will connect to the master database The PC MUST be REBOOTED to complete the process lt Considerations The local mode has been added to the FOCUS system to be used in extreme cases If the 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 189 FOCUS User Manual 14 3 1 14 3 2 connection to the master database is being lost regularly this would point to more serious network or configuration problems If this is the case contact your support person to report these proble
65. tank dips for each tank can be set from the Tanks Tank Dips page To update the tank dips click Request to request the current tank dips enter the new dip data and click Save Send The 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Forecourt Manager tank dip must be less than the tank s capacity that has been setup in the Forecourt Configuration application When tanks are manifolded enter dips for master tank and all slave tanks at the same time this logic is enforced by the user interface Note The system will log a dip if it is entered for a tank that is configured to use automatic tank gauging but it will not change the tank level 4 44 Tank Density When tank density probes are installed on the forecourt the controller maintains a set of tank density data for each tank This data can be viewed from the Tanks Fuel Density page Click Request to request the current tank density data 45 Attendant Management The FOCUS system allows up to 9999 attendants to be set up These attendants can be assigned different security profiles depending on their job description In an integrated POS environment attendants are used to map POS attendants to different FOCUS security profiles e g five different attendants with different security profiles can be setup and the POS can then map these to their users 4 5 1 Attendants The FOCUS system attendants have to be assigned various details e g password name etc When attendant tagging is being used
66. the PCC Timer Definitions appendix Editing Timers Timers can be manually edited or a configuration template can be applied To manually modify a specific timer value select the appropriate timer and click Open File Open The Timer Properties dialog will be displayed the editing of the chosen timer 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Forecourt Configuration 46 Timer 17 Properties Site 10 Number Name Value 30 seconds Default Cancel Enter the new value using the controls provided take special care to note the timer units some timers are in seconds and others in minutes The default setting for the selected timer can be restored by clicking Default Click OK to save or Cancel to abort all changes The number of timers is fixed at twenty timers cannot be added or deleted All timers can be restored to their default values by clicking Restore Defaults Operations Restore Defaults Timer values from one timer can be copied select the timer and click Copy Edit Copy and then pasted on to another timer select another timer and click Paste Edit Paste Save Send Once the timer configuration is complete click Save Send Operations Save Send to save the data to the database and send it to the PCC or Cancel Operations Cancel to cancel all changes The timers may be configured while the PCC is offline in this case the data will be saved to the database but not sent to t
67. the commissioning ofa PCC It may also be required during a PCC software upgrade or catastrophic failure of the PCC Some configuration entities auxiliary devices UPIs and units are stored in non volatile configuration memory within the PCC EEPROM and are NOT reset during the master reset process The PCC date time is set to the PC s date time when a master reset is performed from the Forecourt Configuration application Should the master reset be required to be performed on a commissioned site e for a PCC software upgrade the following steps are recommended to preserve the configuration data 1 Request configuration using the request configuration function 2 Master Reset and perform PCC software upgrade if applicable 3 Send configuration using the send configuration function Should shift control be enabled on the site the day must be ended before performing the master reset Performing a Master Reset A master reset is performed by selecting the sites master node and clicking Master Reset Tools Master Reset A confirmation dialog will be displayed click Yes to continue or No to cancel Due to the nature of the master reset another confirmation is displayed click Yes to perform the master reset or No to cancel 2012 POSTEC Data Systems s FOCUS User Manual 3 3 5 3 3 6 3 3 7 System Date Time The controller date time is an important part of the FOCUS system the date time must be co
68. the database The Database Purge dialog displays the progress of the purge procedure Click OK to close this dialog once the purge is complete When automatic purging is setup refer Options the Forecourt Manager will initiate the purge on startup every two weeks The dialog shown above can be configured via the Options dialog to be shown hidden during an automatic purge Backup The FOCUS database can be backed up using the Database Maintenance Utility The size of the database can be decreased by performing a backup and then restore this is similar to running defragment on your hard drive The first time a backup is performed can take several minutes it is also a resource hungry procedure and should NOT be performed while the store is in full operation Click Backup to perform a manual backup of the database The Database Backup dialog displays the progress of the backup procedure Click OK to close this dialog once the backup is complete Restore The FOCUS database can be restored from a previous backup using the Database Maintenance Utility The size of the database can be decreased by performing a backup and then restore this is similar to running defragment on your hard drive The first time a restore is performed can take some time several minutes it is also a resource hungry procedure and should NOT be performed while the site is in full operation 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 144 1as FOCUS User Manual 8 6 8
69. the image of a forecourt clicking on an area of the forecourt from the home page will zoom into that area and allow selection of option pages GUI Page Graphical View 2012 POSTEC Data Systems es FOCUS User Manual Quick Page ans Access Menu Bow are PontofSale Ospensers SackOffce Attendants Tanks WetstockTotais SteUtites FOCUSSenp OPTs Controls Home Initial User Sas Option Controls GUI Page MOAOaH Login and Help a 9 Site Number Name PCC Login Status 337 Po5 Test PCC Status Connected Logged In Onine 6 34 14 04 08 Gica GUI Page Detailed View Home PomtofSale Dispensers BackOffice Attendants Tarks Wetstock Totas Ste Usities FOCUS Setup OPTs Attendants amp A endarts Details Proties anc Dispenser Assgnmert Back Office wi Back Office PCC Date Time Forecourt Configuration Reports System Ste Detais Utites and Audit NOOOR LERI 49 Wetstock Totals a Wetstock Totais PCC Accumunted Shift and Dispenser Totais Dispensers E Dspenser Alocaton Limts Grace Prices Dispenser Modes Operating Schedule and TVD Banner OPTs Outdoor Payment Terminais Forecourt Recept and Methods of Payment Point of Sale Point of Sale FOCUS Setup PoS Setup Keydoars Setup anc Transaction Expiry Tanks Tanks Tant Dips Densty Fuel Suppliers and Tank inventory Site Utilities Ste Utites PoS Falback Reset DispenserPEPS Return Transaction Transacton Re
70. this will perform a silent request configuration returning 0 on success or 1 on failure Step 2 Install the FOCUS suite refer the installation section It is recommended that the FOCUS suite is installed to a different location e g C Program Files Postec FOCUS Step 3 Run the FOCUS Registry Upgrade Utility RegistryUpgradeUtility exe This will upgrade the existing Forman 4 registry settings to FOCUS registry settings The Registry UpgradeUtility exe can be run with the command line parameter S this will perform a silent registry upgrade returning O on success or 1 on failure Step 4 Run the Forman 4 Upgrade application Forman4Upgrade exe This application will populate the FOCUS database with data from the existing Forman 4 database The Forman4Upgrade exe can be run with the command line parameters A S this will perform a silent database upgrade returning O on success or 1 on failure Step 5 Run the PCC Connection Wizard and setup the connection type Registry settings are available for this contact a Postec support engineer for more details Note Ensure the application node numbers are setup and appropriate applications are activated Step 6 If the site requires a PCC software upgrade the minimum version required for FOCUS is 628 it should be performed once the above steps have been successfully completed It is most likely that the PCC software upgrade will involve a master reset Should this be the case ensure you pe
71. two formats standard where the data is displayed in text format or graphical where the data is displayed pictorially Select the desired report type from the radio group provided When licenced the 4DET day summary report is also available by checking the appropriate checkbox Schedule A end of day procedure can be started from the Visual Console s menu However in some cases it may not be desirable to rely on staff to remember to select this item Therefore the end of day can be scheduled by selecting Yes and entering the desired start of day time using the control provided Finish Click Finish to save the end of day settings or Cancel to discard any changes 4 9 2 4 Price Change Setup Wizard The price change setup wizard is used to set up the scheduled price change procedure Navigate through the wizard using the Next and Back buttons answer the questions to set up the schedule price change procedure as desired Confirmation Location When a scheduled price change occurs it needs to be confirmed This confirmation message will be sent to all Visual Console clients that are online to the controller at this time In a central database configuration i e a master database being accessed by multiple PC s a confirmation is only required on one of the PC s as the information will be written to the central database on confirmation Select Yes if you would like this PC to action the confirmation or No if another PC will take care
72. uncontrollable level by default transaction data older than two months is permanently deleted during the purge process Login The Transaction Viewer may require a user to login this allows the access to the transaction data to be restricted Enter a valid user name and password to login to the Transaction Viewer Only the password is case sensitive The user name of the last user to login is displayed The initial default login after installation is User name Administrator Password password The Setup Utility is used to manage users and specify if a login is required for the Transaction Viewer application 11 1 User Interface The Transaction Viewer displays transaction records in a grid Transaction Viewer Cuy File View Tools Help EA PE 2l8 B BAHA l Current Site Site 11 Grant s Gas Garage v I Auto a Current fiteris DaterT ime gt 28 Jun 2004 11 28 04 Ordered by Start Date Time Asc Dispenser Desc nie ricm sele ce uses vane anert en oo a e sarta 28 06 2004 3 24 00 PM r 16 Diesel 0 763 Transaction p 39 0 1 1 28 06 200 28 06 2004 3 24 00 PM N 12 1 Super 1 100 A 0 1 1 1 26 06 200 28 06 2004 3 24 00 PM N 9 1 Super 1 100 140 40 154 44 0 s 1 1 26 06 200 28 06 2004 3 24 00 PM N 2 1 Unleaded 0 980 150 43 147 42 0 1 1 1 28 06 200 28 06 2004 4 40 00 PM r 16 1 Diesel 0 763 23 00 17 55 0 1 A 1 28 06 200 28 06 2004 4 40 00 PM r 15 1 Unleaded 0 980 22 68 22 23 0 1 1 1 28 06 200
73. users used by the Forecourt Configuration application Templates The Forecourt Configuration implements the concept of configuration templates This is a powerful feature that allows a configuration to be saved as a template and applied later For example when commissioning sites of different two companies the grade setups may be different between the companies but the same within each company a grade template can be saved for each company and then applied appropriately gt rorecourt LONTIBUra tion e Edit Templates Operations Tools C 5 Si So Save 4s Template LE Dr Apply Template qi 8 Manage Templates E EIA B Eal General Properties Currently templates can be saved for grades tanks dispensers auxiliary devices PCC timers UPIs Units OPT settings FPoS program and AVI channels Saving a Template 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Forecourt Configuration ze To save a particular configuration entities setup as a template click Save As Template Templates Save As Template the New Template dialog will be displayed Enter the name and optional description of the template this is used later to identify a specific template Click OK to save or Cancel to abort changes Applying a Template To apply a template to a configuration entity click Apply Template Templates Apply Template the Select Template dialog will be displayed Select the desired template and click Apply to apply this configuration o
74. with the FOCUS system the attendant tag number bag limit and authorisation must also be configured Editing Attendant Information The attendant details are configured from the Tanks or PoS or Dispensers Attendants Details page Each attendant has a unique attendant number this along with the password is used for authentication when an attendant logs in to the Visual Console Forecourt Manager or FLIP either directly or through a integrated POS application Different security profiles can be assigned to give an attendant rights to perform tasks within the FOCUS system The attendant user name is used for logging and reporting purposes An image up to a maximum of 75w x 100h can be assigned for each attendant When attendant tagging is being used on a forecourt attendants are assigned tags each tag has a unique number The tag number must be 12 digits long and will typically start with a 1 for attendant tags The bag limit for an attendant specifies how much money they are allowed to collect on the forecourt before their authorisation will fail Attendant s authorisation is controlled by the Authorised setting uncheck this to immediately prevent the attendant from continuing to operate this may also be done in the case of a lost attendant tag Adding an Attendant To add an attendant click New a new attendant with default data will be created Deleting an Attendant To delete an existing attendant select the attendant and click
75. 012 POSTEC Data Systems 1er FOCUS User Manual Select Components Which components should be installed Select the components you want to install clear the components you do not want to install Click Next when you are ready to continue Server components O Classic Server binary Super Server binary Developer and admin tools components Current selection requires at least 20 8 MB of disk space English Click Next The Start Menu Folder page is displayed click Next The Additonal Tasks page is displayed unless otherwise advised always select the options as displayed below Select Additional Tasks piis Which additional tasks should be perfomed E Select the additional tasks you would like Setup to perform while installing Firebird then Start Firebird automatically everytime you boot up Install Control Panel Applet C Copy Firebird client library to lt system gt directory Generate client librery as GDS32 DLL for legacy app support Click Next The Firebird Database Server is now ready to be installed click Next to install the Firebird Database Server using the parameters specified earlier The installation progress is displayed this should only take a few minutes 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Once the installation is complete the Information page is displayed click Next The Firebird Database Server installation is complete click Finish to close 14 1 1 Direct Interface S
76. 02 Decli PCC Information Onine Version 6 33 03 0 Transaction 1066 STAN 1355 PAN Transaction 1067 STAN 1356 PAN 2 Transaction 1068 STAN 1357 PAN Transaction 1069 STAN 1358 PAN 1 A running log of the authorisation finalisation request response messages are displayed in the window ifthe Display checkbox is checked Click the Clear Log button to clear the log window Note The Status dialog is supported only on Windows XP and only for the PCC interface at this time Support The LAS service can be configured to write a log file this is controlled by the Forecourt Manager Local Accounts page under General Settings on the toolbar The log file is saved in the Logs folder off the LAMS installation folder the format of the log file is as follows Log_xxx_LAMServer_dd_mm_yy log xxx the log file number log files roll on a 7 day period dd day mm month yy year Forecourt Manager Local Accounts The Forecourt Manager Local Accounts page is used to manage account card holders statements and payments This also provides the configuration interface for the LAS serice 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Local Accounts 168 13 6 1 User Interface The Local Accounts page is split into two grids the top grid lists the accounts and the bottom grid the card holders associated with the selected account The toolbars are used for adding modifying deleting accounts adding modifying and deleting ca
77. 0403_121856_Serial log The serial monitor displays the serial messages being sent to from the PCC Server and PCC Since the protocol is propriety to the system the messages are usually deciphered by a Postec engineer The monitoring can be started stopped using the Start Stop buttons The message window can be cleared using the clear button Forecourt status messages may be filtered out using the filter button Socket 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Properties Communication Port Socket Connections Listen port Socket Monitor 3 PCC version Software 6 31 19 06 04 S Africa Hardware 4 3 Serial No 00000761CFSF The socket monitor TCP IP can be opened from this tab by clicking the Socket Monitor button If the socket communications are required to be logged to a file this may be requested by a Postec engineer check the Log to file check box The log to file option should not be left on for long periods of time as it is a debugging option only and does use up system resources therefore the system will automatically turn it off after 30 days should it be inadvertently left on A new log file is started every day at midnight and each time the PCC Server application is run The log file name consists of the date time to ensure each file name is unique the log files will be written to FOCUS Installation Directory Logs Socket ddmmyy_hhmmss_Socket log e g A socket log file started on 2nd April 2003 at 12 18 55 C Pr
78. 100 of the tank capacity Volume at start of day this is the volume recorded during a FOCUS start of day Deliveries today the volume of deliveries that have been made into the tank since the start of the day This figure is reset during a FOCUS end of the day Sales today the volume of sales made since the start of the day This figure is reset during a FOCUS end of the day Operating variance the difference between the current stock gauged volume and the theoretical book stock figure maintained from the dispenser sales Tank pressure the pressure in the tank in KPa This is only relevant to tanks containing gas and using a pressure transducer Release pressure the pump release pressure in KPa Calibration status the status of tank auto calibration The calibration status can have the following states Unknown Pre Calibration In calibration Processing Required Tank Calibrated Theoretical curve Suspended The report will also display any alarms which have been triggered for each tank including e High product level e Low product level e High water level e Suspect Tank leaks e Sudden loss e Communications errors e Data integrity errors The graphical tank inventory report displays a relevant subset of the above information in a graphical form The display setup for this report can be changed in the Forecourt Manager under the Tanks Tank Inventory page Sample Tank Density This report presents the real time ta
79. 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 109 FOCUS User Manual A transaction in the first buffer can be transferred to the second buffer by entering the dispenser number and pressing the Ready key or clicking the dispenser status icon This enables the dispenser to be re authorised and used even though the last transaction hasn t been paid off yet It is only possible to transfer a transaction if the memory buffer is empty When Automemory mode is allowed and selected the above function will occur automatically when the nozzle on the dispenser is used for a second delivery Transaction Processing The system supports up to ten transactions per dispenser In this case the number of visible transaction buffers is usually still set to two When a dispenser has more than two transactions the last transaction buffer will display List x where x is the total number of transactions available for that dispenser To process a transaction from the first buffer enter the dispenser number into the entry box and press Sale key or click the transaction buffer button containing the transaction When List x is not displayed a transaction can be processed from the second buffer as described in the previous section When List x is displayed click on the List x transaction buffer button or enter the dispenser number and press the Memory key A transaction list will then be displayed allowing keyboard and touch access to all the transactions for that dispe
80. 28 06 2004 4 40 00 PM r 14 1 CNG 0 652 12 56 8 19 0 1 1 1 28 06 200 28 06 2004 4 40 00 PM r 13 1 Unleaded 0 980 9 55 9 36 0 1 1 1 28M06 200 28 06 2004 4 40 00 PM r 8 1 Diesel 0 763 32 20 24 57 0 1 1 1 2806 200 28 06 2004 4 40 00 PM r E 1 Unleaded 0 980 20 30 19 89 0 1 1 1 28 06 200 28 06 2004 4 40 00 PM r 6 1 Unleaded 0 980 2 39 2 34 0 1 1 1 28 06 2002 28 06 2004 4 40 00 PM r 3 1 CNG 0 652 10 77 7 02 0 1 1 1 28 06 2004 28 06 2004 4 40 00 PM r 1 1 Unleaded 1 100 4 25 4 68 0 1 1 14 28 06 200 28 06 2004 4 42 00 PM N 16 1 Diesel 0 763 36 80 28 08 0 1 1 1 28 06 200 28 06 2004 4 42 00 PM N 15 1 Unleaded 0 980 27 46 26 91 0 1 1 1 28 06 200 28 06 2004 4 42 00 PM N 14 1 CNG 0 652 2153 14 04 0 1 4 1 28 06 200 28 06 2004 4 42 00 PM r 13 1 Unleaded 0 980 9 55 9 36 0 1 1 1 28 06 2004 28 06 2004 4 42 00 PM N 12 1 Super 1 100 213 2 34 0 1 14 28 06 2004 124 records Apply a filter to the transaction data Click Open File Open to open an individual transaction record the record details dialog will be displayed Click Print to print the record s details in report form Filter A filter can be applied to these records to display only those that meet a certain criteria Click Apply Filter View Apply Filter to open the Apply Filter dialog and specify the filter settings Enable a field using the check box provided Some fields allow an operator to be specified e gt a certain date time When a filter is app
81. 4 folder removed from the computer to avoid confusion Remember to change the start up shortcut to point to the new PCC Server application when a serial connection is being used or remove the 14 11 shortcut should ethernet be replacing the serial interface Notes When a serial connection is setup in step 5 be sure the FOCUS PCC Server is running during steps 6 8 to allow successful communication to the PCC Glossary Forecourt Specific UPI AVI OPT MPD NRT TVD PD Error DCA CRIP 4DET General CPU TCP IP PC LAN DLL BDE COM DBMS POS MOP Local Account LAS Universal Pump Interface Automatic Vehicle Identification Outdoor Payment Terminal Multi Product Dispenser Non Resetable Totals Tagged Visual Display Power Down Error Driveway Card Accepter Card Reader In Pump Postec Data Entry Terminal Central Processing Unit Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol Personal Computer Local Area Network Dynamic Link Library Borland Database Engine Component Object Model Database Management System Point of Sale Method of Payment Local Account Server service Revision 1 58 June 2012 2012 POSTEC Data Systems
82. 7 All other FOCUS applications must be shutdown before a restore can be started Click Restore to perform a manual restore from a previous backup of the database Please be aware that ifa restore is performed from an old backup some data may be permanently lost because of this a confirmation dialog is displayed Click Yes to continue with the restore process or No to abort The restoration of the database can be restricted to certain users using the user manager in the Setup Utility When a user does not have rights to restore the database an error messaged will be displayed When Yes is chosen the Database Restore dialog displays the progress of the restore procedure Click OK to close this dialog once the restore is complete Delete Logs The Database Maintenance Utility writes log files whenever it performs database operations These log files are useful in the event of a failure to help Postec support staff deal with any problems However after a while the logs files do nothing more than take up hard disk space These log files can be permanently deleted by clicking Delete Logs a confirmation dialog will be displayed Click Yes to continue with the log file deletion process or No to abort The log files are stored in FOCUS Installation Directory Logs Database Command Line Functionality Some functions can be started by running the Database Maintenance Utility with a command line parameter these are detailed
83. Append Line A new line of code can be inserted at the currently selected line by clicking Insert Line Edit Insert Line The selected line of code can be permanently deleted by clicking Delete Line Edit Delete Line The position of a line of code can be changed up or down any number of times by using the Move Line Up Edit Move Line Up and Move Line Down Edit Move Line Down controls The entire FPoS program can be cleared by clicking Clear Edit Clear a confirmation dialog will be displayed Click Yes to clear the current FPoS program or No to cancel Development A FPoS program is developed by inserting FPoS instructions setting up labels and specifying parameters where required Different FPoS instructions require different parameters some don t require any parameters The label for a particular line of code can be set by typing the label directly into the appropriate label field cre guk muyan 1UUIS op Bo S ES L X 1 Enter Staff No Enter Si 2 Pre Aut 3 Check System Check A Enter Di imn Frtar Di The instruction of a particular line of code can be set by right clicking in the instruction field this will pop up a menu displaying the available instruction groups and their corresponding instructions Select an instruction by clicking on it The number of parameters for each instruction is displayed in the status bar hint as the each instruction is selected 2012 POSTEC Data Systems a 7 BERGIE
84. C Data Systems Multi site 132 Select Site Site Site 11 Grants Gas Garage y Modem Password RAS connection details User Password Connection Type C Serial Modem C LAN Status via UDP e WAN Status via TCP V Use RAS Device Agere Systems AC 97 Modem v IP Address Connect Close RAS Connection State Event 6 Authentication Notification RAS Connection State Event 18 Projection Completion RAS Connection State Event 6 Authentication Notification RAS Connection State Event 14 Login Authenticated RAS Connection State Event 8192 Connected Online Authenticated RAS Authentication Successful Connected gi Once the connection is made the Select Site dialog can be closed by clicking Close or it will automatically close after a short time period The tray icon will now be green indicating a site is connected the tool tip will indicate which site is connected FOCUS Multi Site Server Site 11 Connected Monday eed 28 06 2004 Now that a site has been connected that site may logged into from the Visual Console Forecourt Manager or Forecourt Configuration tool Visual Console Site Connection The Visual Console automatically switches to the connected site and logs in this is because the Visual Console is only used to look at dispenser statuses when it is being used in the Multi site version and does not have any data that can be configured o
85. Cancel however this should only be done if errors because it will result in the database only containing part of the controller s configuration The request configuration requests the following configuration entities e General properties e Dial Properties e TVD banner e Site number O 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Forecourt Configuration ss e Units e Auxiliary devices e UPIs e Tanks e Dispenser hose tank assignment e Dispenser allocation limits e Dispenser modes e Dispenser miscellaneous settings e Grades e Timers e Forman 3 Attendants e OPT settings XFuel enabled e FPoS program XFuel enabled e OPT prompts XFuel enabled e Forecourt receipt XFuel enabled e AVIs XFuel enabled The entities marked XFuel enabled will only be requested when the system is configured as a XFuel system Some configuration is dependent on the version of PCC refer to Limited Configuration Functionality appendix for more details The request configuration does NOT request the following e Grade prices these are not stored in the database 3 3 4 Master Reset A master reset is irreversible and will e Zero all PCC configuration and data storage memory e Load hardware configuration data from EEPROM e Initialise PCC with default parameters This is not a regularly used function and should not be used unless advised It will completely clear all configuration details and active data The procedure should be the first step in
86. FOCUS User Manual Revision 1 5 8 June 2012 KA POSTEC Postec Data Systems Auckland New Zealand www postec co nz focus postec co nz FOCUS USER MANUAL FOCUS Forecourt Control Management and Configuration Software COPYRIGHT Postec Data Systems All rights reserved No parts of this work may be reproduced in any form or by any means graphic electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording taping or information storage and retrieval systems without the written permission of the publisher Products that are referred to in this document may be either trademarks and or registered trademarks of the respective owners The publisher and the author make no claim to these trademarks While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document the publisher and the author assume no responsibility for errors or omissions or for damages resulting from the use of information contained in this document or from the use of programs and source code that may accompany it In no event shall the publisher and the author be liable for anyloss of profit or any other commercial damage caused or alleged to have been caused directly or indirectly by this document Publisher Postec Data Systems Managing Technical Editor Jono Hill Graphics Designer Logan Maire Team Coordinator Grant Mclvor Production Jono Hill Icaro Lavrador Sabu Hariharan Contents Table of Contents Part Introducing FOCUS 2 A
87. Feature codes O7A4 8457 SBE3 1D48 Applications All A v Add Feature Hardware Codes 1 Hardware key 3 Clear PCC Serial Number 000005440932 Grace Period First Run Date 23 08 2008 0 day s of grace period left Load Registration File In this example the feature code has registered all applications All applications will now be registered the About dialog will show the software key When an invalid feature code is entered an error message will be displayed Should the incorrect software key feature codes be entered i e another site s codes click Clear to clear all the registration information and start the process again Hardware Registration The FOCUS software requires the controller hardware to be registered this applies to the standard edition and is not required when using a multi site licence The hardware key is generated from the controller s internal electronic serial number which can be viewed when online from the Forecourt Manager application s System tab and the Forecourt Configuration application under General Properties The internal serial number must be supplied to Postec to generate the hardware key This will link the FOCUS software in installed on site to the controller that is installed on that site Enter the hardware key supplied by Postec using the four edit controls the cursor will automatically move from one to the next Once a valid hardware key
88. Gauge Controller Console Node used to decode the ATG console type No Probe Logical Gauge Robert Shaw Compac DipStick ENRAF Stic 867 Red Jacket ATG VR 50 300 350 R VR 250 EBW Auto Stic Tatsuno Micon 10 Postec TIM 11 US Test 12 MTS USTD Probe 13 LPG 4 20mA IF ils ar Ena of ay o ATS Rocorlaioncyoe OT 14 7 2 3 ATG DIM Used to send dispenser start and stop transactions data to a Tank Gauge console ome PCat communications win tho ATS comoterDM Y 14 7 2 4 Auto Vehicle ID OONOaABRWN OO Automatic Vehicle Identification AVI device Node number records the Pump number the AVI channel number is mapped to PCC established communications with the AVI controller 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 201 FOCUS User Manual PCC lost communications with the AVI Controller VIU Authentication AVI controller failed to read and authenticate the Vehicle tag Err Nozzle channel or vehicle tag could be faulty There might to be too much distance between the nozzle reader and the tag Grade Restriction Vehicle tag reports grade restriction prohibiting grade available from the nozzle being used Sale cannot proceed other than as an AVI override transaction VIU Blocked Vehicle identification Unit or Tag has been blocked from use by the system Probably for security or payment reasons Device Disabled AVI controller reports channel error or lf PCC loses comms with AVI controller
89. General The controls in the general appearance group allow the user to setup the general appearance of the Visual Consoles main form Status icon The status icon represents the dispensers status in pictorial form The following properties are configurable e Height the height of the status icon panel e Width the width of the status icon panel e Spacing the spacing between each status icon Control panel The control panel is located on the left hand side of the Visual Console and contains controls for keyboard entry authorising calling dispensers and emergency stop The following properties are configurable e Width the width of the control panel e Show authorise calling dispensers icon This option determines if the authorise calling dispensers icon is displayed in the control panel that when clicked authorises all calling dispensers at once The authorising calling dispensers icon is shown below ie e Show keyboard entry control This option determines if the keyboard entry control is displayed in the control panel This control is used when a keyboard is being used to drive the Visual Console and is where the user enter dispenser numbers for performing actions such as authorise and hold When a touch only environment is being used this control does not need to be displayed Grade title panel The grade name may be displayed in a panel above the dispenser status icon this option is turned on via the Display gra
90. Ia AB aa 1 Enter Staff No Enter Staff Code 2 Pre Authorization Check General P Baana 3 Check System Check System Operation St PESE n E Enea Compartment Number Authorization gt Enter Contract Number 4 _ Enter Pump Enter Pump Receipt Enter Engine Hours 5 pre fuihorizetion Check Card Tag Read gt Enter Expiry Date 5 Scan Barcode Auto Vehicle ID P Enter Method of Payment 7 Request Authorization Request Authorization Supervisor Functions gt Enter Misc Data 1 3 Enter Contract Number Enter Misc Data 2 9 Program End End Enter Bar Code al 200 i Error Line 02 Unknown Parameter 7 77 Error Line 06 Numeric Parameter Range Error Numeric parameter must in the range 1 to 20 Error Line 08 Numeric Parameter Range Error Numeric parameter must in the range 1 to 20 Information Comnile Failed There are 3 errors Enter Plant Number Jump Enter Staff Code Requires 0 address parameters and 1 numeric parameters FPoS Program Editor Enter Odometer Enter PAN Enter Pin Enter Plant Number Enter Preset Money Amount Enter Preset Yolume Amount Enter Pump Enter Pump Basic Enter Route Number Enter Staff Code Enter Vehicle Registration No As mentioned earlier some instructions require address parameters some numeric parameters both or none When an instruction is selected that requires an address parameter the associated lt 14 po ERE g Enter Staff Codel Pre Authorization Check Che
91. If a hose volume value is corrupted within the controller this is a very rare occurrence the field will display Corrupted To correct this corrupted value set the volume value appropriately e g 0 00 and click Save Send to send the data to the controller 4 3 3 Dispenser Electronic Totals The controller maintains a shadow of electronic dispenser totals where available as not all dispenser model protocols support electronic totals These totals can be viewed at anytime providing the controller is online from the Back Office Wetstock Totals Dispenser Totals page These totals are most typically used for the FOCUS reporting to provide the best reconciliation Click Request to request the current electronic dispenser totals Sometimes a hose value volume may display one of the following strings Offline or N A Dispenser is offline the dispensers must be online to the controller to view these totals Unsupported or N A Dispenser does not support these totals Corrupted Dispenser has corrupt totals 2012 POSTEC Data Systems FOCUS User Manual 4 4 4 4 1 4 4 2 4 4 3 Initialising Dispenser is currently under initialisation Tank Management The FOCUS system allows logical and automatic tank gauging to be used or a mixture of both The real time tank inventory can be viewed and reported on When logical tank gauging is being used the tank dips should be entered regularly to ensure the rec
92. Manager provides a POS Control page to switch from integrated POS to standalone and 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Forecourt Manager os vice versa There are a number of options available for how the Visual Console will change its behaviour when the integrated POS is offline These POS offline options are e Show memory buffer the memory buffer is displayed if not already when the Visual Console is run standalone Disable auto payoff auto payoff mode is disabled so the operator can manually process the fuel transactions Print receipts the Visual Console will print receipts as the POS is not able to Run Transaction Viewer the FOCUS Transaction Viewer application will be run to provide a display of transactions process by the Visual Console When the Visual Console is switched back to integrated POS mode the previous settings are restored allowing it to continue operating how it was originally configured to do so Receipt Options The Visual Console can be configured to print a receipts however when the Visual Console is integrated with a POS i e not running stand alone the receipt printing functionality is typically part of the POS application In this case the Print Receipt option should be set to None However if it is desirable to have a receipt printed by the Visual Console the Print receipt drop down control provides the following options e None don t print a receipt e Always always print a receipt
93. No to cancel Select the file from the open dialog A confirmation from the registry editor will be displayed Click Yes to continue or No to cancel An information dialog is displayed to indicate the success or failure of the import Special Considerations Although the import export process speeds up the setup process some considerations need to be made These include e Shift control ensuring there is not two or more POS PCs setup to run the same scheduled SOD EOD s e Price Changes ensuring there is not two or more POS PCs setup to confirm price changes 2012 POSTEC Data Systems es FOCUS User Manual 4 9 4 Save Cancel Changes To save any changes that have been made to these settings click Save or click Cancel to cancel all changes These settings are saved in the windows registry When the Disable sale processing option has been changed the Visual Console will need to be restarted for the new setting to take effect a dialog will be displayed reminding the user of this Point of Sale The POS integration is a key part of the FOCUS system This allows fuel transactions to be processed by a POS along with dry stock Each different POS requires certain parameters to be defined in order for this integration to work seamlessly The PoS FOCUS Setup POS page provides the controls to configure these parameters These should be setup in accordance with each specific POS s documentation POS Options Th
94. O 200 ATG Controller as cad eth castes at ds o ls arado 200 ATG DIM A a eas ee Auto Vehicle ID O ON DataLogger a we EP E F G AuthrTerm Postec 1D AA TAT ia 202 Fuel PUMO n sre a a E A A A A AA SAE 202 THOS PIGOMMDULON 222 aaa 203 LPG Trans UC Sii ii A a covert caubicabattasces 203 A E O O N 203 POS A dere ee a ae See ei 205 FGI GSI aad os va O ac veg sabes bec tees nto O TT 205 O ee Re eet 205 Pump Controller tico iii enaena aea a ccatcesnaias odessdatnnecaasuscttah aantdsineieashitiadasesesinahecatsizsateivengias 206 SIP RUN NN 206 Tagging Vis ual DNS Play cas od 206 Tank PrOD 1 ina 206 Terminal Manager ie 207 UPL lai dehidre Aa alae eee ttn ere A ee ee ee ee 207 8 Wetstock Reports arianen anik TaN A AAE A KEERN EAERI KASERA TAEA AT 207 Ae ea E E O 208 oso aiee aE E EE NENA T as 208 Grade Total mit a dey eee a ei 208 Tank Inventory bets 209 Tank Des iii A As 209 Shift Daly Mon da 210 Hose Sales Totals voii ti dE pa 210 Grade Sales Total td 211 Attendant Salesi anena A As 211 Console Transaction SUMMA Y vale edi ANE E aa aE aaa Triat 212 Dispenser Console Sales Reconcilation 212 Wetstock Transactions s e Zi 213 Historical ierse wee 213 Historical Price Changes ai Aari svete e A AA AA 213 Historical Deliveries io rta 213 Historical Recon CANO lt A A aa aia a es 214 Weistock SUMMARY oia eri 214 9 Limited Configuration Functionality cccecee
95. O O TO 2 System Architecture a r E anna 2 2 System Requirements cooonnncccccnnnncncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnr cnn rre 3 3 Quick Sd a 4 4 FOCUS Installations 22 2 cc0c2secesccdascesdceeccadscassccsats sens ccasnantdeetcseicesaccuasetpasscceseasdicusssesccasss 5 Database Configuration Suite Setup Registering ST moss cect cue ees ss cece ic cheesy eas sete seceded le deet cited say lees deen ceca ed cde dedecc sss chee ENEA Part Il Setting up Controller Connection 13 Ay AAW AKC ci A a Aliada 13 Serial Connection ii A ae eae 13 LAN GOmMe CUM iii esta ceees E E EEE tone ek 15 2 PCC Network Setup Wizard ccccceeeeeceeeee cece eeee ee eeeeee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeaeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 16 AAA E A 17 Serial LAN 3 PCC Connection Wizard cooconconconcnononccnnoncnanoncnanoncnanennnnncnn narran narran narran nnarnnnnnrnnnnarnnnanenas 19 QUICK di ai Serial Quick Start LAN Quick Start Serial Connection LAN Connection Client Node Address 4 PCC A Sees Do cak Aa a E E aa a aa A de lerceen leew stavecstes Pr per tiS eis cscs tcedeckcaveanssneadeededvas socsuactitsndsnassesausdivsedunusttnnentiutvsancutedunsivadeudadsudiuasbvaduadsdtesuesncvosvaushdunsbasdcsan e 22 Part Ill Forecourt Configuration 25 A AAA ON 25 A EE nS EY eS nf er eS oD PY Oe EE ce Templates Customizing General Settings Communication SttINGS eee eeceesceesceeseeeeeeeseeeaeeeaeeeesaecsaeesnees
96. OCUS installer FOCUS Suite Installation Click the Install FOCUS Suite button on the FOCUS installer screen to start the FOCUS installation if the FOCUS installer cannot be displayed run the E Setup Setup exe where E is your 2012 POSTEC Data Systems CD ROM drive The installation program will first check to ensure the Microsoft installer is installed if it is not this will be installed automatically Once the installation is ready to run the Welcome page will be displayed click Next When a new installation or upgrade is being performed the Licence Agreement page will be displayed if the version you are attempting to install is already installed the Program Maintenance page will be displayed instead Read the licence agreement and select accept the terms in the licence agreement to enable the Next button if you do not agree with the terms click Cancel to abort the installation click Next The FOCUS Readme is displayed this contains product information including system requirements For more information on the FOCUS suite e g enhancements bug fixes refer to the release documents contained on the installation CD click Next The customer information page is displayed enter the appropriate details using the controls supplied click Next The Destination Folder page is displayed this specifies where the FOCUS program files will be installed on this PC The default folder is displayed if you wish to change this do so u
97. Print Receipt Select Transaction Pay Date Time Dispenser Amount Unit Price Volume 18 08 2006 12 03 48 p m 2 Super 5 00 2 000 2 50 A 18 08 2006 11 59 21 a m 2 Super 12 50 2 000 6 25 16 08 2006 3 36 43 p m 1 Unleaded 2 00 1 000 2 00 16 08 2006 3 36 21 p m 1 Unleaded 12 00 1 000 12 00 16 08 2006 3 34 55 p m 1 Unleaded 10 00 1 000 10 00 16 08 2006 3 33 35 p m 1 Unleaded 15 00 1 000 15 00 16 08 2006 12 28 19 p m 1 Unleaded 10 00 1 000 10 00 16 08 2006 12 27 13 p m 1 Unleaded 10 00 1 000 10 00 16 08 2006 11 48 01 a m 2 Super 21 25 2 000 10 62 v 11 08 2006 3 47 43 p m 1 Unleaded 17 50 1 000 17 50 i l Cancel p Select the transaction you wish to print reprint the receipt for and click Print use the up down arrows to scroll through the transactions and the left right arrows to view additional fields Click Cancel to exit without printing e Locked the Visual Console is disabled locked This would occur if the POS application shuts down and logs out of the Visual Console e POS Logged In a POS application is logged into the Visual Console through one of the integration interfaces e Database in use indicates which database the system on this PC is currently accessing Master or Local click this icon for more information Single Multi Line mode The Visual Console may be run in single line or multi line mode 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Visual Console In single line mode if the combined width of all the
98. TE Automatic The tools provided are e Send Configuration sends all configuration data to the controller e Request Configuration requests all configuration data from the controller FPoS Program Editor executes the FPoS Program Editor application this is enabled when the any ofthe OPT configuration nodes are selected Audit Viewer executes the Audit Viewer application Master Reset performs a PCC master reset PCC Date Time synchronises the controller date time and PC date time Reset Dispenser resets a dispenser Setup Grade Prices allows the grade prices to be set used during commissioning only Export Configuration File allows a sites configuration to be exported to an external file Import Configuration File allows an external configuration file to be imported Go Live takes the site to a live state after installation and commissioning Compare Configuration The compare configuration operation is used to compare the configuration stored in the database to the configuration stored in the controller This is a useful tool when the state of the controller s configuration is an unknown This functionality can also be used in multi site FOCUS to compare the configurations of two sites stored in the database Click the Compare Configuration control the following dialog will be displayed Configuration Compare E Site 1 Site 2 MV Only show entities that are different Cancel Select the two si
99. TS fo v Tank data V Dispenser totals Tanks p AV S p In line DCAs Jo Dispenser comms stats Miscellaneous Start of day 00 00 Top node number 7 JV Display running sales Business Logic 0 Transaction stack depth 2 Y Forecourt finalized transactions to POS TVD banner General Properties Site 10 E Address Contact Additional Info F3 Attendant Tagging OPT Specific Misc Control Address details RAS Connection Address 1 12 Lincoln Park Drive V Enabled PC Name epssbc Address 2 westgate User Administrator Country New Zealand Password Change m Contact details IP Address 192 168 0 200 Name Smith Phone No Jos 543 2788 Modem Ph No Jos 543 2789 IP Address 182 168 0 100 J Include area code when same as local area code The site number is the key to a site within the FOCUS system all configuration and historical data is stored in the database with reference to this site number Therefore when using the multi site version the site number must be unique The site s name and address details are used in reports and for general display purposes the contact details name and phone number can be included for future reference When connecting to a remote PCC the phone number of the modem must be specified the first edit control displays the dial prefix the next the area code and then the modem p
100. The file contains the following fields in the shown order separated by commas Field Name Type Description SITE Integer Site number TRANSACTION NUMBER Integer Transaction sequence number DISPENSER Integer Dispenser number HOSE Integer Hose number GRADE Integer Grade number GRADE_NAME String Grade Name VALUE _ Double Transaction value VOLUME Double Transaction volume UNIT_PRICE Double Transaction unit price ATTENDANT Integer Attendant number START_DATE_TIME Date Time Transaction start date and time END_DATE_TIME Date Time Transaction end date and time PAY_DATE_TIME Date Time Transaction pay date and time DAY_NUMBER Integer FOCUS day number SHIFT_NUMBER Integer FOCUS shift number CLIENT_TYPE Integer Client that processed transaction NODE Integer Node number TRANSACTION_TYPE Integer Transaction type TRANSACTION_CODE Integer Transaction code ODOMETER Integer Odometer ENGINE_HOURS Double Engine hours ROUTE_NUMBER Integer Route number METHOD_OF_PAYMENT Integer Method of payment COMPARTMENT_NUMBER Integer Compartment number CONTRACT_NUMBER Integer Contract number PAN NUMBER String PAN number REMAINDER_TRACK_TWO String Remainder of track two data VEHICLE_REGISTRATION String Vehicle registration number 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 161 FOCUS User Manual TAG_NUMBER String Tag number DRIVER_ID String Driver identification MISCDATA1 String Miscellaneous data 1 MISCDATA2 String Miscellaneous data 2 GRADE_CODE String Code assigned to gra
101. a Postec Tag Visual Display TVD mounted on a dispenser or a card reading device such as a 4DET The information is fed back to the Local Account Server LAS via the controller The LAS uses the card holder number to check the account status i e account limit before passing back an approve or decline to the authorise request When the card is approved the dispenser is authorised and fuel can be dispensed On completion of the transaction the transaction details are sent back to the LAS which stores this information in a local database for future billing The Local Account Server may also be used with a supported PoS system where the PoS may use the local account as a payment method for a PoS transaction In this scenario the process is the same as is described above only the PoS is responsible for receiving the card details rather than a TVD 4DET with the controller Local Account Dispenser Server TVD LAS Utilites Local Manager Maintenance Location System Architecture Communications The LAS service communicates directly with the controller va a LAN connection The IP address of the controller and node number used to login to the controller are setup via the General Settings toolbar item in the Forecourt Manager Local Accounts Data Storage FOCUS uses a database to store account card holder transaction and configuration data ALL the required controller configuration is requested from the controller and stored in the l
102. a printer itself by specifying the address of another OPT that does have a printer and hence can print the receipt OPT zero is used to indicate an old legacy 4REC is present on site The receipts from this 4REC can be printed on another OPT by specifying the appropriate Printer Address Click OK to save or Cancel to abort all changes Details from one OPT can be copied select the OPT and click Copy Edit Copy and then pasted on to another OPT select another OPT and click Paste Edit Paste Adding OPTs A site can have up to thirty two OPTs add a new OPT by clicking New File New Enter the relevant details into the OPT Properties dialog and click OK to save or Cancel to abort all changes Alternatively the duplicate functionality can be used to create a new OPT which is duplicate of the selected OPT Simply select the OPT you wish to duplicate and click Duplicate Edit Duplicate a new OPT will be created with the identical configuration as the selected OPT Deleting OPTs Only the last OPT can be deleted to do this select the last OPT and click Delete File Delete When the confirm delete option is on a confirmation dialog will be shown click Yes to delete the OPT or No to cancel Save Send Once the OPT configuration is complete click Save Send Operations Save Send to save the data to the database and send it to the PCC or Cancel Operations Cancel to cancel all changes The OPTs may be
103. a wide range of dispensers These dispensers connect to the PCC through up to four configurable UPIs Universal Pump Interfaces The UPI configuration node allows the configuration of the dispensers connected to these UPIs The UPI configuration is stored in non volatile configuration memory within the PCC EEPROM and is NOT lost on a flat battery or during the master reset process These settings have been factory preset and should only be changed by authorised personnel For more information reference the relevant Postec system commissioning documentation Editing UPIs When the Advanced User option is enabled the UPIs can be edited straight away However when it is disabled the editing is disabled to ensure the UP Is are not inadvertently changed When editing is disabled click Edit Settings Operations Edit Settings to start editing the UPI configuration In doing so a warning will be displayed click Yes to enable the editing controls or No to cancel Should the PCC be offline editing will only be enabled if the appropriate allow editing offline option is enabled Once editing is enabled UPIs can be manually edited or a configuration template can be applied To manually modify a specific UPI select the appropriate UPI and click Open File Open The UPI Properties dialog will be displayed allowing the editing of the chosen UPI Select the dispenser type using the drop down control the other editing controls will be disabled if a disp
104. ade transparent if the button images do not display correctly Option name properties set up colours and font size for the option name label optionally shown in the graphical view Send Request status options delay the hiding of the send request status by a configurable period of time View switch between Graphical and Detyailed as shown in the User Interface 2012 POSTEC Data Systems e FOCUS User Manual 4 2 4 2 1 General Settings Graphical View Send Request status options Touchscreen help mode Delay hide of status by fe seconds MV Show option name View m i J Transparent option buttons weesveeceoey Detailed Option name properties i chat Transparent Colour _ clinfoBk Font Size 8 Colour E clNavy v General Management The Forecourt Manager provides four general management functions e Selection of current operating schedule e Dispenser mode configuration e Grade pricing e Dispenser allocation limits The selection of the current operating schedule and grade pricing can also be performed from the Visual Console menu Operating Schedule There are four configurable operating schedules Each operating schedule allows a set of dispenser operating modes and grade prices to be configured This functionality allows the site to change quickly between a set of dispenser modes grade unit prices without having to reconfigure all of these paramete
105. after a transaction has been processed e Optional a receipt for the last transaction processed can be printed by the user When this option is not set to None the receipt can be configured by clicking the Receipt setup button this will display the Receipt Setup dialog Customer Display The FOCUS system can work with a customer display it is compulsory to have at least one EPOS LCD PIPI on sites in Australia Select the type of customer display using the drop down control there is currently only one customer display available and specify the communication port the customer display will be connected to The Customer display will show the latest dispenser transaction that has been paid off Save Cancel Changes To save any changes that have been made to these settings click Save or click Cancel to cancel all changes These settings are saved in the windows registry Due to the nature ofthese settings the Visual Console will need to be restarted if these settings are changed the Information dialog will be displayed reminding the user to do so 4 9 4 1 Receipt Setup The Receipt Setup dialog allows the configuration of receipt parameters These parameters relate to the receipt that is printed from the Visual Console When the Visual Console is integrated with a POS the receipt will usually be printed by the POS application and the configuration of such will have to be done via the POS distributors documentation Select the de
106. anual The alarm levels group allows the specification of the various tank alarms the system implements The high product alarm sets the high product alarm level detecting overfilling defined in the units of tank volume Unless tank gauge alarm monitoring is required this alarm should be set to the tanks full capacity to prevent it from triggering The low product alarm sets the low product alarm level detecting minimum tank level defined in the units of tank volume Unless tank gauge alarm monitoring is required this alarm should be set to 0 to prevent it from triggering The high water alarm sets the high water alarm level defined in units of tank level The theft alarm is used for undefined sudden loss detection defined in the units of tank volume and the leakage alarm is used for long term loss detection defined in the units of tank volume Unless tank gauge alarm monitoring is required both these alarms should be set to the tanks full capacity to prevent it from triggering The water offset sets an offset that can be added in cases where the tank probe sits below the normal bottom of the tank in a small well designed to collect and trap water This too is defined in the units of tank level To auto calculate High Product Alarm Low Product Alarm High Water Alarm Theft Alarm and Leak Alarm levels click Auto Calculate Advanced Tank 1 Properties Site 225 General Advanced Delivery Parameters Settling Time 20 m
107. any the dispenser has fitted select the tag display type using the drop down control When a dispenser is a mechanical dispenser check the mechanical dispenser checkbox this will in turn enable the calibration factor control The calibration factor can be entered for that specific mechanical dispenser These settings will only be enabled when the dispenser is assigned to a UPI that is of type Orpak SCU The UPI configuration node provides the facility for configuring the manufacturers protocol used for dispensers connected to each UPI Within a dispenser protocol it is sometimes necessary to provide further identification of a dispenser to the PCC to enable it to support the various models 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Forecourt Configuration 2 software versions and features available which cannot automatically be determined by the PCC from the protocol The special settings group provides the controls to setup the special setting value Refer to the Postec Dispenser Special Settings Definition document for more details on the settings that should be used for specific dispensers This document will continue to be updated to reflect the enhancements in PCC software releases requiring the user to ensure a current copy is being used Note A copy of this document is contained in the back of the PCC 4 Installation amp Commissioning Manual The NRT Non Resetable Totals checkbox is used to specify whether the dispenser supports electro
108. ap E E EE 68 Gemeral Setting ss eiiean aaen aaae aaae aE sanaa ANV NEE TESNA aE Ea hata en EEE 68 2 General Management cccceceeeeceeeee cece eeee ee nn nro 69 Operating Schedule ccc ssessevseveesseeseesnennessesoesseeseeseeseeseesaesoesaesaesaesaevaesaesansneeneasausaesausaeusevoneeneaneas 69 Dispenser E AAA on A O TA 70 Grade Pricing ii dis 71 Dispenser Allocation Limits oonnnnnnnininnninnnnnnnananin anciana rra 71 3 Dispenser Meter Management cceecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeseeeeeeeseeeaeaaseeeeeeneeeeeeees 71 Shift Hose Grade Totals ccccscsssessesseveesseeseeseeneessesessesseesesseeseesaesaesaesaesaesaevaesonssesseeseusousousaesaeuseeseueneeneas 72 Accum ulated Hose Grade Totals cccsscseesnestesssssessesseeseeseeseesaesaesaessesaesaevaesoneseeseeseusauseusesaeusevseusneeneas 72 Dispenser Electronic Total cccsseseseeseseessessessessesseseeesesseeseesousoesaesaessesseuseesnesneseeaeesaesaesaesaeseeoneeneons 72 4 Tank Manageme tics ii E NEN as 73 Tank INVENTOSY cscctctssssnesnesnssssessssosnasnnsnassnsensansunsussussunaneaseaesncsacuaneauuaausassasansnasansaseausauausoussusansaosassnsanesansansa 73 Tank Deliveries tics ciccdeteuctee cnsnndiedsatvaasaceantadesbaasdesaupansey ansduastadddadnancuacnGcsaesdesdnuaneateuntassesaataenssdancdesieronsidentadeiadan 73 Tank DIPS wcssssnsccictincs tosticutenncaicnitendedcininninsvansuviesnewsdsudvadssavnscaiuancsnsuieaninst satustsdadusi
109. ates to the PCC Server application that converts the TCP IP messages into serial messages which are sent to the PCC via the RS 232 interface Serial Forecourt Configuration TCPAP RS 232 Forecourt PCCClient32 DLL PCC Manager Server Visual Console LAN Forecourt Configuration Forecourt Manager Visual Console PCCClient32 DLL Data Storage The FOCUS system uses a database to store configuration and historical wetstock data The controller also stores configuration data and some historical data e g dispenser meters tank levels etc It is important as far as configuration is concerned to have the same configuration in both the 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 3 FOCUS User Manual 1 2 database and controller Therefore before changing any configuration on a specific PC a request configuration should be performed to ensure the database contains the same configuration data as the controller Each PC running FOCUS applications connect to one central database allowing all the data to be accessed and modified in one location The FOCUS system can be configured to use local databases on each PC however this presents operational limitations Refer to the Database Setup for more details Applications The FOCUS suite contains the following applications as standard Audit Viewer used to view search print export and delete audit records FPoS Program Editor used to create edit modify compile i
110. ation data in a tree view form for each site Each node represents a specific configuration entity Site 10 Grant s Gas Garage General Properties Dial Properties En Grades Tanks el Dispensers Auxiliary Devices UPI Universal Pump Interface 43 Timers Units ez Forman 3 Attendants Pu AVI Automatic Vehicle Identification OPT Outdoor Payment Terminal Forecourt Receipt ma OPT Settings El FPOS Program The configuration entities are General properties site name modem number password miscellaneous site settings etc Dial properties dial properties for the PCC includes answer times number of rings etc Grades grade names numbers temperature coefficients etc Tanks tank parameters diameter grade capacity alarms probe etc Dispensers hose grade assignment special settings tag display type etc Auxiliary devices devices assigned to each auxiliary port in the controller UPIs universal pump interface settings Timers timer settings for PCC internal timers Units PCC unit definitions Forman 3 Attendants Forman 3 attendant data setup Note display dependent on FOCUS licencing AVI channels vehicle identification device settings Forecourt Receipt configure the customer receipt printed from the customer authorisation terminals OPT settings Customer authorisation terminal settings FPoS program Customer authorisation terminal program setup General Properties The
111. ay be configured while the controller is offline in this case the data will be saved to the database but not sent to the controller Dispenser Meter Management The controller maintains three sets of totals e Shift hose grade totals e Accumulated hose grade totals e Dispenser electronic totals The Back Office Wetstock Totals page provides access to all the three sets of totals 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Forecourt Manager 4 3 1 Shift Hose Grade Totals The controller maintains a set of dispenser hose and grade value and volume totals accumulated by shift These totals can be viewed at anytime providing the PCC is online from the Totals Shift page Click Request to request the current shift hose totals These totals are reset to zero at the end of each shift day as part of a Go Live or manually by clicking the Reset Shift Totals button 4 3 2 Accumulated Hose Grade Totals The controller maintains a set of accumulated dispenser hose and grade value and volume totals These totals can be viewed at anytime providing the controller is online from the Back Office Wetstock Totals Accumulated Totals page Click Request to request the current accumulated hose grade totals These totals can be used by the site manager for a number of purposes including e Accumulated monthly dispenser hose grade sales totals e Synchronising to the electronic dispenser totals for reconciliation Editing Accumulated Hose Grade Totals E
112. be used on the PC and their respective client node addresses to be configured Finish The Finish page provides a summary of the PCC connection configuration Click Finish to save this configuration Back to change any details or Cancel to close without making any changes When the Finish button is clicked the system will automatically install the PCC Server Service if it is not already installed A confirmation message will be displayed informing the user of this a confirmation will be displayed when the service successfully installs 2 33 LAN Connection PCCIP Address The IP address of the controller the FOCUS system will communicate with is set from the PCC IP Address page Client Node Address Each FOCUS application that communicates with the controller requires a unique ID this is called the client node address The Client Node Address page allows which applications will be used on the PC and their respective client node addresses to be configured Finish The Finish page provides a summary of the connection configuration Click Finish to save this configuration Back to change any details or Cancel to close without making any changes 2 34 Client Node Address Each FOCUS application that communicates with the controller requires a unique ID this is called the client node address When more than one PC is connected to the controller care must be taken to avoid duplicate client node addresses as this will prevent ap
113. below These command line functions should only be used after consulting with a Postec development engineer Only one command line parameter can be used at any one time Upgrade Using this parameter will perform a silent database upgrade Parameter Ux x specifies which database to perform the operation on 0 Master 1 Local Return Code 0 Upgrade succeeded 1 Upgrade failed view the audit log and log files for more details Purge Using this parameter will perform a silent database purge Parameter P Return Code 0 Purge succeeded 1 Purge failed view the audit log and log files for more details Backup Using this parameter will perform a silent database backup Parameter Bx x specifies which database to perform the operation on O Master 1 Local 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Database Maintenance Utilit 146 Return Code 0 Backup succeeded 1 Backup failed view the audit log and log files for more details Restore Using this parameter will perform a silent database restore Parameter Rx x specifies which database to perform the operation on O Master 1 Local Return Code 0 Restore succeeded 1 Restore failed view the audit log and log files for more details Delete Logs Using this parameter will perform a silent database log file deletion Parameter L Return Code 0 Log file deletion succeeded 1 Log file deletion failed view the audit log and log files for more details 2012 POSTEC Data Sys
114. booklet contains instructions on installation and un installation of the FOCUS suite for these details also refer to Appendices Installing FOCUS and Un installing FOCUS Database Configuration The FOCUS system uses a Firebird database for data storage this database is the backbone of the FOCUS system Forman 4 used a local Paradox database on each PC running Forman 4 The FOCUS system provides the power of a central master database This allows all FOCUS applications regardless of which PC they are running on to connect to one central source of configuration and historical data This in turn means all Visual Console operations can be performed on any PC and reports can be generated from any PC Also provided the controller is configured from the Forecourt Configuration application running on site the configuration will always be a copy of what is in the controller If a one POS system is being installed the default database configuration setup on installation is sufficient When a multiple POS BO system is being installed a more advanced database configuration is required for details of the configuration and operation of such a setup refer to appendix Advanced Database Configuration Operation Suite Setup The Suite Setup Start FOCUS Utilities Suite Setup is used to configure the settings that are global to the FOCUS suite and manage two FOCUS services Because user security is configured from this utility a user login is always r
115. c purge to display the purge progress dialog during an automatic purge Automatic purges are performed every two weeks Upgrade Sometimes when new versions of FOCUS are released the database may require an upgrade When the Forecourt Manager Forecourt Configuration or Visual Console is started the current database version is checked against the required database version If the versions do not match the relevant warning message will be displayed and the application will not run Warning A The current database needs to be upgraded from version 1 6 to 1 7 Run the Database Maintenance Utility to perform this upgrade The database upgrade is performed from the Database Maintenance Utility Click Upgrade to start the database upgrade process The upgrade progress is displayed in a dialog that can be closed by clicking OK once the upgrade is complete Should the database be at the correct version already when the Upgrade option is selected the Database Upgrade dialog will display an appropriate message Purge During the purge process historical audit and transaction data is permanently deleted from the database to stop the database size growing to large The length of time data is kept and how a purge is performed is setup in the options dialog When the Visual Console is configured to use the old transaction file format this will be purged at the same time Click Purge to perform a manual purge of
116. can be added by clicking New File Newwhen either the Sites root node or a site folder node is selected When the root node is selected new sites and site folders may be created therefore a dialog will appear allowing the selection of which new entity to be created Select Site and click OK the General Properties dialog will appear Enter the relevant site details ensuring a unique site number is assigned Alternatively the duplicate functionality can be used to create a new site which is duplicate of the selected site Simply select the site you wish to duplicate and click Duplicate Edit Duplicate a new site will be created with the identical configuration as the selected site The General Properties dialog will appear to allow a unique site number to be assigned to the duplicate site The number of sites you can create is limited by the licence purchased once the maximum number of sites allowed is reached the new functionality will be disabled Deleting Sites The selected site can be deleted by clicking Delete File Delete When the confirm delete site 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 12 FOCUS User Manual option is on a confirmation dialog will be shown click Yes to delete the site or No to cancel NOTE The deletion of a site cannot be reversed once the site is deleted it is deleted forever When sites are edited added and deleted the sites configuration nodes are automatically updated accordingly Site
117. card can also be blocked using the Block card check box Edit Card Holder Select Open Card Holder to edit an existing account Click OK to save the changes to the account or Cancel to abort Delete Card Holder Select Delete Card Holder to permanently delete an existing card holder The transactions made by this card holder will not be deleted and will remain associated with the appropriate account for billing purposes Blocking Unblocking 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 13 7 13 7 1 Local Accounts A card in an account can be blocked or unblocked The act of blocking a card results in any authorisation request for that card being rejected Select Block card to block the selected card Select Unblock card to unblock the selected card Database Maintenance The Local Accounts Database Maintenance Utility is used to upgrade purge backup and restore the Firebird database used by the Local Accounts system The Database Maintenance Utility can be run with command line parameters to allow the scripting of upgrades backups etc Login The Database Maintenance Utility requires a user to login this allows the access to the database maintenance to be restricted Enter a valid user name and password to login to the Database Maintenance Utility Only the password is case sensitive The user name of the last user to login is displayed The initial default login after installation is User name Administrator Password password
118. cents as its smallest denomination then set the smallest value to 10 The rounding point relates to the smallest value and is used by FLIP to round transactions For example if 10c is the smallest the rounding point would be set to 5 so a transaction of 10 04 would be rounded down to 10 and a transaction of 10 05 rounded up to 10 10 Modifying a payment type Select the payment type you wish to modify and click Open The Modify Method of Payment dialog will be displayed modify the details and click OK to save or Cancel to cancel without saving the changes made Deleting a payment type Select the payment type you wish to delete and click Delete A confirmation message will be displayed click OK to delete or Cancel to cancel without deleting Fuel Suppliers The tank delivery wizard accessed from the Visual Console s menu allows a fuel supplier to be selected This indicates who delivered the fuel The supplier is reported in the Historical Tank Deliveries report These fuel suppliers are configured from the Tanks Fuel Suppliers page Adding a supplier Click New to add a new fuel supplier The New fuel supplier dialog will be displayed enter the relevant details and click OK to save or Cancel to cancel without saving the supplier The Number is a unique reference by which the fuel supplier is stored in the database and the Name will appear in the tank delivery wizard Modifying a supplier Select the supplier you w
119. ched to Standalone mode where it is not under control of the PCC The PCC cannot record the transaction details Device Disabled Emergency Stop activated Device Reset Dispenser reset by PoS console deletes Sale and memory transaction buffers as well as resetting status and controls back to the idle state This can also be done from a Forecourt Authorization Terminal Prepay Error Dispenser rejects Prepay Authorization Reasons might include No Preset keyboard as required by Weights amp Measures Preset value not correct format eg Cents Too large Dispenser not in idle state eg some can t accept Preset auth if nozzle out Delivery Overfill Dispenser transaction amount overran Prepay Authorization Possible leaky solenoid valve or fault slow flow shut off valve Price Error Selling price error detected when dispenser authorized and nozzle lifted Could indicate selling price manually set at the dispenser attempt for fraud 14 7 2 10 Host Computer Host Computer Online Remote Access port carrier detection active Description contains the connection speed Remote access port closed i 14 7 2 11 LPG Transducers LPG Transducer Board 4 Channel 4 20mA ADC board monitors e Tank level e Tank Pressure e Pump Discharge Pressure e Temperature Node number identifies the tank number the board is mapped to PCC established communications with the LPG Transducer card PCC lost communications with the internal LPG Transducer card i
120. ck Next gt Cancel Setting PCC Internal Network Settings The Setting PCC Internal Network Settings page displays the status of the set PCC internal network settings procedure Finish On completion a summary of the network settings configured in the PCC is displayed Click Close to exit the wizard or Restart to run the wizard again from the start 2012 POSTEC Data Systems o FOCUS User Manual 2 3 2 3 1 2 3 1 1 PCC Connection Wizard The PCC Connection Wizard is used to set up the type of connection and connection parameters that will be used between the FOCUS applications and the controller This wizard needs to be run on each PC that will be using the FOCUS to communicate with the controller Login The PCC Connection Wizard may require a user to login this allows the access to the setting of connection parameters to be restricted Enter a valid user name and password to login to the PCC Connection Wizard Only the password is case sensitive The user name of the last user to login is displayed The initial default login after installation is User name Administrator Password password The Setup Utility is used to manage users and specify if a login is required for the PCC Connection Wizard application Welcome Step through the wizard answering the questions to set up the connection PCC Interface Type As previously mentioned there are two types of hardware interface the FOCUS system can use to
121. ck System Operation Status Enter Pump Address F 27777 Enter Pump Select an address parameter by right clicking in the appropriate address parameter field this will pop up a menu displaying all the current labels specified in the program Select the desired label by clicking on it AVT Y N Enter Staff Code Pre Authorization Check Check System Operation Status Enter Pump Pre Authorization Check Scan Barcode Request Authorization Enter Contract Number Enter Pump Program Er Enter Bar Program Er Enter Staff No Check System Enter Pump Request Authorization Program End Enter Bar Code When an instruction is selected that requires a numeric parameter the associated Numeric Parameter field will display 0 The numeric parameter can be set by entering the desired number directly into the numeric parameter field Some FPoS programs require vectors to enable the FPoS Program to jump to a location in the program on a certian condition There are five FPoS program vectors available e Start up Green e Program End Red e Program Interrupt Yellow e Error Aqua e User Defined 1 Lime 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 150 151 FOCUS User Manual 9 3 To set a vector location in a FPoS program right click on the label field and select the desired vector The same right click menu also allows the clearing of a previously set vector Each vector has a different colour to enable easy identifica
122. ck and the overall total hose sales figures and variances are displayed at the bottom of the report The variance is more often than not greater than zero due to rounding in the dispenser electronic totals some dispensers do not have decimal places for the dispenser meter totals therefore a variance of 1 for each hose can be considered as normal Should a volume and or value be unavailable for a dispenser hose at the time of the shift day month start or end an will be displayed on the report in place of the missing figure The reporting period and whether it is a shift daily or monthly report is displayed in the top right hand corner of the report The dispenser totals figures in this report are calculated by the calculation of end start total The 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 213 FOCUS User Manual 14 8 2 6 14 8 3 14 8 3 1 14 8 3 2 figures are stored in the database at each start of day shift change and end of day this is a snap shot of what the totals were at this time For each dispenser the total field will use the controller accumulated field if the NRT option is set to false and the dispenser electronic total if the NRT option is set to true This calculation also takes into account the wrapping of totals refer to Hose Sales Totals section for more detail on wrapping Sample Wetstock Transactions This report provides detailed information about all wetstock transactions for which data has been collec
123. cking an account results in any authorisation request from a card associated with the account being rejected Select Block all cards to block all cards for the selected account Select Unblock all cards to unblock all cards for the selected account The blocking unblocking of all cards also changes the individual card holder block card property Accounts Summary A summary report of all accounts can be generated when the All Accounts item is selected in the Accounts grid Select Account Summary This report provides a summary of all account details including number name address limit and current account balances etc Statements A statement of the selected account can be generated by selecting Account Statement Statement Select statement gereescseceesenceney Current 0000000100000003 08 08 06 16 42 51 09 08 06 14 24 51 A Historical Either select the current statement this is a statement of all transactions since the last statement was issued or a historical statement should a reprint be required The statement is displayed in report format On closing the Current statement report dialog a prompt will ask if this is to be used for billing if Yes is selected the statement number will be incremented and the statement saved in to the historical statements Confirm 9 Will this statement be used to bill the customer Note The current statement can be vewed wit
124. contains the fault type and hex code word eg Temperature Range error 14 7 2 22 Terminal Manager PCC Terminal Manager mode Block mode communications that shuts down the PoS Serial communications Used for legacy Electronic Cash register and Forman 1 amp 2 consoles only Node PoS node number Device Enabled Terminal mode activated K 14 7 2 23 UPI The Universal Pump Interface is an intelligent card which provides the hardware and low level software interface to a circuit of pumps The node number contains the UPI number 1 4 The description field identifies pump protocol and the range of pump numbers the UPI is configured to control PEC Gilbarco Australia Email Australia Dresser Wayne US Current loop Gilbarco US Compac NZ 2400 BAUD Tatsuno GX Series Tatsuno EX REX series Dresser Wayne DARTLINE European Tokheim Dong Hwa AG Walker Gilbarco South Africa Schlumberger The PCC has established comms with the UPI The PCC has lost comms with the UPI Comms Fault A fault is detected on the dispenser communications circuit eg Current loop ae ene ee circuit Interference PCC UPI internal communications PCC UPI intemal communications diagnostics data for Postec use only data for Postec use only Sequence Error PCC Internal Communications Error PCC Polls a specific dispenser type a different dispenser type responds Should never happen Contact Postec Help desk 14 8 Wetstock Reports
125. court Logger When FOCUS is communicating with the PCC using the LAN interface the PCCClient32 dll communicates directly with the PCC The Forecourt Logger application logs the TCP IP messages sent to the controller and the controller s responses back The Forecourt Logger application runs as a task tray application the Forecourt Logger icon is displayed FOCUS Forecourt Logger 2 20 PM Monday 28 06 2004 The Forecourt Logger functionality is accessed by right clicking on the icon About B Help Properties 2 19 PM Monday 28 06 2004 Click the Properties menu item to view the Forecourt Logger properties and access the socket log Log to File If the socket communications are required to be logged to a file this may be requested by a Postec engineer check the Log to file check box The log to file option should not be left on for long periods of time as it is a debugging option only and does use up system resources therefore the system will automatically turn it off after 30 days should it be inadvertently left on A new log file is started every day at midnight and each time the Forecourt Logger application is run The log file name is made up of the date time to ensure each file name is unique the log files will be written to FOCUS Installation Directory Logs Socket ddmmyy_hhmmss_FLSocket log e g A Forecourt Logger socket log file started on 2nd April 2003 at 12 18 56 C Program Files Pos
126. covery General Settings D E General Settings Change Forecourt Manager general settings Site 337 PoS Test PCC Status Connected Logged In Onine 6 34 14 04 08 Global Option Page 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Forecourt Manager 6 Quick Page Access Menu Forecourt lo x Navigation Home EorntofSale Dispensers GackOffice Attendants arks YetstockTotals GteUtiites EOCUSSetup QPTs Controls Management Dispenser Modes Initial User Schedule 2 Schedule 3 Schedule 4 A mi e 7 autoHoc Autoon automo ALOHOC ALADO Ajto clo Options Astohor Autom oc automo AROK OS AUIHOS Automon w Autohos Autoros Autonok Option Edit AtoHoe Autono Au otiola Option Control Controls AytoHola Autono Autoreid Page gt l MOMO Automoc automo AutoHoie AutoHor Autol Q Astohoe AA OE automo AMOHOS AuRHOS utomo Astohos Automoc automo 4 Login and Help a Site 337 Pos Test PCC Status Connected Logged In Online 6 34 14 04 08 Global Site Number Name PCC Login Status The diagram below maps out access to the options pages via the graphical user interface The Green boxes represent graphical pages and the blue boxes are the option pages Boxes shown in orange are displayed depending on licensing 2012 POSTEC Data Systems FOCUS User Manual Reports System PCC Audit Forecourt Date Tim Viewer Configuration Reset Transaction POS Return Dispenser Recovery Fallback Transaction PEPS Control Shift
127. ction should be payed off ie all calling dispensers and those on temp stop When the Focus console checkbox is checked this key assignment will focus the Visual Console from any application if the checkbox is not checked this key assignment will do nothing When Toggle focus the checkbox is checked this key assignment will toggle the focus between the client application usually the POS application that is logged into the Visual Console and the Visual Console itself If the checkbox is not checked this key assignment will do nothing Although most sales start with a fuel transaction when using a programmable keyboard we recommend that the Visual Console be configured to always return the window focus to the POS after all functions Click the button next to each edit box and enter a keystroke sequence for each function This keystroke can include the Function keys and the Shift and Ctrl keys Editing Key Assignments Click the Browse button next to the appropriate key assignment the Edit Keycode dialog will be 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Forecourt Manager os displayed Edit Keycode Memory Enter key sequence OK Cancel Type the desired key assignment and click OK to save or Cancel to cancel any changes Custom Keyboard When a custom keyboard is being used the custom keyboard group box will be displayed Check the Custom Keyboard check box to enable the keyboard type contro
128. d or re installed by running the FOCUS suite installation ONLY The installation of each of these components is started from the FOCUS installer application Insert FOCUS CD ROM into the CD ROM drive the installer screen should be displayed automatically after a few seconds If this screen does not appear run E Installer exe where E is your CD ROM drive FOCUS Installer Suite 1 4 2 30 07 08 Install FOCUS Suite Install Firebird Database Server 2 1 View Utilities View FOCUS Manual View Release Documents POTELI 2 Gi OU GIC i Maic sag Et Browse Help Exit The suite version and date information is displayed in the top right hand corner of the installation screen The FOCUS installer contains three options Install FOCUS Suite this starts the FOCUS suite installation process Install Firebird Database Server 2 1 this starts the Firebird Client Server version 2 1 installation process View Utilities this opens the utilities folder on the CD utilities include Postec Flasher and a Firebird ODBC driver View FOCUS User Manual this opens the PDF version of the FOCUS User Manual located on the CD Acrobat Reader is required to view this file View Release Documents this opens the PDF version of the FOCUS Release Documents located on the CD Acrobat Reader is required to view this file The CD may be browsed using the browse button in the bottom left hand corner Click Exit to close the F
129. d an attempt be made to run an application other than those specified the following error message will be displayed on startup Error X This application cannot be run because the system is operating in local mode Master to Local mode When the connection to the master database is lost the system must be put into local mode 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Appendix 186 Select the Database Select option in the Visual Console menu or run Database Select application from the FOCUS program group in the start menu 2 About 2 Database Select i Exit The Database Select application is used to switch the FOCUS system running on a particular PC from using the master database to the local e master to local mode and vice versa G _ 24 Database Select Utility Test Master Test Local The application detects which mode FOCUS is running in and presents either the option to use the local database or use the master database When the system has been connected to the master database and the connection is lost the main form will be displayed as above The Test Master and Test Local buttons can be used to check the connection to the master or local database It is important to ensure the connection has actually been lost to the master database you can use the Test Master to confirm this The switch to local mode should be avoided whenever possible if the sit
130. d setup the communication port properties Step 5 Forecourt Configuration Run the Forecourt Configuration application to configure the controller For a basic in house development system configure General Properties Grades Tanks and Dispensers then perform a Send Configuration using the default data Step 6 Forecourt Manager Run the Forecourt Manager to configure the Visual Console s behaviour under Settings Application Settings tab grade prices and attendants Step 7 Visual Console Run the Visual Console and observe your real or simulated forecourt in graphical form and in your control 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 5 FOCUS User Manual 1 4 1 4 1 1 4 2 Now you have FOCUS on your forecourt you won t miss anything FOCUS Installation The FOCUS suite must be installed on each PC that it is to be run on The FOCUS suite is supplied on one CD that can be used to install a new installation or upgrade an existing FOCUS installation Should the Forman 4 system be already installed refer to the appendix Uparadina from Forman 4 for upgrade instructions The FOCUS installation is built using a third party package Installshield Express this produces a set of files that are used to install the appropriate system components This installation uses the Microsoft installer therefore if a silent command line installation is required please refer to the Microsoft Installer documentation for more details The FOCUS CD ROM
131. d side of the page is used for editing either the header lines or footer lines depending on whether the header or footer radio item is checked The window on the right hand side displays a preview of the current receipt set up A receipt header footer line that has no text defined for it will not be displayed on the receipt However if a blank line is required set the appropriate line s text to B this can also be done by right clicking and selecting Insert blank line from the pop up menu Centre a line using spaces this can be done by right clicking and selecting Centre Text from the pop up menu The receipt width in characters is defined using the control provided Each specific model of Receipt Printer will have a different maximum number of characters per line Care should be taken to check the printed receipt checking for line wrapping Save Cancel Changes Click Save Send to save the data to the database and send it to the PCC or Cancel to cancel any changes The forecourt receipt may be configured while the PCC is offline in this case the data will be saved to the database but not sent to the PCC This allows the user to send the data to the PCC using the Forecourt Configuration application s Send Configuration function at a later date 4 8 2 TVD Banner The TVD banner property specifies the banner every TVD on the forecourt will display while in it s idle state Editing the TVD Banner The TVD banner is configured from the
132. d side with each configuration entity being accessed through a specific node below each site node A grid on the right hand side displays the specific configuration details for each entity The status bar contains details of the current site number the Forecourt Configuration application is accessing this is particularly useful when using the multi site version Errors hints and the connection status are also displayed in the status bar The connection status displays the current connection state of the Forecourt Configuration this can be one of the following four states Connected Logged In Offline site is connected and the Forecourt Configuration is logged in but is offline Connected Logged In Online x xx dd mm yy c site is connected and the Forecourt Configuration application is logged in and online Connected Logged Out Offline site is connected but the Forecourt Configuration application has not logged in Disconnected Working Offline site is disconnected hence working offline The normal running state will be state two Connected Logged In Online x xx dd mm yy c where X XX Controller software version dd mm yy Controller software date Cc Controller software 8 char country description Note The last two states will only be observed when running the multi site version ER 5 i Forecourt Configuration BAX Eile Edit Templates Operations Tool
133. d user option is on the current dial properties configuration may be requested from the PCC by clicking Request Operations Request The requested data will be stored in the database and will replace any previous changes made Ensure the PCC is ina working state i e not master reset before requesting the dial properties configuration 3 2 3 Grades The grades configuration node allows the configuration of grades that will be used on a site Grade 12 is used by the system and is automatically assigned to MPD Multi Product Dispenser the name of this grade can be edited however the grade cannot removed Note Grade 12 will only be visible if there are 12 or more grades Editing Grades Grades can be manually edited or a configuration template can be applied To manually modify a specific grade select the appropriate grade and click Open File Open The Grade Properties dialog will be displayed allowing the editing of the chosen grade Grade 1 Properties Site 338 Grade la Name Unleaded Code ULP Tax Tax RsiL J o Temp coefficient 0 001249 Cancel The grade name property should reflect the commonly used title name to uniquely identify the grade Should a grade be unused e g you have grade number 1 3 5 but not 2 and 4 simply set the grade name to Grades named will be considered unused by the FOCUS and will not appear in the schedule price change wizard or grade reports The g
134. dant is not authorised to access this functionality The site manager can then override the current security by logging in using his ID password In this case the override is only for that instance as soon as the page is left the security level is restored to the original attendants low security profile Login When the Forecourt Manager is started an attendant must log in to the login dialog using a valid ID and password This sets the current security profile of the Forecourt Manager to that of the attendant that has logged in Another attendant may be logged in at any time by clicking on the Login button located in the bottom right hand corner of the Forecourt Manager The initial default login after installation is Attendant 1111 Password 123 To avoid fraudulent activity on the forecourt via the Forecourt Manager this initial login should be changed and different security profiles should be set up during the commissioning stage refer Attendants The login dialog will not appear while running the multi site version and all functionality will be unrestricted General Settings The General settings dialog provides the following options for the Forecourt Manager GUI Touchscreen help mode display borders around the options in the graphical view to assist users operating a touch screen e Show option name show hide the option name label in graphical view Transparent option buttons option buttons on the left hand side can be m
135. de The date and time of the export is stored against the batch number Confirm Export Command line parameter U2x Confirm export where xis the batch number This will confirm all transactions up to the date and time of the batch number passed This should be called straight after the export file has been processed by the POS BO software to ensure future exports do not include transactions that have been previously exported Return Codes The following codes will be returned depending on the result of the above operations Success No valid command passed to the executable No unconfirmed transaction records to export Export resulted in an exception Invalid sub command passed to the executable Invalid batch number passed batch number does not exist or is not a valid integer 0d ADN O When the verbose logging option for FOCUS is on the Database Export Utility will write to the application log file O 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Local Accounts 163 FOCUS User Manual 13 13 1 13 1 1 Local Accounts Overview FOCUS Local Accounts provides a local account system for a service station This is not a network wide local account system accounts are setup on a site by site basis The system allows accounts to be setup and card holders to be assigned to accounts Each card holder is issued with an RF tag or card that has a unique number encoded on it identifying the card holder The card holder presents this tag card to
136. de Site folders can also be created to maintain a group of sites together this is particularly useful when maintaining a large number of site which may be grouped region Selecting the Sites node allows the management of sites and site folders Selecting a site folder node allows the management of the sites within the selected folder Sites can be added deleted edited and duplicated from the root Sites node or any site folder node The Sites root node displays the total number sites in the root node and all site folders amp Forecourt Configuration Multi Site uy File Edit Templates Operations Tools Options Help Ae x B g Yi Name A A Site 11 Grant s Gas Garage k Site 287 Albany Motorcourt Grants Gas G Ste 287 Albany Motor A Site 301 Aaron s Airfield Site 301 Laron s Airfin a o I ye Pw Og Sip 0 la 62 x rr T z 6 gt i Ey WELLINGTON Site 1232 Westgate Motor Site 1234 Joe s Junk Cars Site 6543 Newton Road G General Properties amp Dial Properties E Grades Tanks el Dispensers E5 Auxiliary Devices S 110101 Inivarsal Dim Intal Y lt gt v Site 2 Disconnected Working Offline Site Management Editing Sites The selected site can be edited by clicking Open File Open the selected site s site node will be selected and the configuration nodes expanded below it Adding Sites A new site
137. de title panel The following properties are available to configure the grade title panel e Height the height of the grade title panel e Font size the font size for the grade name In addition to the grade title panel a coloured bar is displayed in each transaction buffer representing the grade for the transaction displayed The colour assignment is setup by clicking Edit Grade Colours The Grade Colours dialog will be displayed Edit the grade colour assignment and click OK to save or Cancel to abort the changes Icon Dispenser Number The dispenser number can be displayed inside the status icon by turning the Display icon dispenser number option on if this option is not selected the dispenser number will be displayed next to the grade title The controls in the lcon dispenser number group allow a user to turn the icon dispenser number on off and customise its appearance The following properties are available e Font Size the font size for the icon dispenser number e Colour the colour of the icon dispenser number Click the panel to open the colour selection dialog e Style the style of the icon dispenser number Multi Line 2012 POSTEC Data Systems as FOCUS User Manual The Visual Console can be run in Multi line Mode this shows the forecourt screen in a multi line format if all the dispensers won t fit on one line The controls in the Multi line group allow the user to turn mul
138. deletes both the ALL transactions for the selected dispenser and therefore should be only be allowed in a certain security profiles Enter the relevant dispenser number and click Reset Dispenser a confirmation dialog will be displayed Click Yes to reset the specified dispenser or No to cancel without resetting Resetting a PEPs Node A PEPs Node can be reset if a fault occurs between the controller and PEPs Warning This deletes the transaction waiting to be passed to PEPs for processing for the selected node and therefore should be only be allowed in a certain security profiles Enter the relevant Node number and click Reset Node a confirmation dialog will be displayed Click Yes to reset the specified node or No to cancel without resetting Transaction Recovery In an error condition the POS may go offline from the controller i e network down etc When the controller has been configured to fall back into schedule four after the POS has been offline for a configurable period of time the forecourt will be able to continue trading in attended mode The transactions will be finalised by the controller and not downloaded by the POS application as it is offline When the POS comes back online operation will continue as normal however there will be a hole in the transactions stored in the FOCUS database this will effect the Dispenser Console reconciliation reports The Back Office Site Utilities Transaction Recovery pag
139. dispensers is wider than the screen width then scroll buttons will become active on the right hand side of the Visual Console These buttons can be used to scroll backwards and forwards through the available dispensers Unleaded In multi line mode multiple lines of dispensers are shown simultaneously on the screen Depending on the screen resolution up to 64 dispensers may be shown simultaneously The number of dispensers on each line can be fixed or automatically set by the system PIFI FOCUS Visual 5 1 1 Login When the Visual Console is started in standalone mode an attendant must log in to the login dialog using a valid ID and password This sets the current security profile of the Visual Console to that of the attendant that has logged in Another attendant may be logged in at any time by clicking on the Login button located in the bottom left hand corner of the Visual Console The initial default login after installation is Attendant 1111 Password 123 To avoid fraudulent activity on the forecourt via the Visual Console this initial login should be changed and different security profiles should be set up during the commissioning stage refer Attendants The login dialog will not appear while running multi site version and all functionality will be unrestricted When the Visual Console is being used with a POS application the login will be handled through the
140. dit the hose grade totals where appropriate click Save Send to send the data to the controller or Cancel to cancel any changes Note The controller must be online to change the accumulated hose grade totals Care should be taken when editing these totals during a shift day as these totals are used for the FOCUS reporting if electronic dispenser totals are unavailable Therefore if a large change is required for some reason this should be performed after the day has been ended Note Only those totals that have been changed will be sent totals that have not changed will not be sent back down to the controller This prevents the overwriting of data in the controller if sales are in progress while editing is taking place Synchronising Accumulated Hose Totals When the synchronise totals button is visible this is configurable va PoS FOCUS Setup Advanced page it can be used to automatically set the accumulated hose totals to the electronic dispenser totals Note If a dispenser is using the accumulated totals for its FOCUS reporting the totals will not be synchronised with this procedure The NRT setting under dispenser configuration determines which totals FOCUS will use for its reporting on a dispenser by dispenser basis When NRT is selected the Electronic Dispenser Totals will be used for FOCUS reporting on that dispenser when unchecked the accumulated hose totals described here will be used Corrupted Accumulated Hose Totals
141. e Firebird Server service for changes to take effect The following parameters may be of interest for FOCUS users CPUAffinityMask Database Performance With Firebird SuperServer on Windows there is a problem with the operating system continually swapping the entire SuperServer process back and forth between processors on SMP machines This ruins performance This parameter can be used on SMP systems on Windows to set Firebird SuperServer s processor affinity to a single CPU CAUTION Firebird Superservers up to and including Release 1 5 may not support the Hyperthreading feature of some later model motherboards on Windows To avoid balancing problems you may need to disable hyperthreading at system BIOS level CpuAffinityMask takes one integer the CPU mask Example CpuAffinityMask 1 only runs on the first CPU CPU 0 CpuAffinityMask 2 only runs on the second CPU CPU 1 CpuAffinityMask 3 runs on both first and second CPU Calculating the affinity mask value You can use this flag to set Firebird s affinity to any single processor or on Classic server any combination of the CPUs installed in the system Consider the CPUs as an array numbered from 0 to n 1 where n is the number of processors installed and i is the array number of a CPU M is another array containing the MaskValue of each selected CPU The value A is the sum of the values in M 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Use the following formula to arrive at M and calc
142. e Grades Cancel Summary Once all details of the scheduled price change have been entered a summary is displayed Click Finish to save these details to the database and send the scheduled price change information to the controller Should the details be incorrect use Back to move back through the wizard and make any alterations or click Cancel to close the wizard without saving sending the scheduled price change information 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 5 3 5 Visual Console Scheduled Price Change Summary Date 13 05 2004 Time 15 00 Schedule All Click Back to read Price Change Confirmation At the scheduled time the Price Change Confirmation dialog will be displayed this is dependent on whether the PC has been setup to confirm the price change The price change setup wizard located in the Forecourt Manager is used to setup the behaviour of the price change confirmation process An audible alarm will also be sounding to alert the user to scheduled price change confirmation The price change can be setup to automatically confirmed by the system or manually confirmed by the user The alarm can be stopped by clicking Stop Alarm confirm the price change by clicking Continue Auto Price Change Waiting for continue Continue Once the price change is confirmed the confirmation progress is displayed When using an ethernet connection to the PCC the old and new price
143. e Tank Dips wizard item Dispenser lights the Lights item Dispenser light control Dispenser test the Dispenser Test item Operating schedule the Schedule item Start of day the Start of Day item shift control must be enabled Shift change the Shift Change item shift control must be enabled End of day the End of Day item shift control must be enabled Alarms the Alarms item EFT Settlement the EFT Settlement item EFT integration must be present Appearance The Visual Console menu s appearance can be customsied The following settings are available Menu item height this is the height of each individual menu item Note When using a touch screen do not set this to small Font size the size of the font for the menu item s caption Custom Utility Menu Item The Visual Console menu allows one custom utility item This allows a user to run a selected application from the Visual Console menu The Custom utility menu item group provides the controls to customise this utility item This group is only enabled if the Custom utility option is checked under Show menu items 2012 POSTEC Data Systems FOCUS User Manual 4 9 2 The following properties are available Label the text that will appear in the Visual Console menu File the path file name of the application that will be run click the Browse to select a file Params the command line parameters the selected application will be run wit
144. e Visual Console can be run in two type of integration mode e Integrated POS mode No login screen and locks console but emergency stop can still be used e Stand alone mode Allows normal use of console When the Visual Console is integrated with a POS this mode should be set to Integrated POS mode In a keyboard environment application focus can be a big issue only the focused window will receive the keystrokes The system can be configured to switch the focus from the Visual Console the Focus swap options drop down control provides the following three options e Never swap to POS application focus will never swap to POS under any circumstances e Swap after transaction application focus will swap to the POS after a transaction has been processed e Always swap to POS application focus will always swap to the POS after any action e g Authorise dispenser process transaction etc The transaction control specifies what will happen when a transaction is processed on the Visual Console The Transaction control drop down control provides the following four options Display only a dialog displaying transaction data is displayed this should only be used for test purposes DBase table dbf transaction data will be written to a DBase transaction table and the Interbase transaction table Paradox 7 table db transaction data will be written to a Paradox 7 transaction table and the Firebird transaction tab
145. e beginning of each day after the end of day process has been executed for the previous day When the 24 hour site option is setup the EOD End of Day will perform a SOD at the same time hence a day roll This means only the EOD procedure needs to be run to end the current day and start the next The SOD setup will dictate which dialogs will appear during the SOD The behaviour of the SOD is configured using the SOD setup wizard located in the Forecourt Manager The SOD can be performed manually by the user by selecting the Start of Day menu item in the console menu Alternatively the SOD can be scheduled to be automatically run at a particular time each day When the SOD is started a dialog will be displayed showing the current progress of the SOD procedure 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 5 3 5 2 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Visual Console Start Of Day User Activated Uploading Tank Inventory data Shift Change A SC Shift Change will request hose and tank data from the controller and store it in the database This procedure will end the current shift and start a new shift The requested stored data is used to generate wetstock reports The FOCUS wetstock reports may be automatically printed on completion of the SC A external program can be configured to be run after the SC has completed this may be a external reporter or any other custom utility e g record transfer etc The SC setup will dictate whic
146. e can operate with one POS that still has its connection to the master database while the problem on the other POS is resolved this would be the recommended solution However when all other options have been exhausted click Use Local Database to start the transition from master to local mode When an attempt is made to enter local mode and the PC has been setup with the Master database is local database setting checked an error message will be displayed This is because there is no reason to enter local mode as the connection to the master database cannot be lost the file resides on this PC Should the transition be allowed to continue the following operations will be performed 1 Connect to local database 2 Clear all data from the local database excluding the attendant details profiles 3 Login to PCC 4 Request all necessary configuration data from the PCC and store it in the local database 2012 POSTEC Data Systems FOCUS User Manual The progress of the transition process is displayed in the status window 24 Database Select Utility Use Local Database Lagging in to PCC OK 6 31 19 06 04 S Africa Connecting to local database OK Clear local database OK Populate local database using PCC data Request site number OK 11 Request site configuration OK Request grade configuration OK Request dispenser hose configuration Test Local Once this is complete the PC
147. e entered when prompted this will be displayed at the top of the report e Tank Inventory presents the current controller tank inventory data in either a standard or graphical report This report can only be generated when the controller is online An optional sub heading can be entered when prompted this will be displayed at the top of the report e Tank Density presents the current controller tank density data in report form This report can only be generated when the controller is online An optional sub heading can be entered when prompted this will be displayed at the top of the report Shift Day Reports The shift day reports are reports based on data grouped by FOCUS shifts and days The following FOCUS reports are available e Hose Sales Totals e Grade Sales Totals e Attendant Sales Totals e Console Transaction Summary e Dispenser Console Sales Reconciliation e Wetstock Transactions There are three reporting periods available monthly daily and shift The Attendant Sales Totals can only be reported on over a day or shift Month Select the month you wish to report on using the Month drop down control only months where data is available are displayed click OK to generate the report or Cancel to abort Day Select the month and check the Day check box the Day drop down control will be populated with the available days for that month The start and end date time of each available day is displayed Select the desi
148. e is used to request the internal transaction file from the controller and then process it adding transactions into the FOCUS database that are present in the file but not present in the database Perform a transaction recovery once the system has come back online and stabilised Click the Recover Transactions button to retrieve the transaction file from the controller va TFTP Please note the PCC must be fitted with an Ethernet bridge for this functionality to work The recovery progress will be displayed in the status window where the number of records processed and added is displayed Recovered transactions are stored with a status of r 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Forecourt Manager e 4 74 POS Fallback Control The Visual Console may be integrated with a POS application In this case should the POS application fail the Visual Console becomes locked and fuel transactions cannot be processed However the Forecourt Manager provides functionality to switch into Standalone or POS Offline mode which unlocks the Visual Console and allows it to be used standalone to continue trading manually POS Fallback Control The Back Office Site Utilities POS Fallback Control page provides two buttons to switch between integrated POS Online and standalone POS Offline modes The current operating mode is indicated by the button that is depressed select the other button to switch modes There are some configurable options to determine the exact beha
149. e or more transactions available for a dispenser 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Forecourt Manager MOS Transactions Dispenser 2 16 38 11 45L CNG Detailed CANCEL Menu The Visual Console uses a menu to provide access to additional functionality including tank delivery entry scheduled price changes and dispenser tests This menu can be customised to show hide items where appropriate i e the only allowing dispenser test on one PC A custom menu item is available to run a selected application this may be a calculator etc The FOCUS Setup Appearance Menu page provides all the required controls to customise the Visual Console s menu Enable Console Menu In some cases the Visual Console menu may need to be disabled i e if the Visual Console is being run in the back office unattended To disable the menu uncheck the Enable console menu setting Show Menu Items The Show menu items group provides controls to show hide certain menu items About and Exit cannot be hidden To show an item check the appropriate check box and to hide uncheck The visibility of the following menu items can be controlled Forecourt manager the Manager item Custom utility the custom utility item the set up for this item is described below Tank delivery wizard the Deliveries item Price change wizard the Price Change item Auto payoff the Auto Payoff item Attendant bag payoff the Bag Payoff item Tank Dips th
150. e settings have been factory preset and should only be changed by authorised personnel For more information reference the relevant Postec system commissioning documentation Editing Units When the advanced user option is enabled the units can be edited straight away However when it is disabled the editing is disabled to ensure the units are not inadvertently changed When editing is disabled click Edit Settings Operations Edit Settings to start editing the units configuration In doing so a warning will be displayed click Yes to enable the editing controls or No to cancel 2012 POSTEC Data Systems FOCUS User Manual 3 2 10 Should the controller be offline editing will only be enabled if the appropriate allow editing offline option is enabled Once editing is enabled the units can be manually edited or a configuration template can be applied To manually modify a specific unit select the appropriate unit and click Open File Open The Unit Properties dialog will be displayed allowing the editing of the chosen unit The unit name is fixed and cannot be changed Enter an appropriate symbol for the selected unit this can be up to six characters long Only the first character is stored in the PCC therefore if a request is made the first character received from the PCC is compared with that stored in the database When these characters are the same the symbol in the database is not changed however should they be different the
151. ected The Fallback Timeout is configured under Timers using the Forecourt Configuration application and can be disabled by setting the value to zero Automatic Operating Schedule Change The Visual Console can be configured to automatically change the operating schedule at a 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Forecourt Manager predefined time each day The Visual Console must be running at the time setup for this functionality to work Click the Add button to add an automatic operating schedule change the Automatic Operating Schedule Change dialog will be displayed Use the time control to set the time of the operating schedule change and select the operating schedule to change to at that time from the drop down list Click OK to save or Cancel to abort To change an existing event select it and click Edit a dialog will appear allowing the editing of the details Events can be removed by clicking Remove 4 2 2 Dispenser Modes Each dispenser on a site can be configured to run under any of the following five modes of operation Postpay Dispenser is normally READY Only one sale at a time Memory is operated manually Dispenser is re authorised when sale is paid for Dispenser is locked until previous sale is paid for or transferred to memory e 0 0 0 2 Automemory e Dispenser is normally READY e Dispenser is re authorised when sale is paid for e Dispenser is locked out when SALE amp MEMORY columns are f
152. eeeaeecaeeaesaeseaeesaesaeesaesseesanecseeeaneeaeeeaeeenens 29 Customize View ine ena See eau et oa eee ad ed ea eds 30 2 Controller Configuration ccceecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeseeseeeseeeneeeseees 31 General AAA non A Dial Properties cocicnicicin nniinnaacn anciana di AAA a dada NO TANKS A dt a EA op n E EA yq nn US ai SSA A nn UES A tad Forman 3 AttendantS A ce NA EA AAA ETETETT E sedi cccetnezdccessesceusseseccaveed A T T Forecourt Receipt Header Footer Forecourt Receipt Layout OPT Settings sscceceeeseee FPoS Program 3 TOOIS A E A hil sesdcccadai saved a EA ia 2012 POSTEC Data Systems i FOCUS User Manual Compare Configuration cccscscssssseseeseeeseeseeseesseseessesseeseeseeseesneseesaesaesaesaevaesaeesesaneseesausaesusnssensnesneeneas Send Configuration Request Configuration Master Re Se A e SA AA coucatessetsacesseestceesecseaestescacuacassncdncescneanavscceaderateye Res t DSp nse ii A a SEa agaa SETUP Grade Price s ii eraa rapeaa raar E an sqcdarescnesscessuceetdeseceusneadesaueiuaienessdersecetiuesctecoueduest Export Configuration File Import Configuration File Go Live cnccnincccnnannens 4 Configuration Report 5 Command Line Functionality oooomcccconnnncccnonnnnncnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn rre rene rre 61 Part IV Forecourt Manager 64 1 User Inte ria Ce A does 64 O A tien cee ect eee acca n
153. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeees 215 10 Upgrading from Forman 4 oonnncccccnnncncnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnn cnn rr n nr rn 216 WV GIOSSANY io ad 217 2012 POSTEC Data Systems introducing FOCUS Introducing FOCUS 2 Introducing FOCUS Overview FOCUS is a suite of Windows applications that communicate with a forecourt controller to provide a forecourt management solution at site level The FOCUS suite consists of three main applications e Visual Console used to provide a visual representation and control of dispensers on the forecourt through a graphical user interface This application can be integrated with a POS Point of Sale application to achieve a complete wetstock solution e Forecourt Manager used to manage the day to day running of the forecourt e Forecourt Configuration used to configure the forecourt controller Included in the suite are a number of other supporting applications used for tasks such as connection configuration communications audit reporting and logging The FOCUS system is designed for use in international markets providing e Multi language support e Currency configuration System Architecture Communications The three main applications that communicate with the controller do so through a DLL PCCClient32 DLL This DLL communicates using TCP IP messages directly to the forecourt controller using the Ethernet Bridge interface For serial connections the DLL communic
154. el Note At least one tank must be present therefore if there is only one tank setup it cannot be deleted Save Send Once the tank configuration is complete click Save Send Operations Save Send to save the data to the database and send it to the controller or Cancel Operations Cancel to cancel all changes The tanks may be configured while the controller is offline in this case the data will be saved to the database but not sent to the controller This allows the user to send the data to the controller using the Send Configuration function at a later date Request When the controller is online and the advanced user option is on the current tank configuration may be requested from the controller by clicking Request Operations Request The requested data will be stored in the database and will replace any previous changes made Ensure the controller is in a working state i e not master reset before requesting the tank configuration 3 2 5 Dispensers The dispenser configuration node allows the configuration of dispensers that will be used on a site It is important to collect the dispenser configuration that is currently setup taking extra care to check the way the hoses are number on each dispenser as this can vary depending on a dispensers configuration Editing Dispensers Dispensers can be manually edited or a configuration template can be applied To manually modify a specific dispenser select the appropriate d
155. elect Yes if the site is running 24 hours a day the system will then perform a start of day procedure immediately after an end of day procedure has completed When this option is set to Yes the other setup pages become irrelevant therefore clicking Next will move directly to the finish page Restart Dispensers On non 24 hour sites dispensers are usually placed on hold on completion of the end of day procedure this prevents sales from being made outside the sites day Select Yes to restart the dispensers e authorised on completion of the start of day procedure Schedule A start of day procedure can be started from the Visual Console s menu However in some cases it may not be desirable to rely on staff to remember to select this item Therefore the start of day can be schedule by selecting Yes and entering the desired start of day time using the control provided Finish Click Finish to save the start of day settings or Cancel to discard any changes 4 9 2 2 Shift Change Setup Wizard The shift change setup wizard is used to set up the shift change procedure Navigate through the wizard using the Next and Back buttons answer the questions to set up the shift change procedure as desired Please note some ofthe wizard pages may or may not be shown depending on the answers of questions on previous pages Tank Dip Entry This will allow the prompting for entering in tank dips before the SC process will continue An opti
156. elected site is not connected via the Multi Site Server Offline Connected Logged Out The selected site is connected via the Multi Site Server but has not been logged into Offline Connected Logged In The selected site is connected via the Multi Site Server has been logged into and is communicating Online Connected Logged In The selected site is connected via the Multi Site Server has been logged into and is NOT communicating Offline The current connection status for each application is displayed in a status bar Connecting to a site The connected site is controlled by the Multi site Server service This service is installed when a multi site version of FOCUS is registered The user interface accessed via an icon in the task tray and is used to connect to a specific site The icon is green when a site is connected and red when there is not a site connected This service uses the PCC Server service to achieve its connection to the selected site s PCC Client List Connect nos Monday To connect to a specific site right click on the Multi site Server service icon and select Connect the Select Site dialog will be displayed 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 131 FOCUS User Manual Select Site Site r woensusnsnsnsnsusnsnsnsnsnsusnsnensnsnsnansnanstanstacstasstacntasssasntasstasntasnsnsnsnsnsnsnsnsasnsnsnsnsnsnsnsnsnsnsnensnsnsnsnssasseeg Sit rants Gas Garage pie Modem Password RAS connect
157. en the transaction stack depth is set to zero or XFuel is not setup the Visual Console must be configured to use the legacy transaction processing functions Additional Information The Additional Information tab contains non critical data notes and miscellaneous details relating to the site can be edited saved The PCC information group displays the software hardware version details of the last controller the Forecourt Configuration was connected to The Ethernet bridge information group displays software hardware version details and network settings of the Ethernet bridge card in the last controller the Forecourt Configuration was connected to should the PCC not be fitted with an Ethernet bridge these details will be blank Forman 3 Attendant Tagging When attendant tagging is used with a Forman 3 system the attendants are stored in the PCC This tab allows the enabling of the Forman 3 tagging within the PCC and the setting of the auto payoff time for attendant sales The attendant count is displayed however this can only be edited when creating a new site for existing sites this is maintained from the Forman 3 Attendants configuration node OPT Specific The OPT Specific tab contains some settings specific to the site s OPT terminal behaviour The number of dispensing banners indicates the number of banners available to display on the OPT while 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Forecourt Configuration ss dispensing is progressing and the ba
158. eneral Settings The General Settings dialog Options General Settings is used to configure the behaviour and appearance of the Forecourt Configuration application These options are stored locally on the PC and are not sent to the controller 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 29 FOCUS User Manual 3 1 3 2 a General Settings Send Request status options Advanced Automatically hide status after V Advanced user Confirm delete options x he Grid options V Display horizontal lines V Display vertical lines Cancel Send Request Status Options Whenever a send or request operation is performed a status panel will be displayed to inform the user of the progress When the respective operation completes this panel can be automatically hidden after a configurable number of seconds set to zero to hide this status panel immediately Confirm Delete Options There are two options available confirm delete operations and confirm delete site The latter option is only available in the multi site version The confirm delete options should be disabled with caution When disabled configuration entities can be deleted without a confirmation message appearing if a entity is accidentally deleted it CANNOT be recovered The confirm delete site option should only be disabled by advanced users as once a site is deleted it will have to be setup from scratch again Grid Options Both the horizontal and vertical
159. enser type of None is selected Enter the logical start and stop dispenser numbers along with the internal dispenser number UPI 1 Properties Site 10 UPI Dispenser type PE Logical start dispenser Internal dispenser number Click OK to save or Cancel to abort all changes The number of UPIs is fixed at four UPIs cannot be added or deleted Example 1 Two UPIs can be mapped to the same range of dispenser 2012 POSTEC Data Systems as FOCUS User Manual A site with 12 dispensers e Dispensers 1 3 5 are Gilbarco e Dispensers 2 4 6 7 12 are Email Dispenser type Logical start Logical stop Internal dispenser dispenser dispenser a ber 3 2 8 2 Gilbarco 1 16 a A Example 2 The dispenser can be re mapped so that its logical dispenser number is different from its physical Internal dispenser number This allows the physical dispenser number programmed into a dispenser to be re mapped to a logical pump number which the site uses to identify a dispenser This is particularly useful for sites with more than one dispenser loop and less than 16 dispensers on each loop A site with 24 dispensers Dispensers 1 12 are Gilbarco Dispensers number 1 12 Dispensers 13 24 are Gilbarco Dispensers number 1 12 Dispenser type Logical start Logical stop Internal dispenser dispenser dispenser a DEBIDA ber 1 2Gilbarcoc 1 12 2 2 Gilbarco a a E The
160. equired Enter a valid user name and password to login to the Setup Utility Only the password is case sensitive The user name of the last user to login is displayed The initial default login after installation is User name Administrator Password password The default Administrator password should be changed as part of the site commissioning process The Suite Setup has two tabs Setup Utility used to configure FOCUS suite and Service Management Utility to control Focus services Setup Utility The Setup Utility has two types of settings General and User Security All settings take effect immediately click Close to exit the application 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Introducing FOCUS 6 Setup Utility Setup Utility Service Management Utility General Verbose logging UserSecurity Applications that require a login Y Audit Viewer V FPoS Program Editor V Transaction Viewer Y Database Maintenance Y PCC Connection Wizard V PCC Network Setup Wizard User Manager General The FOCUS applications log events as they happen sometimes if problems are occurring verbose logging may be required The system will then log more detailed events that are not usually required Use the Verbose logging checkbox in the General group box to turn verbose logging on off User Security The FOCUS system uses two types of security user and attendant to restrict access to it s numerous ap
161. er or Visual Console applications through the GUI Please note that the shift control functions run silently from the manager therefore functionality for stopping restarting dispensers will not work These command line functions should only be used after consulting with a POSTEC development engineer Start of Day Using this parameter will perform a silent start of day Parameter C1 Return Code 0 Start of day succeeded 1 Start of day failed view the audit log for more details Shift Change Using this parameter will perform a silent shift change Parameter C2 Return Code 0 Shift change succeeded 1 Shift change failed view the audit log for more details End of Day Using this parameter will perform a silent end of day Parameter C3 Return Code 0 End of day succeeded 1 End of day failed view the audit log for more details 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Visual Console 5 1 Visual Console Visual Console The Visual Console is the key to the FOCUS system It provides a graphical real time dispenser status display of the forecourt as well as full dispenser control The console can be integrated with a POS application to allow wetstock transactions to be finalised along with dry stock transactions Australian markets the Visual Console is approved by the NSC for use with any POS software providing the POS software meets the POS requirements documented in NSC document S1 0 A and the FOCUS POS interface specifications of
162. er the local price set at the dispenser must be zero for the dispenser to accept remote price changes When set to zero the dispenser will change it s price as instructed by the PCC If the dispenser s price is not set to zero and the price at the dispenser does not equal the price programmed into the PCC for that dispenser the dispenser status icon will alternate between an error and dollar sign with Price Er being displayed in the status text if Price Er Price Er The dispenser will not be allowed to dispense fuel until the price at the dispenser is set to zero Gilbarco Dispensers It is not permitted to remotely set the price on Australian Gilbarco Calcopac model dispensers that are fitted with a mechanical unit price display To facilitate this the Forecourt Configuration application has a configuration option to disable central pricing under the Dispensers configuration node 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Multi site 6 1 Multi site The FOCUS suite can be run in a multi site mode this is version specific This allows a network of sites to be managed from a support commissioning perspective This can be performed from a remote location over a wide area network such as dial up or locally i e running on a laptop The number of sites that can be maintained is dependent on the site licence purchased Site Management When the multi site version is being used each site node is listed under the master Sites no
163. erver Settings Run Silent The PCC Server functionality is accessed by right clicking on the icon E Stop fF Properties MOB Monday Click the Start Stop menu items are used to temporarily start stop communication with the PCC Click the Properties menu item to setup the PCC Server serial communication properties vew socket serial logs and view a logged in client list Note Windows 98 does not support services therefore the user will have to run the Multi Site Server manually All other functionality remains the same 2 4 1 Properties The properties dialog accessed via the right click menu or by double clicking on the PCC Server icon is used to setup the communication port view serial socket monitors and view a client list The dialog consists of three tabs Communication Port Socket and Connections The software and hardware version of the PCC that the PCC Server is currently communicating or the last communicated with is displayed in the PCC Version group box When the PCC Server has not communicated with a PCC this is displayed as Unknown This information is also displayed in the PCC Server task tray icon s pop up hint Communication Port The serial port parameters are set up on the Communication Port tab Select the COM device baud rate data bits stop bits and parity using the controls provided click OK to save the settings or Cancel to abort The factory default settings are e Direct
164. es which forecourt device the PCC will switch the modem port to once a modem connection has been established This allows communication directly with the forecourt peripheral assigned to the specified port if the protocol is known in a 4COM configuration or diagnostic purposes Dial Out The Dial Out tab contains parameters relating to the dialing out from the PCC Dial Properties Site 10 Dial prefix Wait for connect 50 STD code Re dial delay 120 Dial out mode e Tone Pulse LJ cmo The PCC dials out when certain alarm conditions occur and alarm file is setup refer 4COM user manual The dial prefix and STD code are added to the number to be dialed relating to specific alarms The Wait for connect and Re dial delay specify times in seconds for the appropriate action The dial out mode can be set to Tone or Pulse Save Send Once the dial properties configuration is complete click Save Send Operations Save Send to save the data to the database and send it to the PCC or Cancel Operations Cancel to cancel all 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Forecourt Configuration as changes The dial properties may be configured while the PCC is offline in this case the data will be saved to the database but not sent to the PCC This allows the user to send the data to the PCC using the Send Configuration function at a later date Request When the PCC is online and the advance
165. ese methods of payments can vary in description therefore the payment types are configurable from site to site These methods of payment will be used to display totals in the Daily Shift Attendant Sales Totals reports The methods of payment are also used in the FLIP application for tender functionality Editing the Payment Types The site s payment types are configured from the Dispensers OPTs Methods of Payment page A payment type consists of a MOP Method of Payment code used by the system to identify the method of payment the transaction was finalised with a description and an indication of whether the transaction should be added to the attendant s bag if that method of payment is used Adding a payment type Click New to add a new payment type supplier The New Method of Payment dialog will be displayed enter the relevant details and click OK to save or Cancel to cancel without saving the 2012 POSTEC Data Systems es FOCUS User Manual 4 8 6 4 9 method of payment The MOP code is a unique reference by which the payment type is identified in the system and the Description will appear in the attendant totals report Check the Add to bag control if the transaction data needs to be added to the attendant s theoretical bag total when finalised with the specified method of payment The Smallest Value figure indicates the smallest value available for that MOP this usually relates to cash For example if currency has 10
166. etup When a POS has been written to interface directly to the controller via the FOCUS PCCClient32 dll a component of the FOCUS suite the FOCUS suite must still be installed as per instructions Sometimes the POS company still chooses to use the FOCUS Forecourt Configuration application to setup the controller and or the FOCUS Forecourt Manager application for wetstock reporting Even in the case of the POS company not using the mentioned applications the direct interface still requires registration and hence the database and supporting utilities are still required The only difference in this case of a direct interface is the registration codes will restrict use to either the DLL only or the DLL and possibly the Forecourt Configuration and or Forecourt Manager applications 14 2 Uninstalling FOCUS Should you wish to uninstall the FOCUS from you computer you will have to uninstall the FOCUS suite itself and optionally the Firebird Database Server if you no longer want to use FOCUS in the future If you are uninstalling FOCUS prior to installing another version of FOCUS there is no need to uninstall the Firebird Database Server as doing so will just add another installation step during the re install process Un installing the FOCUS suite To uninstall the FOCUS suite select Add Remove programs from the Windows Control Panel Select the FOCUS item and click Remove Click Yes to confirm the removal the removal progress is displayed this sh
167. existing symbol in the database is overwritten with that received from the PCC The digits and decimal places are very important to the system and should be setup according to the local settings The visible decimal places is currently only implemented for the transaction money unit this controls how many decimal places are displayed on the Visual Console Unit 1 Properties Site 10 Name Symbol Digits 4 3 Visible decimal places 0 Click OK to save or Cancel to abort all changes Decimal places The number of units is fixed at eight units cannot be added or deleted The system comes pre loaded with some default unit templates for different countries these can be used as a good starting point when configuring the units for different regions Save Send Once the units configuration is complete click Save Send Operations Save Send to save the data to the database and send it to the controller or Cancel Operations Cancel to cancel all changes When the advanced user or allow offline editing of units configuration options are on the units may be configured while the controller is offline in this case the data will be saved to the database but not sent to the controller This allows the user to send the data to the controller using the Send Configuration function at a later date Request When the PCC is online and the advanced user option is on the current units configuratio
168. ffline Therefore the Visual Console should only be run when a site has been connected via the Multi Site Server PE M Connected Logged In Online 6 31 10 06 04 DEVELOP Site 101 Grant s Gas Garage 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 193 FOCUS User Manual Forecourt Manager Site Connection The Forecourt Manager can choose which site is currently being edited this is done from the home page using the drop down control provided Multi site Current Site Site 7830 Grant s Gas Garage X Site 7830 Grant s Gas Garage PCC Status Disconnected Working Offline This allows sites to be edited while disconnected i e working offline Once a site has been connected through the Multi Site Server the Login button becomes available Multi site Current Site Site 7330 Grant s Gas Garage v gt Site 7830 Grant s Gas Garage PCC Status Connected Logged Out Offline When Login is clicked the Forecourt Manager will login to the connected site s PCC and hence go online to that site Multi site Current Site Site 7830 Grant s Gas Garage v E Site 7830 Grant s Gas Garage PCC Status Connected Logged In Online 6 34 14 04 08 Global Once online the Logout button becomes available click this to logout of the connected site and return to the disconnected state i e working offline Forecourt Configuration Site Connection The Forecourt Configuration can choose which site is currently bein
169. fuel being dispensed while the dispenser is offline from the controller however for this to work the NRT option must be set to true to ensure the report uses the dispenser electronic totals A variance will also occur if transactions are not paid off on the Visual Console before the shift change or end of day is done these will then appear as gains in the next days report The following fields are displayed for each line of this report Grade name Dispenser number Hose number The hose sales volume at the start of the shift day month The hose sales volume at the end of the shift day month The total hose sales volume for the shift day month i e end start this calculation also takes into account the wrapping of volumes The total hose sales volume of transactions processed by the Visual Console for the shift day month The variance between the dispenser meter volume total and the Visual Console volume total The hose sales value at the start of the shift day month The hose sales value at the end of the shift day month The total hose sales value for the shift day month i e end start this calculation also takes into account the wrapping of values The total hose sales value of transactions processed by the Visual Console for the shift day month The variance between the dispenser meter value total and the Visual Console value total The total volume value and variance for each grade is displayed at the end of each grade blo
170. g additional information for the status displayed The following text may be shown Price Er Price held in controller does not match price in dispensers 22222222 Communications error If error persists call for service Mismatch A mismatch is a communication error If error persists call for service Change Price change is in progress Overfill Prepay preset delivery overfilled sale buffer contains balance Pump Err An error in the dispenser PD Error Power down has occurred during a delivery Init Dispenser under initialisation from controller DCA Driveway Card Acceptor in control of this dispenser DCA Err Driveway Card Acceptor communications error Low Low level alarm for tank feeding that dispenser Diag Dispenser under controller communications diagnostic state Hangup Dispenser nozzle needs to be hung up Setup Err Controller configuration integrity failure 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 14 6 Timer Definitions TIMER DEFAULT DESCRIPTION Autohold Pre Authorisation sec 30 POS Preauthorization timeout if in Auto Hold mode Price Change sec Price change lock time MPD Hose Swap sec 6 Multi hose swap time before deauthorize Normal Return Idle sec TVD Display status at end of normal sale Exception Return Idle sec 3 TVD Display status in exception condition Vehicle Auto detection sec 10 Nozzle lifted waiting for AVI detection EPS Authorisation sec 30 Wait for EPS authorizatio
171. g all current data When the site has successfully gone live a confirmation dialog is displayed Configuration Report The site s current configuration can be viewed in report form Click Print Preview File Print Preview to preview the configuration report and optionally print it or click Print File Print to print the configuration report without viewing it The report functionality is only available when the site node is selected When the Print Preview dialog is displayed the toolbar controls can be used to move through the report Click Print to open the print dialog The report can be printed to a printer or a file there are numerous file types available Print to a file by checking the Print to File option specify the type of file and file name then click OK Command Line Functionality Some functions can be started by running the Forecourt Configuration application with a command line parameter these are detailed below These command line functions should only be used after consulting with a POSTEC development engineer Request Configuration Using this parameter will perform a silent request configuration O 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Forecourt Configuration 62 Parameter C1 Return Code 0 Request configuration succeeded 1 Request configuration failed view the audit log for more details Send Configuration Using this parameter will perform a silent send configuration Send all configurati
172. g edited this is done by selecting the appropriate sites node from the left hand tree view y IZ Forecourt Configuration Multi Site File Edit Templates Operations Tools Options Help y ES y Sites 7 AUCKLAND CHRISTCHURCH WELLINGTON A Site 11 Grant s Gas Garage Al Site 1232 Westgate Motors General Properties Dial Properties Eur Grades Tanks This allows sites to be edited while disconnected i e working offline Once a site has been connected through the Multi Site Server the icon changes to a yellow background and the Login button becomes available 2012 POSTEC Data Systems E Forecou ontiguration Mu File Edit Templates Operations Tools Options Help BS x BSl eel 2S IA Site 11 Grant s Gas Garage Sites 7 Ey AUCKLAND E CHRISTCHURCH E WELLINGTON E A Site 11 Grant s Gas Garage E Site 1232 Westgate Motors Dial Properties E Grades de Tanks 0 When Login is clicked the Forecourt Configuration application will login to the connected site s PCC and hence go online to that site orecou o uration Mutti Fie Edit Templates Operations Tools Options Help R2 x BERR 244 WE Site 11 Grant s Gas Garage Sites 7 Ey AUCKLAND Ey CHRISTCHURCH i gt 5 WELLINGTON Dial Properties
173. ge when the Local Accounts page is accessed every two weeks The purge dialog can be configured via the Options dialog to be shown hidden during an automatic purge Backup The Local Accounts database can be backed up using the Local Accounts Database Maintenance Utility The size of the database can be decreased by performing a backup and then restore this is similar to running defragment on your hard drive The first time a backup is performed can take several minutes it is also a resource hungry procedure and should NOT be performed while the store is in full operation Click Backup to perform a manual backup of the database The Database Backup dialog displays the progress of the backup procedure Click OK to close this dialog once the backup is complete Restore The Local Accounts database can be restored from a previous backup using the Local Accounts Database Maintenance Utility The size of the database can be decreased by performing a backup and then restore this is similar to running defragment on your hard drive The first time a restore is performed it can take several minutes it is also a resource hungry procedure and should NOT be performed while the site is in full operation All other Local Accounts applications services must be shutdown before a restore can be started Click Restore to perform a manual restore from a previous backup of the database Please be aware that if a restore is performed from an old backup so
174. ghts switched off or on as programmed overriding any manual setting at the dispenser Note The dispensers MUST be capable of console lighting control for this to have any effect 5 3 9 Auto Payoff Mode When the Auto Payoff Mode is turned on via the Forecourt Manager sales will be automatically finalised after a configurable period of time When Auto Payoff Mode is turned on and the Auto Pay menu item is visible in the console menu 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 125 FOCUS User Manual 5 4 5 4 1 5 4 2 5 4 3 Auto Payoff can be turned on off indicated by a tick When the menu item is not visible and the Auto Payoff Mode is turned on the console will always operate in Auto Payoff Mode Yo LIY Y i Auto Payoff Y IE Mienanear Tact When the Auto Payoff Mode is turned off the console will operate normally i e NOT in Auto Payoff Mode and if the Auto Payoff menu item is visible it will be disabled General Operator Information Stand Alone Mode The controller will automatically change into operating schedule four after all FOCUS clients have been offline for more than the Fallback Timeout default is two minutes When a FOCUS client comes back online the controller will change to the operating schedule that was previously selected The Fallback Timeout is configured under Timers using the Forecourt Configuration application and can be disabled by setting the value to zero This allows the user to configure a set of default p
175. gout attendant standalone mode only The Dispenser number entry box is used in a keyboard environment to enter a dispenser number to authorise hold etc The Authorise all calling dispensers does just that authorise all dispensers that are lifted and waiting authorisation this icon may be configured to be shown hidden The Emergency Stop is used to emergency stop all dispensers The login logout button is used to login logout attendants this is only available when running in standalone mode The console menu provides access to all additional functionality including tank delivery entry shift control etc The status bar is used to display errors red or information blue for a short period of time before returning to the idle state Because of this the Visual Console has a minimum width to ensure the entire message can be read 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 101 FOCUS User Manual Master database online mZ suer meo f osa wo tro 1 FAS PAS PA Status Icons The status icons in the top right hand corner are used to access additional functionality and display the state of the console POS integration i m El e Alarms indicates alarms are present in the system e Receipt click this icon to print reprint a receipt for previous transactions When the Visual Console is integrated with a POS receipt printing is performed by the POS application this is configurable
176. grid lines can be enabled depending on the users preference Advanced When a user has been using the Forecourt Configuration application for sometime they may wish to turn on the Advanced User option This will prevent various warnings from being shown and allows individual configuration data to be requested from the controller Due to the nature of this option a warning is displayed to ensure this option is desirable Click OK to save the settings or Cancel to abort all changes Communication Settings When a multi site version is being used the FOCUS suite can access a site remotely by dialing the PCC s modem The communication settings are important to the connection process The Communication Settings dialog Options Communication Settings provides the controls to setup the local country dial prefix international dial prefix and local area code Enter values where appropriate using a comma to initiate a dialing pause Communication Settings Dialing parameters Local country New Zealand ts Dial prefix i International dial prefix oo Local area code o corent The actual PCC modem phone number is different for every site therefore this is setup under each site s general properties configuration node 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Forecourt Configuration 30 Click OK to save the settings or Cancel to abort all changes 3 1 3 3 Customize View When a site s configuration node i
177. gs What are the new internal network settings you wish to set in the PCC IP address 10 0 0 169 Subnet mask Default gateway 0 0 0 0 lt Back Cancel Setting PCC Internal Network Settings The Setting PCC Internal Network Settings page displays the status of the set PCC internal network settings procedure 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Setting up Controller Connection te PCC Network Setup ei E S New network settings IP address 10 0 0 169 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway 0 0 0 0 TCP port 7020 Set PCC internal network settings successful lt Back Next gt Cancel Finish On completion a summary of the network settings configured in the PCC is displayed Click Close to exit the wizard or Restart to run the wizard again from the start 2 2 3 LAN New PCC Internal Network Settings Specify the new internal network settings from the New PCC Internal Network Settings page Select PCC Select the PCC you wish to set the internal network settings on and click Next to start the change procedure If the PCC is on a different network ensure you have selected the LAN All Networks for the set interface type PCC Network Setup Select PCC in which PCC do you want to set the internal network settings 169 254 2 174 10 0 0 172 10 0 0 173 Searching Note lt may take a few seconds for a PCC to appear in the list lt Ba
178. gured from the Forecourt Manager When prepay hose restriction is enabled the hose selection dialog will be displayed allowing the hose the prepay will apply to to be selected Select Hose Hose 1 Hose 2 CNG Hose 3 Diesel After selecting the hose the dispenser status icon will change from the prepay hold state to the authorise state and the prepay amount will appear in the memory buffer for a few seconds before it is automatically process When the Visual Console is integrated with a POS this will be transferred to the POS awaiting confirmation When the dispenser nozzle is lifted the status icon changes to the nozzle lifted icon and as fuel flows the icon changes to in progress At the end of delivering the preset amount the dispenser will change to the prepay hold state ready for the next sale Underfill Refund At the end of an underfill delivery the dollar amount of the underfill refund preset amount dispensed amount will be displayed in the sale buffer of the relevant dispenser The refund amount will be shown in RED The status icon will change to the refund icon PA 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Visual Console i 12 The transaction can be processed normally and the icon will change to the prepay hold state ready for the next sale In Australia due to legacy regulations some dispenser software is programmed to have a three minute timeout when a prepay underfill occurs
179. h Click Clear to delete the current file and parameter settings Save Cancel Changes To save any changes that have been made to these settings click Save or click Cancel to cancel all changes Operation Shift Control The FOCUS system provides considerable shift control functionality this involves start of day shift change and end of day procedures Each procedure needs to be customised to get the most out of the system for the desired set up The PoS FOCUS Setup Operation page provides the controls to configure the FOCUS shift control procedures Shift Control Options Shift control is not always required therefore to disable this functionality un check the Enable shift control option When this option is checked the shift control procedures are set up via the three set up wizards e Start of Day Setup Wizard e Shift Change Setup Wizard e End of Day Setup Wizard Click the appropriate button to open each set up wizard Report Options Within the Shift Change and End of Day wizards it is possible to set reports to print Within Report Options these reports can be configured to print to the printer of your choice PDF Files or both Check or un check the Printer and PDF Files option and set the Printer and Save Folder to the desired options Report header options allows report headers to be enabled or disabled Show field calculation headers causes column headers to be added to reports which show how re
180. h dialogs will appear during the SC The behaviour of the SC is configured using the SC setup wizard located in the Forecourt Manager The SC is performed manually by the user by selecting the Shift Change menu item in the console menu When the SC is started the Stop Dispensers dialog configurable will be displayed prompting the user to place the idle dispensers on hold This prevents dispensers from being used during the shift change process Click Hold Idle Dispensers to hold idle dispensers Click Continue to continue with the SC or Abort to abort If the check dispenser status option has been selected in the SC wizard dispenser statuses will be checked when Continue is clicked Before a SC can continue there must be no dispensers in the following states Ready Dispenser is authorized Preset Dispenser has been preset with an amount Refund To Pay Dispenser has an outstanding transaction In Use Dispenser is currently in use Zerofill Dispenser has had a zerofill TempStop Dispenser is temporarily stopped Overfill An overfill has occurred on the dispenser PD Error Dispenser has a power down error Nozz Out Dispenser has its nozzle lifted DCA Dispenser is under DCA control Should any dispensers be in one of these states the relevant text will be displayed in red along with the dispenser number Click Continue to keep checking if the SC is allowed to continue The continue process can be automated
181. he answers of questions on previous pages 24 Hour Site It is becoming more common these days for sites to run 24 hours a day In this situation these is no time delay between the end of one day and the start of the next Select Yes if the site is running 24 hours a day the system will then perform a start of day procedure immediately after an end of day procedure has completed If this option has been set to Yes in the start of day setup wizard it will be set to Yes here and vice versa Tank Dip Entry This will allow the prompting for entering in tank dips before the EOD process will continue An option is available to force entry for all tanks that have been setup for logical tank gauging Check Dispenser Status Before a end of day procedure is started it may be desirable to have forecourt in an idle state i e all dispensers stopped idle and outstanding transactions payed off The system will check the dispenser status and not allow the end of day procedure to continue until the forecourt is in an idle state Select Yes to force the system to check the dispenser status Synchronise Date Time 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Forecourt Manager 00 The controller date time is a crucial part of the FOCUS system the controller uses this to time stamp transactions events deliveries etc During commissioning the date time should be set correctly However due to factors like daylight savings etc it may need to be adjusted ever
182. he PCC This allows the user to send the data to the PCC using the Send Configuration function at a later date Request When the PCC is online and the advanced user option is on the current timer configuration may be requested from the PCC by clicking Request Operations Request The requested data will be stored in the database and will replace any previous changes made Ensure the PCC is in a working state e not master reset before requesting the timer configuration 3 29 Units Because of the nature of the architecture of the data storage in the controller the various data fields are NOT stored as floating point numbers within the controller rather as integer numbers with the number of decimal places implied It is important to understand that the FOCUS system uses the units configuration to interpret data received from sites and convert this data into floating point numbers where it is stored in the FOCUS database This includes totals transactions and tank inventory data The units within the FOCUS system are configurable as they change from region to region The Units configuration node allows the configuration of these units This configuration effects how data is presented in reports and throughout the FOCUS user interface this includes the Visual Console The units configuration is stored in non volatile configuration memory within the PCC EEPROM and is NOT lost on a flat battery or during the master reset process Thes
183. he input of the receipt width in characters click OK to centre the text to the width specified Centre Text Enter receipt width in characters 26 gt Each specific model of Receipt Printer will have a different maximum number of characters per line Care should be taken to check the printed receipt for line wrapping Click OK to save or Cancel to abort all changes Currently there is a fixed number of header and footer lines therefore lines cannot be added or deleted Save Send Once the Forecourt Receipt configuration is complete click Save Send Operations Save Send to save the data to the database and send it to the PCC or Cancel Operations Cancel to cancel all changes The Forecourt Receipt may be configured while the PCC is offline in this case the data will be saved to the database but not sent to the PCC This allows the user to send the data to the PCC using the Send Configuration function at a later date Request When the PCC is online and the advanced user option is on the current Forecourt Receipt configuration may be requested from the PCC by clicking Request Operations Request The requested data will be stored in the database and will replace any previous changes made Ensure the PCC is in a working state i e not master reset before requesting the Forecourt Receipt configuration 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 51 FOCUS User Manual 3 2 13 Forecourt Receipt Layout The la
184. he specified grade e The current shift value total for the specified grade e The current accumulated PCC volume total for the specified grade e The current accumulated PCC value total for the specified grade The shift value and volume is reset to zero during every FOCUS shift change or end of day The accumulated PCC value and volume is only reset by a master reset It is not reset during a FOCUS shift change or end of day This value will continue to increase until it reaches 999999 99 at which time it will reset to 0 and continue to increase again Note This is a legacy report 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 208 FOCUS User Manual 14 8 1 3 14 8 1 4 Sample Tank Inventory This report presents the real time tank inventory data for each tank setup in the system The units of the height temperature and volume fields are dependent on the Tank units setup as set in the Forecourt Configuration application The following fields are displayed for each line of this report Tank number Grade assigned to the tank Gross volume this is the current non temperature compensated volume Temperature compensated volume Only available when ATG is configured Product height height of product in the tank Only available when ATG is configured Temperature current temperature of the fuel in the tank Only available when ATG is configured Tank capacity as per tank configuration Tank ullage how empty the tank is calculated from the
185. hone number As part of the connection process a login to the PCC is required in the case of a remote connection a 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 33 FOCUS User Manual password must be specified this is set using the password control The system can be configured to include the area code when it is the same as the local area code The IP Address is used ina LAN WAN connection When connecting to a controller with an SBC installed a RAS connection is required enable this with the checkbox under the RAS Connection group box and specify PC Name User Password and RAS IP Address The dispenser count tank count grade count OPT count and AVI count properties display the number of the relevant entity These can only be modified when creating a new site when modifying an existing site the controls are disable are display the values from the current configuration Once the site has been created the number of tanks grades dispensers OPTs and AVIs is maintained from the relevant configuration node The In line DCA count is the number of In line DCAs such as PEC Autoserves on the forecourt and can be changed at anytime The top node number is used to limit the range of valid client node numbers that can login to the PCC through the serial interface This can speed up the communications with the PCC particularly if the PCC has been setup with a long response timeout as the PCC will not unnecessarily poll for nodes that are higher than the top n
186. hout being billed out to the customer by answer No to the prompt mentioned above Account Payment An account payment is based on a statement however this is not enforced and account payments can be made against any statement A payment is purely money being paid into an account Select Account Payment and the account payment dialog will be displayed 2012 POSTEC Data Systems FOCUS User Manual 13 6 2 2 Account Payment E Account Number Name Spissessssnsnnsnsenasnasnnsnannanssansesenssnssnssnetnssnssrenstansaseneeneany Statement 0000000200000002 Balance Current 5045 38 Outstanding 045 33 Cancel Select the statement the payment relates to and enter the payment amount click OK to make the payment or Cancel to abort Card Holders Add Card Holder Once an account is created at least one card holder needs to be assigned to it to add a card holder select New Card Holder Add Card Holder pAccount Card f4 Account 4 Number 12345612345610 Personal Details Name mooo Notes E Same as account Select the account to which the card holder should be added and enter the card number this is the number encoded on the tag that will be supplied to the customer Block card Enter the name of the card holder if the account has only one card holder then check the Same as account checkbox to set the name to the account name The
187. ice Control J Show account balance on receipt Start Stop Restart z Logging J Logto fie Keep logs for 7 days PCC Communication Check Enable PCC interface to have LAS accept transactions from the PCC Specify the IP address of the PCC and the node number the LAS service should use to login to the PCC The LAS service needs to be restarted when the IP address or Node number is changed Click Apply and then the Restart LAS Service button The service control buttons allow the stopping starting restarting of the LAS service Ifthe LAS service is not installed a prompt will be displayed allowing the installation of the service PoS Communication Check Enable PoS Interface to have LAS accept transactions from a PoS e g FLIP The PoS will have to be separately configured with IP address of the LAMS system Method of Payment this is the number passed back to the PCC to indicate the method of payment for Local Account transactions it should be left at the default of 3 unless otherwise advised Show account balance on receipt if checked LAS will add the current account balance to the receipt block that is passed to the PCC or PoS Card Number Masking select the masking method and mask character the example will show the masked format Logging set the log file on off for the LAS service and specify the log file roll period 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 170 FOCUS User Manual 13 6 2
188. ift hangers saci Se EMG OR DAY a5 crc A O E Dispenser Test Attendant Bag Payment ninia Dispenser Lighting Control nii oc Auto Payoff Mode mmm 4 General Operator Information cooncconnncconncconnnccnnnccancnnonnnonnnnennnrnnnnnrrnnnrnnnnrrnnnnrrnnrnnnane 125 Stand Alone Mode Power Down Error In line DCA Operation cnica 125 Remote Price Setting xiii dida 126 Part VI Multi site 128 1 Site Management ccooonnncccconnncncnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnn cnn rre 128 2 Connect DiSCONMe Ct iii A deesbatdeducccuedeettnieceectenek 130 Part VII Audit Viewer 138 1 Audit Use rlinte ta Ce ee aeaa aar a e Aa a e maa eaa aaa eaa etanat 138 2 Event User Interface cic cosa ae are raaa rae Ea aa aa add 140 Part VIII Database Maintenance Utility 143 A an OENE deen E EE EAA OE A E 143 2 A E E AE T EE N OEN 144 Sr PUIQO oeoa aa cd E a A 144 A BACKUP A T A O 144 D IR SLONC aia eea a as a aa a aee a a a a aa i Daaa a aai a Daraa aa ena a aeaieie 144 1 O A aana E EAE RE IDEAE EAE 145 7 Command Line Functionality ccceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 145 Part IX FPoS Program Editor 148 2012 POSTEC Data Systems FOCUS User Manual 1 User Interface ui a a dae 148 2 Program Developme nt connncccconnnnccnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnn rre 149 3 FPoS Program DetallS ouncoini e a ia ia 151 4 Import FPOS Programm isccecseccccestececccetecceccavecccceesecceceatscacccestacccastecstccazecegccatsi
189. ill be disabled In this case the database must be located on the local PC Therefore should the PC name specified in the master database path be different to that of the local PC the system will automatically change the master database path to contain the local name 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Appendix 184 le Database Location Utility Master database Local Database When the master database is located on another PC the local database location needs to be specified to allow the system to be switched into local mode if the network and hence connection to the master database fails Click Locate in the local database group box to open the Local Database Location dialog Local Database Location Database location te ThisPC Another Pl E name The Local database must reside on the local PC therefore only the This PC option is available Use the Browse button to locate the database file on this PC Click Test to perform a test connection to the local database specified Once the master and local database locations have been specified and where necessary tested click OK to save the settings or Cancel to abort Database Operation It is recommended that the FOCUS system is setup to use a master database In this setup the master database can reside on one of the PC s running FOCUS Recommended setup or on a server like PC It is a good idea to have the master database on a POS
190. in the case where the Visual Console is unattened contact Postec for more information 120 21 FOCUS User Manual 5 3 5 3 Shift Change Dispenser 2 In Use Dispensers Stopped Once the SC can continue a dialog will be displayed showing the current progress of the SC procedure Shift Change User Activated Uploading Hose data 45 End Of Day A EOD End of Day will request hose grade and tank data from the controller and store it in the database This procedure will end the current shift and the current day If the shift control has been setup as a 24hour site the EOD will also start a new day when it has ended the current day The requested stored data is used to generate wetstock reports The FOCUS wetstock reports may be automatically printed on completion of the EOD A external program can be configured to be run after the EOD has completed this may be a external reporter or any other custom utility e g record transfer etc The EOD setup will dictate which dialogs will appear during the EOD The behaviour of the EOD is configured using the EOD setup wizard located in the Forecourt Manager The EOD can be performed manually by the user by selecting the End of Day menu item in the console menu Alternatively the EOD can be scheduled to be automatically run at a particular time each day When the EOD is started the Stop Dispensers dialog configurable will be displayed prompt
191. ing the user to place the idle dispensers on hold This prevents dispensers from being used during the shift change process Click Hold Idle Dispensers to hold idle dispensers this is performed automatically by the system Click Continue to continue with the EOD or Abort to abort If the check dispenser status option has been selected in the EOD wizard dispenser statii will be checked when Continue is clicked Before a EOD can continue there must be no dispensers in the following states 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Visual Console 122 Ready Dispenser is authorized Preset Dispenser has been preset with an amount Refund To Pay Dispenser has an outstanding transaction In Use Dispenser is currently in use Zerofill Dispenser has had a zerofill TempStop Dispenser is temporarily stopped Overfill An overfill has occurred on the dispenser PD Error Dispenser has a power down error Nozz Out Dispenser has its nozzle lifted DCA Dispenser is under DCA control Should any dispensers be in one of these states the relevant text will be displayed in red along with the dispenser number Click Continue to keep checking if the EOD is allowed to continue The continue process can be automated in the case where the Visual Console is unattened contact Postec for more information End Of Day J Hold Idle Dispensers Dispenser 4 Pay off Outstanding Sales Dispensers Stopped Once the EOD can continue
192. ing will be displayed for 5 days leading up to the end of the 30 day grace period After the 30 days the LAS will decline all attempts to authorise card holders and NO local account transactions will proceed An error message will appear on start up and periodically alerting the user to the fact the software is unregistered LAMS is UNREGISTERED Suite functionality has been limited invalid registration Please register LAMS or discontinue use Generate a registration support file and contact your distributor Close The unregistered warning and error dialog includes the functionality to generate a Registration Support File click the Registration Support File button This file contains version details internal controller serial number and site details Save this file and send it to Postec to receive the appropriate registration codes Hardware Failure Should the controller fail and have to be swapped out the registration key can be cleared to prevent invalid registration with the new controller use the Clear button in the Registration dialog In this case the grace period will be reduced to 10 days It is the distributor s responsibility to register the Local Accounts functionality 30 days is more than enough time to achieve this Operation The following sections provide a step by step overview of the Local Accounts operation from start to finish once the system has been commissioned Step 1 C
193. inutes Minimum volume 1000 Start Height Increase 20 Continue Height Increase 3 Variance Process Settling Time h 0 minutes Default The advanced tank parameters should only be changed on advise from Postec engineers otherwise they must be left at the default values Click OK to save or Cancel to abort all changes Details from one tank can be copied select the tank and click Copy Edit Copy and then pasted on to another tank select another tank and click Paste Edit Paste Adding Tanks A site can have up to sixteen tanks add a new tank by clicking New File New Enter the relevant details into the Tank Properties dialog and click OK to save or Cancel to abort all changes Alternatively the duplicate functionality can be used to create a new tank which is duplicate of the O 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Forecourt Configuration do selected tank Simply select the tank you wish to duplicate and click Duplicate Edit Duplicate a new tank will be created with the identical configuration as the selected tank This can be used to quickly add tanks that are of similar nature and small customisations can be performed by editing each tank individually Deleting Tanks Only the last tank can be deleted to do this select the last tank and click Delete File Delete When the confirm delete option is on a confirmation dialog will be shown click Yes to delete the tank or No to canc
194. ion PCC will print as per the hard coded receipt layout if the layout is not configured or is configured improperly For all EPS configured sites receipt layout should include EPS field in the layout Editing Receipt Labels Click Edit Labels to begin label editing The Fields list displays the fields for which labels can be set Clicking on a field displays a list of the labels on the right which are editable for that field To change a particular label double click it in the list The Label Edit dialog appears to allow you to modify the selected label 3 2 14 OPT Settings The PCC can interface to a number of OPTs Customer Authorisation Terminals The OPT Settings configuration node allows the configuration of the OPT devices that will be used Editing OPT Settings The OPT settings can be manually edited or a configuration template can be applied To manually modify a specific OPT select the appropriate OPT and click Open File Open The OPT Properties dialog will be displayed allowing the editing of the OPT OPT 1 Properties Site 10 OPT number Start dispenser ispensers Printer Address 1 y Stop dispenser OPT options v Swipe Mag Card Reader Device 6 v Insertion Mag Card Reader Device 7 Tag Reader Device 8 TVD Tag Reader Device 9 v Receipt Printer Device 10 E tanos The OPT is assigned a start and stop dispenser The drop down controls can be used to select Open to all di
195. ion details User Password Connection Type Serial Modem C LAN Status via UDP C WAN Status via TCP F Device Direct to COM1 v Connect Cancel Select the site you wish to connect to using the drop down control provided the modem phone number and password will update accordingly When communicating via a serial modem connection select the communication device e g Direct to COM1 or modem In the case a LAN WAN connection a PCC has an Ethernet bridge or SBC installed select the LAN WAN item When using RAS for a WAN connection check Use RAS The key difference between LAN and WAN is the mechanism by which the controller sends out its status messages for LAN these are sent via UDP and for WAN these are sent by TCP The IP address is dependent on the connection type for LAN and WAN the system uses the IP address setup under General Properties Contact Details when using WAN with RAS the IP address specified under General Properties RAS Connection is used Each individual sites connection mechanism is remembered from the last time it was connected When a serial modem connection is being used only one of the three applications Forecourt Configuration Forecourt Manager and Visual Console may be run at any one time as the remote connection only supports one login Click Connect to initiate the connection process the connection progress is displayed in the bottom status window 2012 POSTE
196. ion is on the current AVI configuration may be requested from the PCC by clicking Request Operations Request The requested data will be stored in the database and will replace any previous changes made Ensure the PCC is in a working state i e not master reset before requesting the AVI configuration 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Forecourt Configuration s 3 2 12 Forecourt Receipt Header Footer Some forecourt configurations may require a Postec 4REC receipt printer to be present on the forecourt In this case the header footer of the receipt printed on the receipt printer should be configured Currently a maximum of six header lines and four footer lines are available Editing Receipt Lines To manually modify a specific receipt line select the appropriate line and click Open File Open The Receipt Line Properties dialog will be displayed allowing the editing of the text Header Line 1 Text Postec Truckstop omo The window below the grid displays a preview of the current receipt set up A receipt header footer line that has no text defined for it will not be displayed on the receipt However if a blank line is required set the appropriate line s text to B this can also be done by right clicking and selecting Insert blank line from the pop up menu Centre a line using spaces this can be done by right clicking and selecting Centre Text from the pop up menu A dialog will be displayed allowing t
197. ired colour panel to select a new colour grade colours are set under the PoS FOCUS Setup Appearance page The tank sizes can be scaled based on the tanks capacity to turn this option on check the appropriate check box under the General group Modify the settings as desired and click OK to save or Cancel to abort the changes Note These graphical options also effect the appearance of the Graphical Tank Inventory report generated from Reports page Tank Deliveries When logical tank gauging is being used tank deliveries need to be entered into the system to ensure tank reconciliation is accurate If automatic tank gauging is configured tank deliveries are measured automatically however they can be entered into the system for future reference in this case the delivery is NOT added twice Tank deliveries entered can be reported on at a future date using the Historical Tank Deliveries report The Forecourt Manager and Visual Console provide the Tank Delivery Wizard to enter the tank delivery details Click the Enter Tank Delivery button the console menu to open the Tank Delivery Wizard Refer Tank Deliveries for more information Tank Dips When logical tank gauging is being used the controller maintains a theoretical tank level by adding deliveries and subtracting sales This level can be kept accurate by performing regular tank dips i e manually dipping the physical tank and entering the actual level Editing Tank Dips The
198. ish to maintain by clicking the appropriate button Database Select Which database do you wish to maintain The database being maintained will be displayed in the title bar When the Local database is being maintained the Purge and Options buttons will be disabled Click the relevant operation button to upgrade purge backup and restore the database Click Options to open the options dialog and Delete Logs to delete database maintenance log files 3 Database Maintenance Master a Backup ta Upgrade a Restore Operations Options X Delete Logs Close Click Close to close the Database Maintenance Utility Options The Options dialog is used to configure when and how a database purge is executed Click Options to open the Database Options dialog During the purge process historical audit and transaction data is permanently deleted from the database to stop the database size growing too large Use the drop down controls to select the 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 Database Maintenance Utilit period of time each data type should be saved e data older than this time will be purged The purge can be performed manually from the Database Maintenance Utility or automatically when the Forecourt Manager application is started Select how the purge will be performed using the radio buttons provides and check the Show dialog during automati
199. ish to modify and click Open The Modify Fuel Supplier dialog will be displayed modify the details and click OK to save or Cancel to cancel without saving the changes made Deleting a supplier Select the supplier you wish to delete and click Delete A confirmation message will be displayed click OK to delete or Cancel to cancel without deleting FOCUS Setup The FOCUS system provides solutions for a wide range of forecourt sceneries configurations Because of this the system can be fully customised depending on the site s configuration The FOCUS Setup page provides access to the required controls for customising the Visual Console Forecourt Manager appearance and operation This includes the customisation of the Console s graphical user interface appearance Console s menu FOCUS shift control start of day setup shift change setup and end of day setup FOCUS scheduled price changes Advanced operating options attendant tagging forecourt manager options etc Point of sale integration options Key setup when operating in a key driven environment Fuel suppliers these are used in the Visual Console s tank delivery wizard 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Forecourt Manager The Visual Console presents the user with a graphical representation of the forecourt the PoS FOCUS Setup Appearance Menu page provides all the required controls to customise the Visual Console s appearance 4 9 1 Appearance Menu
200. ispenser and click Open File Open The Dispenser Properties dialog will be displayed allowing the editing of the chosen dispenser 2012 POSTEC Data Systems a FOCUS User Manual Dispenser 1 Properties Site 62 Hose tank assignment Miscellaneous settings lv MPD Multi product dispenser Dispenser Group 1 Tank Grade cr Bs poo Hose 1 71 Super Tag display type Hose 2 72 Unleaded Y No Tag or Display v Hose 3 T4 Diesel v Dispenser modes Schedule 1 Jautonos Schedule 3 Autonoi Hose 4 None Y Schedule 2 PrePay Schedule 4 Attend I Option 3 PoS control PoS Auth for FPoS OPT sale Special settings E Option 1 Version 0 2 Option2 Option 4 Enable Disable Required Not Required Y Central pricing FPoS OPT control Y NRT Non resetable totals Enable Disable OK To set up a dispensers hose assignment check the MPD Multi Product Dispenser check box if the dispenser is a MPD and specify the relevant tank using the list of available tanks provided for each hose the dispenser has the grade that is assigned to that tank will automatically appear in the grade field If the dispenser is not an MPD i e the MPD checkbox is unchecked only hose one tank grade fields will be available for editing When two tanks are manifolded together the slave tank number cannot be used in the tank assignment field always use the tan
201. k OK to save or Cancel to abort all changes Details from one dispenser can be copied select the dispenser and click Copy Edit Copy and then pasted on to another dispenser select another dispenser and click Paste Edit Paste Adding Dispensers A site can have up to sixty four dispensers add a new dispenser by clicking New File New Enter the relevant details into the Dispenser Properties dialog and click OK to save or Cancel to abort all changes Alternatively the duplicate functionality can be used to create a new dispenser which is duplicate of the selected dispenser Simply select the dispenser you wish to duplicate and click Duplicate Edit Duplicate a new dispenser will be created with the identical configuration as the selected dispenser This can be used to quickly add dispensers that are of similar nature Deleting Dispensers Only the last dispenser can be deleted to do this select the last dispenser and click Delete File Delete When the confirm delete option is on a confirmation dialog will be shown click Yes to delete the dispenser or No to cancel Note At least one dispenser must be present therefore if there is only one dispenser setup it cannot be deleted Save Send Once the dispenser configuration is complete click Save Send Operations Save Send to save the data to the database and send it to the controller or Cancel Operations Cancel to cancel all changes
202. k number of the master The hose tank mapping is used for maintaining the tank inventory system and the grade mapping is used for the unit price setting product sale total analysis Therefore if the dispenser hose tank configuration has changed and been sent to the controller the grade prices will have to be sent to the controller again A dialog will remind the user of this when the save send has been completed Sometimes a product from a single tank is sold as two different grades to enable split pricing e g Self service or Full service Normally only the tank is specified for each hose and the grade is automatically inserted To enable a grade override right click on the grid and select the Allow grade override item This will allow the grade field for each hose to be manually changed using the drop down control that is now enabled When a grade override has been applied the grade name will be coloured red in the summary grid Hose one must be assigned a tank regardless of whether the dispenser is a single or multi product dispenser If a tank is not assigned to hose one an error will be displayed when an attempt to close the dialog is made The Miscellaneous settings group provides controls to set up miscellaneous settings required for dispensers The group allows dispensers to be assigned to a group number for various purposes including assigning to an EFT terminal number The Tag display type specifies the type of tag display if
203. king Cancel This will cancel the sent or request operation in the case of a send the data will already be saved to the database and in the case of a request any data already received from the controller will also be stored in the database s gt Sending data to the PCC Complete Send Site Parameters Y A Send Tank Configuration Once the operation is complete the status panel can be closed by clicking Hide or this panel may be configured to automatically close after a configurable amount of time under General Settings Should an error occur during the send request process the error status symbol will be displayed and the status title bar colour will flash red When a user cancels the send request process or the controller software version does not support one of the functions the cancelled or unsupported status symbol will be displayed and the status title bar colour will flash yellow s gt Send Site Parameters A Send Tank Configuration Pa 2012 POSTEC Data Systems FOCUS User Manual 3 1 1 3 1 2 Different symbols are used to indicate the current status of the action that is being executed these are Request data from the controller is pending Send data to the controller is pending Send request data is in progress Send request data has encountered errors Send request data has been completed successfully Send request data has been cancelled by the user Send reque
204. l The dispenser is under the exclusive control of a PoS client Other clients cannot authorise confirm or hold the dispenser until the client releases control The exclamation mark icon will display as long as a PoS client has exclusive control AVI 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Appendix 194 The dispenser is under control of an AVI device A green car indicates a normal AVI sale in progress A red car indicates an AVI error to view the error click and hold on the car icon ES or x Attendant The sale was authorised by an attendant tag The icon will appear for the duration of the sale Click and hold the attendant icon to view information about the attendant who authorised the sale Timeout A timeout is occurring on the dispenser this could be due to a price change hose swap etc ia PD Error A PD error has occurred on the dispenser P Offline The dispenser is not connect or has stopped communication with the controller i e offline Error An error condition has occurred on the dispenser Y Price Error The dispenser has a price error 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 195 FOCUS User Manual x alternating with Forecourt Finalised The transaction has been finalised on the forecourt and is waiting for the Visual Console to automatically download it Tagged The dispenser has been authorised by an attendant tag pe o Status Text In some circumstances a status label will appear supplyin
205. l and select the custom keyboard from the keyboard type control To edit the custom keyboard assignment click the Edit Keyboard button the Custom Keyboard Editor dialog will be displayed Save Cancel Changes To save any changes that have been made to these settings click Save or click Cancel to cancel all changes These settings are saved in the windows registry 4 9 5 1 Custom Keyboard Editor The custom keyboard editor displays the key layout of the custom keyboard selected The example below show the layout for a KB 60 Custom Keyboard Editor 1 Process 2Process 3Process 4 Process 5 Process 6Process 7 Process 8 Process 9 Process 10 Process Dispenser Dispenser Dispenser Dispenser Dispenser Dispenser Dispenser Dispenser Dispenser Dispenser Key 11 Key 12 Key 13 Key 14 Key 15 Key 16 Key 17 Key 18 Key 19 Key 20 Authorise s Swap to Print i z Emergency Login POS Key 34 Receipt Hold Authorise E Calling Stop ispensers Key 41 Menu T 3 9 Sale Key 49 Key 50 Key 51 Key 52 4 5 6 Memory Key 59 Key 60 Key 61 Key 62 1 2 Si Enter Key 69 Key 70 Key71 Key72 0 o peril Cancel Key79 Key 80 Assigning Functions to Keys Each Visual Console function should be assigned to a key on the custom programmable keyboard To do this click the desired key the Assign Key dialog will be displayed 2012 POSTEC Data Systems FOCUS User Manual 4 9 6 4 10 Select the desired functionality that is to be assigned
206. l number of transaction buffers setup in the system First visible buffer height the height of the first visible transaction buffer Other visible buffer height the height of the other visible transaction buffers not including the first transaction buffer Detailed buffer height the height of the buffers displaying detailed transaction data drop down list Font size the font size for the transaction buffers Be sure not to set the font size too big as large transactions e g 120 52 may not be fully displayed Font style the font style for the transaction buffers Display transaction volume this allows the transaction value and volume to be displayed in a transaction buffer Value Volume First Buffer Other Buffer s Two visible transaction buffers four buffers setup Display detailed buffer When the number of visible transaction buffers is set lower than the number of transaction buffers setup in the system transaction data is displayed in a detailed buffer drop down menu This menu is accessed via the last transaction buffer when List x is displayed instead of transaction data where x is the number of transactions available for that dispenser The detailed transaction buffer can be setup to display automatically i e when the number of transactions on a dispenser exceeds the number of visible transaction buffers or Always in which case the last transaction buffer will always display List x when there is on
207. l to set which dispensers will be controlled by the Visual Console on a specific PC This may also be used in the case of a dispenser that is under the control of a DCA or other such device and is therefore not required to be controlled by the Visual Console Import Export FOCUS Setup The FOCUS setup is determines how the FOCUS suite looks and behaves Most of this setup is stored in the Windows registry and therefore when setting up multiple FOCUS installations this setup needs to be duplicated on each PC The Import Export option allows the setup on one PC to be exported to an external file which can then be imported on another PC simplifying the setup process Exporting FOCUS Setup The export process will export the FOCUS settings related to the following Visual Console general appearance and transaction buffers Visual Console menu Shift control behaviour Price changes behaviour Advanced settings POS setup behaviour Keyboard setup assignment Tank delivery wizard Click Export FOCUS Setup to export the FOCUS Setup to an external registry file Enter the file name and select the folder where the exported file is to be saved When the settings have been successfully exported a dialog will be displayed Importing FOCUS Setup The import process will import an exported FOCUS setup file extension reg Click Import FOCUS Setup to import a FOCUS setup file a confirmation dialog will be displayed Click Yes to continue or
208. le Firebird table transaction data will be written to the Firebird transaction table The DBase or Paradox transaction table options are only included to provide backward compatibility the recommended method is the Firebird table Should these types be selected the following warning will be shown in this case browse for or type in the path of the transaction dbf or transaction db file being used In some cases when the Visual Console is configured to run under Auto Payoff mode it is desirable to have the transactions that have been automatically payed off downloaded to the POS application Should this functionality be required check the Trigger transaction available event on standard auto payoff option the system will then fire the transaction available event when a transaction is processed manually by an attendant or processed automatically by the Visual Console itself The system can also be configured to automatically payoff EFT forecourt finalised transactions if it is desirable to have these transaction sent to the POS via the transaction available event check the Trigger transaction available event on EFT auto payoff option The POS may also wish to receive transactions that are processed as a Dispenser Test from the Visual Console check the Trigger transaction event on Dispenser Test if this is desired POS Offline Options When an integrated POS fails FOCUS can be run standalone to allow trading to continue the Forecourt
209. le function allows the import of a site s configuration from an external file Click Import Configuration File Tools Import Configuration File to start this function Click the Import button select the FOCUS Configuration File to import The import progress is displayed Go Live During the installation and commissioning stage trails of the FOCUS functionality are usually performed this includes start end of days and shift changes real time reports attendant tagging deliveries price changes etc This leaves the site database with irrelevant data and with no valid starting point The Go Live tool deletes all historical data and sets FOCUS and the PCC back to day one with no sales or deliveries recorded This should be performed as the last step when installation and commissioning has been completed and the site is ready to Go Live This should NOT be performed after the site has been operating live as all data is permanently cleared and cannot be retrieved Go Live The controller must be online for the Go Live to complete Select the Go Live option Tools Go Live Because of the destructive nature of going live a confirmation is displayed select Yes to continue or No to cancel retaining all current data If the system detects that the site has already had the Go Live function performed in the past and extra warning is displayed Select Yes if you are REALLY sure you want to Go Live again otherwise select No to cancel retainin
210. lied the records are displayed in red instead of black The current filter if set is displayed in the tool bar Sort 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Transaction Viewer 158 A sort can be applied to these records to display them in a desired order Click Sort View Sort to open the Sort dialog and specify the sort settings The sort can be performed on multiple fields in ascending or descending order The current sort if set is displayed in the tool bar The Transaction Viewer can be refreshed to display new transaction records at any time using Refresh View Refresh this is used to display transaction records written by FOCUS applications since the Transaction Viewer was started or last refreshed Alternatively the Auto Refresh checkbox can be used to automatically refresh every ten seconds Deleting Transactions Transactions can be selected individually or by using Select All Edit Select All The selected transactions can be deleted using Delete Edit Delete a confirmation dialog will be displayed as the transactions will be permanently deleted Click Yes to permanently delete the selected transactions or No to cancel without deleting The deleting of transactions can be restricted to certain users using the user manager in the Setup Utility When a user does not have rights to delete transactions an error message will be displayed Transaction Report The data displayed within Transaction Viewer is a
211. long the controller will persist a P P customer warning before expiry 14 7 Diagnostics 14 7 1 PCC Server The following sections describe diagnostic functionality available in the PCC Server application Communication Port 2012 POSTEC Data Systems FOCUS User Manual Properties Communication Port Socket Connections AR AA AS Com device Directto com e Baud rate lasoo Data bits a Stop bits no y Parity leven v Default Serial Monitor Log to file PCC version Software 6 31 19 06 04 S Africa Hardware 4 3 Serial No 00000761CFSF oren The serial monitor can be opened from this tab by clicking the Serial Monitor button If the serial communications are required to be logged to a file this may be requested by a Postec engineer check the Log to file check box The log to file option should not be left on for long periods of time as it is a debugging option only and does use up system resources The system will automatically turn it off after 30 days should it be inadvertently left on A new log file is started every day at midnight and each time the PCC Server application is restarted The log file name consists of the date time to ensure each file name is unique the log files will be written to FOCUS Installation Directory Logs Serial ddmmyy_hhmmss_ Serial log e g A serial log file started on 2nd April 2003 at 12 18 56 C Program Files Postec FOCUS Logs Serial 02
212. lot of information to be recorded using a minimum amount memory and also provides a structure for applying complex filters in the viewing software The Node number identifies a specific device where multiple devices of the same type are used eg Dispenser number The Description block contains optional miscellaneous data that must be decoded with unique rules determined by the Device and Event codes for that record When the PCC restarts it establishes communications with all the devices it is connected to and as a result of this Online Event records are recorded for each device After this the PCC records event records for activities and events it schedules or observes For convenience the document is structured into Device blocks in alphabetic order Each device block contains a description of the possible events which apply to that specific device 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 14 7 2 1 Alarm PCC Alarm application including e Contact switch input alarms Alarm 1 16 e Date and Time triggered alarms 17 24 e PCC Software Logical Alarms 30 99 eg Device offline Tank low etc For more information refer to PCC Alarm Application document Triggered Alarm condition has triggered the alarm Device Reset Alarm condition has been reset eg e by alarm condition action process completed Dial out e by alarm condition no longer being active contact switch restored to idle state 14 7 2 2 ATG Controller Auto Tank
213. ls fields When a filter is applied the records are displayed in red instead of black The current filter if set is displayed in the tool bar The audit viewer can be refreshed to display new audit records at any time using Refresh View Refresh this is used to display records written by FOCUS applications since the Audit Viewer was started or last refreshed Deleting Exporting Records Records can be selected individually or by using Select All Edit Select All The selected records can be deleted using Delete Edit Delete a confirmation dialog will be displayed as the audit records will be permanently deleted Click Yes to permanently delete the selected records or No to cancel without deleting The deleting of audit records can be restricted to certain users using the user manager in the Setup Utility When a user does not have rights to delete audit records an error message will be displayed Selected records can also be exported to an Excel file This function can be used to send relevant audit data when requested by support personnel without having to send the whole database which may be very large in size Export the selected records using Export Records Tools Export Recoras a file will be created in the FOCUS support folder and if Excel is installed then the file will be automatically opened The file name is created using the date time to ensure each file is unique e g Audit_160503_084834 sIk Note When no
214. lse The Administrator user cannot be deleted Each user has a name password and rights The user rights are designed to restrict access to certain functionality that is considered potentially harmful to the system The following user rights available are Master Reset Allows a user to perform a master reset on the PCC using the Forecourt Configuration application Dispenser Reset Allows a user to perform a reset on a dispenser using the Forecourt Configuration application Delete Audit Event Records Allows a user to delete audit and event records from the database using the Audit Viewer e Set PCC Network Settings Allows a user to set the internal network settings of the PCC using the PCC Connection Wizard 2012 POSTEC Data Systems FOCUS User Manual e Database Restore Allows a user to restore a database using the Database Maintenance application When one of the above operations is selected by a user that does not have sufficient rights an error message will be displayed Create User The Administrator can create a new user by clicking New the User Properties dialog will be displayed Enter the user s name this must be unique within the system password and specify the user rights Confirm the password and click OK to save or Cancel to abort all changes Delete User The Administrator can delete the selected user by clicking Delete A confirmation dialog will be displayed click Yes to delete the user
215. lution Software Requirements DBMS Database Management System Firebird version 2 5 using the BDE Borland Database Engine to access database Note The FOCUS licence covers all required database licenses Note 1 A BDE is required to provide access to the Firebird database The BDE is installed automatically using the standard installation utility PCC Requirements Software The FOCUS system requires PCC software version 6 28 or later Quick Start The FOCUS suite provides a lot of powerful functionality that can seem quite daunting at first glance Remember although the FOCUS system does make it easy to commission then control and manage a forecourt it still requires some thought and experience If you are in doubt about configuring FOCUS refer to the manual and ask your distributor The following steps provide a clear concise outline of what needs to be done to get FOCUS up and running from scratch Refer to the appropriate section for more details on each step to aid in this procedure the help is ordered as per the steps below Step 1 Installing Install FOCUS or upgrade an existing installation Step 2 Suite Setup Run the Setup Utility to configure users for the suite Step 3 Registration Run the Registration Utility and enter the product feature codes supplied Step 4 Setup Controller Connection Run the PCC Connection Wizard to configure the controller connection Run the PCC Server serial connection only an
216. me data may be permanently lost because of this a confirmation dialog is displayed 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 13 7 6 13 7 7 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Local Accounts Click Yes to continue with the restore process or No to abort When Yes is chosen the Database Restore dialog displays the progress of the restore procedure Click OK to close this dialog once the restore is complete Delete Logs The Local Accounts Database Maintenance Utility writes log files whenever it performs database operations These log files are useful in the event of a failure to help Postec support staff deal with any problems However after a while the log files do nothing more than take up hard disk space These log files can be permanently deleted by clicking Delete Logs a confirmation dialog will be displayed Click Yes to continue with the log file deletion process or No to abort The log files are stored in FOCUS Installation Directory Local Accounts Logs Database Command Line Functionallity Some functions can be started by running the Local Accounts Database Maintenance Utility with a command line parameter these are detailed below These command line functions should only be used after consulting with a Postec development engineer Only one command line parameter can be used at any one time Upgrade Using this parameter will perform a silent database upgrade Parameter U Return Code 0 Upgrade succeeded 1 Upgrade
217. meccartetecaatsy 152 5 Export FPoS Prograiii scrisse kinedanan RE i eSa era Ra Anka a Baian Tarai 152 Part X Forecourt Logger 154 AAA A A E tosses cecnvideeecusveccuneveddectesveeceens 154 2 SOCKS MONTON iii A ta 154 Part XI Transaction Viewer 157 1 User Interface 2 ccs 2 5 T dees sesh cekscessceesestiensdeesdchscess hens Aaaa raaa aa an Rea da araa Aa iisa aaaeaii 157 Part XII Database Export Utility 160 1 Export Unconfirmed Transactions cceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeees 160 Part XIII Local Accounts 163 1 SOVERVICW A E E E RE A 163 System Architecture cnica 163 2 QUICK Sat A A A A eee Ad ai 164 3 Local Accounts Installation coonccncconccccncccnccnnonnnonnconncnnncnanenanonnnnnnrnnnrnnnrnnnranrnannnanena 164 Databas 6 COMPIQUI AtlON ii a 164 PRO GIS CS A sastastan eunescaiecteaavendcuasaeantaden tessacsecdatyacsacdid sashabanssnasedeacsuasdsadtaddeecss 164 4 Operatora ARa EAE A ates ADENA RERA 165 5 Local Account Server secs aT aaar a aaa p aaa ahs sees aa aaa E aaa aA a aA seuss a Aiaia i 166 Status Support 6 Forecourt Manager Local ACCOUNTS cccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeneeeeeeaeeeees 167 SA EE a E E A E A E E E E 168 Login General Setting Sniny imes lee A a edo aa eG 169 Account Manageme A sata 171 Accounts CA Ma ollo Si S A TT E 173 7 Database Maintenance c cccscceseeeeeeseeeenceeneennceneceneceneceneceeeceeeeeeeeesesnseenesensenessnese
218. mport and export FPoS programs Database Export Utility used to export data from the FOCUS database into external files Database Location Utility used to specify the location of the master and local databases Database Maintenance used to upgrade purge backup and restore the database Database Select used to switch between the master and local databases when the connection to the master database fails Forecourt Configuration used to configure the controller with all the forecourt parameters Forecourt Logger used to log communications between the FOCUS software and the controller Forecourt Manager used for wetstock management on the forecourt The manager is used to set prices operating modes and tank dips It is also used to view wetstock reports tank inventory and dispenser meters Forman 4 Upgrade used to upgrade Forman 4 to FOCUS Multi site Server used to connect to sites when running the multi site version of FOCUS PCC Connection Wizard used to setup the type of connection that FOCUS will use to communicate with the controller PCC Network Setup Wizard used to setup the internal network settings of the PCC where applicable PCC Server used to communicate with the PCC through the serial interface Registry Upgrade Utility used to upgrade a Forman 4 registry to a FOCUS registry Registration Utility used to register FOCUS and add product feature codes Report Printer used by the FOCUS system to automa
219. mported any new events that are not already stored in the database are added Multi site When multi site FOCUS is being used select the site from the site drop down list control located in the toolbar 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Database Maintenance Utility m FOCUS User Manual 8 8 1 Database Maintenance Utility The Database Maintenance Utility is used to upgrade purge backup and restore the Firebird database used by the FOCUS system The Database Maintenance Utility can be run with command line parameters to allow the scripting of upgrades backups etc Login The Database Maintenance Utility may require a user to login this allows the access to the audit data to be restricted Enter a valid user name and password to login to the Database Maintenance Utility Only the password is case sensitive The user name of the last user to login is displayed The initial default login after installation is User name Administrator Password password The Setup Utility is used to manage users and specify if a login is required for the Database Maintenance Utility When FOCUS system is configured to use a Master database a Local database is also required When these two databases are in different locations upgrades will need to be performed on both The Database Maintenance Utility will display the Database Select dialog on start up should the Local and Master database locations be different Select which database you w
220. ms This database selection process only changes the operating state of the PC it is run on therefore if the entire network is down this process must be run all PC s required to run FOCUS Upgrading Interbase to Firebird In FOCUS release 1 1 0 the open source Interbase database engine version 6 0 2 0 has been replaced with the open source Firebird database engine Firebird is build on the same source as the Interbase database engine but includes some enhancements and bug fixes that improve its performance and operation Should FOCUS and hence Interbase already be installed on a PC please follow these steps to upgrade to Firebird Using the FOCUS Database Maintenance Utility backup your current FOCUS database Add Remove Programs in the Windows Control Panel remove Interbase Delete the Interbase installation folder if it still exists Reboot your PC Install Firebird refer Installing FOCUS section i Modify the Firebird configuration file Firebird conf to suite your requirements refer irebird Configuration section TONADA Please contact the Postec FOCUS development engineer for more details Firebird Configuration FOCUS uses Firebird which is an open source version of Firebird and hence does not require the purchase of database client server licences Firebird can be configured using the Firebird Configuration file Firebird conf this is located in the firebird installation folder Please note you will have to restart th
221. ms i i FOCUS User Manual 1 5 This process can also be used to run the Registration Utility silently allowing automated registration Place the FOCUS registration file FOCUS Registration frg into the FOCUS directory and run the Registration Utility with the command line parameter S The application will return O on successful registration or 1 on failure view the audit log for details when an error occurs Contact POSTEC for more information on formatting a FOCUS registration file Support The FOCUS suite is commonly sold through a distributor therefore if you are an end user of a system support should be directed to your specific distributor If you are a distributor of the FOCUS system you can contact Postec for support during normal business hours Providing Information Whether you are an end user contacting your distributor or a distributor contacting a Postec support engineer it is important to provide as much information about the problem being experienced as possible The more information you can provide the greater the chance that the problem will be resolved quickly and effectively A good start is to be able to answer the following questions e What is the problem e When did the problem start e What has been changed recently e How often does the problem occur e Who is experiencing the problem e How does the problem effect the business If you are a distributor contacting Postec for support the following inf
222. n appropriate message 48 Site Setup The Forecourt Manager is used to manage the forecourt and setup the operating behaviour of the Visual Console and itself on each PC There are numerous configuration options available these include e Application Settings console appearance menu items shift control setup price change setup point of sale options and key assignment e Forecourt receipt the details that will be printed on a receipt that is printed from a 4DET on the forecourt TVD banner the idle banner that will be displayed on any TVDs mounted on the site Transaction expire timeout the time period after which a transaction will be highlighted by the system as expired used for drive off alerts Site details name address and contact details for the site these are displayed on wetstock reports Methods of payment the methods of payments used in the FOCUS attendant tagging forecourt finalisation system or FLIP 4 8 1 Forecourt Receipt Some forecourt configurations may require a Postec 4REC receipt printer to be present on the forecourt In this case the header footer of the receipt printed on the receipt printer should be configured Currently a maximum of six header lines and four footer lines are available 2012 POSTEC Data Systems a FOCUS User Manual Editing the Forecourt Receipt The forecourt receipt is configured from the Dispensers OPT Forecourt Receipt page The grid on the left han
223. n may be requested from the controller by clicking Request Operations Request The requested data will be stored in the database and will replace any previous changes made The request can be performed safely at anytime as the units configuration is stored in non volatile configuration memory within the PCC EEPROM and is NOT lost on a flat battery or during the master reset process Forman 3 Attendants The Forman 3 Attendants configuration node allows the configuration of attendants stored in the PCC used with Forman 3 attendant tagging Forman 3 attendant tagging needs to be enabled from the General Properties node before this node can be accessed Editing Attendants To manually modify a specific Forman 3 attendant select the appropriate attendant and click Open File Open The Attendant Properties dialog will be displayed allowing the editing of the chosen 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Forecourt Configuration ds attendant Attendant 1 Properties Site 10 Attendant Name Grant Tag number 000000000001 l Authorized The attendant must be assigned a name and tag number the tag number must be unique within the Forman 3 attendants The attendant is authorized to use the tag by checking the authorized control Click OK to save or Cancel to abort all changes Adding Attendants A site can have up to thirty attendants add a new attendant by clicking New File New Enter the rele
224. n response EPS Authorisation Cancel sec 30 Wait for EPS authorize cancel response EPS Finalisation sec Verifone Selection sec Z acid established Tagging mode C Tagging mode cc E Dispenser Offline sec Wait for dispenser comms to be re established before taking further action EPS Auth Nozzle up sec 60 Forecourt sale preauthorized timeout Zero Flow Timeout sec No flow while dispenser in use for use with dispensers without hose micro switches PEC protocol PCC Fallback Timeout sec No POS comms fallback to Standalone mode if enabled 0 to disable OPT Entry Timeout sec Baz Customer Authorization Terminal data Wait for EPS Finalization confirmation 10 3 10 30 30 30 30 5 30 120 30 entry timeout Transaction Expire Timeout min Time period in minutes before a transaction expires used to highlight a transaction as a potential drive off or for auto Transaction Expire Timeout sec Time period in seconds before a transaction expires used to highlight a transaction as a potential drive off or for auto payoff 0 to disable AVI Connection Lost Time sec AS Vehicle Identification connection lost dela RET Data Update Timeout sec 20 RET update response wait time Bridge Daily Maintenance hour Hour of day for controller to perform system maintenance on the Ethernet Bridge Attendant Tag Timer sec 60 Attendant tagging wait time dl A ie maintenance on the OPT re ere er ee
225. ncel Enter the dispenser number where the test transaction was made Then click Enter the transaction from the specified dispenser is processed as a dispenser test If there is more than one transaction for the dispenser an additional dialog will appear allowing selection of the correct transaction Select the transaction you wish to process as a dispenser test Attendant Bag Payment When attendant tagging is being used attendants accumulate money they have taken on the forecourt in their bag In some situations bag limits are placed on attendants to prevent attendants from accumulating excessive amounts of money that can lead to theft The Visual Console keeps a theoretical bag value for each attendant by accumulating the value of the transactions each attendant authorises The Visual Console prevents an attendant from authorising dispensers when their theoretical bag value is greater than the assigned bag limit The Attendant Bag Payoff dialog allows an attendant to pay money from their bag back to the cashier in the shop and hence the Visual Console will subtract this from their theoretical bag value allowing the attendant to continue working Bag limits are setup in the Forecourt Manager under the attendant details page Select the Attendant Bag item in the console menu to open the Attendant Bag Payoff dialog 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Visual Console 124 Attendant Bag Payoff 7 8 9 Current Bag Total
226. nctions The default keypad assignment is displayed below ES ia SS All key assignments are configurable from the Forecourt Manager refer to the key assignment section for details each keys function Transactions One of the key functions of the Visual Console is to provide control of the fuel transactions When integrated with a POS application these fuel transactions can be transferred to the point of sale and tendered with dry stock to provide a complete petrol convenience store solution The Visual Console s fuel transaction functionality includes e Up to ten transactions per dispenser this is configurable e Pre paid transactions to prevent drive offs e Transaction expiry highlights fuel transactions that have not been processed potential drive off POS integration includes the ability to download a fuel transaction s from the Visual Console to the POS which can then confirm or return the transaction s 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Visual Console 108 PUFTEG FOCUS Visual Console GUE M MPD MPD MPD MPD MPD Unleaded Unleaded Diesel MPD Unleaded MPD MPD MPD MPD Unleaded Diesel A Oh A Ss vi Generic Point of Sale Simulatio Item Description Oty Unit Price Total 100008002 Fuel Transaction Dispenser 7 Hose 1 Unleaded 58 34 1 12 65 52 149020283 Fresh and Tasty Light Chips Chicken 1 00 2 65 2 65 Void 103822774 Universal Cola 90 Extra Caffei
227. ne 1 00 1 00 1 00 229387476 Daily Herald Weekend Edition 1 00 0 90 0 90 Cancel Refund Correct Favourites T 8 9 Cheque Mints Phone Chips Soft Drink Tend 80 00 engen 4 5 6 EFTPOS Bread Water Paper Choc Total 70 07 Change 9 93 1 2 3 Credit Card EXIT Clr 0 00 Cash 5 2 1 Transaction Processing Fuel transactions are processed via the Visual Console using either a keyboard or touch interface The transaction details will be written to the database When the Visual Console is integrated with a POS application the transaction will optionally be transferred to the POS via the transaction database file and or the Visual Console s COM Interface Optional Dispenser Number Transaction Buffers Grade Colour Dispenser Status The FOCUS system allows up to 10 transactions per dispenser this is configurable via the transaction stack depth parameter Note some countries have regulations limiting the number of transactions per dispenser Legacy Transaction Processing When the legacy transaction processing is being used the system supports two transactions per dispenser To process a transaction from the first buffer enter the dispenser number into the entry box and press Sale key or click the transaction buffer button containing the transaction To cash a transaction from the second buffer enter the dispenser number and press the Memory key or click the transaction buffer button containing the transaction
228. ne of the following methods e An RS 232 serial cable requires the PCC Server application Up to 8 PCs running the PCC Server may be multi dropped onto a PCC using a multi drop serial cable e ALAN connection v a a standard network cable The PCC needs to be fitted with an Ethernet Bridge for this configuration Serial Connection Serial LAN Connection The PC running FOCUS can be connected directly to the PCC va a serial interface cable the FOCUS applications will then communicate directly to the PCC using the PCC Server The FOCUS applications can also utilise a TCP IP network to communicate with a PCC Server application running on another PC on the network The diagram below demonstrates the combination of these connection methods The PC running the PCC Server application call it PC1 for example is connected to the PCC viaa RS 232 serial cable Using the PCC Connection Wizard a local serial connection is configured on this PC The FOCUS applications will communicate directly with the PCC via the PCC Server application running on PC1 When FOCUS is to be run on another PC call it PC2 for example over an interconnecting LAN then PC2 must have the TCP IP protocol installed and PC1 must be given a fixed IP address Using the PCC Connection Wizard a remote serial connection is configured the FOCUS applications can then communicate with the PCC Server application running on PC1 through the LAN and hence with the PCC Async Serial
229. neseasauseusaesaeueusnueneeneas Operation aeaee aea aaaea aeaaea oraaa ar Eene NEEE AAEE Neea ro PENE rearea Enna CE Eaa Ede Eeteen start Of Day Set p Wizard rirnori A a cates Shift Change Setup Wizard ida End of Day SEU nas Price Change Setup Wizard ti Advanced OPTIONS ou cee ceecteeesetessessesseseeveevseeseeseeseennenaesaessesaeesesseeseesaesaesaesaesaesauvaesaneseseneseasauseusaesaeusevsnusneaneas AAA O E A O 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Contents m POCOS iii A a AA At 94 AE AAA A EEEE 95 Custom Keyboard Edits ives cc cece sacar ii apee e eei aaa diaaa aiaia 96 PULSE ains 97 10 System Informa thon coi seceeevectectes eden snecttbecessteneexcttctedeudeenteccetabeccsas 97 11 Command Line Functionality ooooncccccnnnncccnonnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nen nn nnrr rre r rre 98 Part V Visual Console 100 Te User Interface ici dae 100 A E E E E EAEE 102 Menu Dispenser Status Cells 00 cccssssesseesessesessessessessessevsevseeseeseeseeseesausaesaesaeeseeseeseesaesaesausaeuaevanvaneaneanenneneas A A E AAA o Un rl AAA PPP O Transaction Processing cescsesseeseseeesetesseeseeseeeseeeseeree Prepay Mode Transactions Autohold Prepay Mode Transactions cucncnncninninninnicianincan rra rra rara na 112 Transaction EXPY mnncncnninnniiiiiciinrrrrrrr A O Change Operating Schedule Tank Delivered decias AAA o EE E E Scheduled Price Changes Shift Control esscseseeeeeees Start OF Days rs tas Sh
230. ng regular tank dips i e manually dipping the physical tank and entering the actual level The Visual Console provides the Tank Dips Wizard to enter the tank dip details Select the Tank Dips item in the console menu to open the Tank Dips Wizard Welcome The Welcome page is displayed navigate through the wizard using the Back and Next buttons click Cancel to close the wizard at any time and abort the tank dip entry procedure Dip Entry Enter the dips for the tanks note dips for master and slave tanks must all be entered at the same time Click Next to send the dips Tank Dip Wizard AE Cancel Ha Finish The text will display ifthe dips were successfully sent Click Finish to exit Scheduled Price Changes The Visual Console allows scheduled price changes to be performed These price changes can be scheduled to occur after hours without the site manager who has the authority to do the change having to be there Price change data can be reported on at a future date using the Historical Price Changes report Please note only one scheduled price change can be made per grade For example if a scheduled price change is setup at 8am for grade Super to change price at 10am and before 10am another scheduled price change is setup for grade Super only the second price change will occur as it has overwritten the first The Visual Console provides the Scheduled Price Change Wizard to enter the price
231. nic totals or not If checked then the FOCUS reports will use the dispenser electronic totals otherwise they will use the PCC accumulated totals This should also be unchecked if the dispensers are turned off and hence the totals are unavailable at the time the FOCUS end of day procedure is run The Central Pricing is used to restrict the PCC from changing the unit price for dispensers that are not approved for central pricing e g Australian Gilbarco Calcopac head Most dispensers will be unaffected by this option During the commissioning stage it may be necessary to setup the dispenser operating modes the dispenser modes group provides the controls to do this Once a site is commissioned the Forecourt Manager is used to manage the dispenser modes Enable Disable the PoS control of the dispenser using the PoS Control group box This determines where the PoS has the ability to authorize hold temp stop the dispenser during a normal transaction Enable Disable the FPoS OPT control of the dispenser using the FPoS Control group box This determines where the PoS has the ability to authorize hold temp stop the dispenser during a FPoS OPT transaction During a FPoS OPT transaction the option for the PoS to authorize the transaction as well as the host is controlled by the PoS Auth for FPoS OPT sale group box When this option is set to required a FPoS OPT transaction will not proceed until authorisation has been given by the PoS Clic
232. nk deliveries are measured automatically In this case the tank delivery wizard can be used to provide more information about the delivery In this case the delivery is NOT added twice rather it supplements the automatically recorded information Tank deliveries entered via the Visual Console can be reported on at a future date using the Historical Tank Deliveries report The Visual Console provides the Tank Delivery Wizard to enter the tank delivery details Select the Deliveries item in the console menu to open the Tank Delivery Wizard Wizard Steps The Welcome page is displayed navigate through the wizard using the Back and Next buttons click Cancel to close the wizard at any time and abort the tank delivery entry procedure 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Visual Console 114 Tank Delivery Wizard Enter Tank 1 Super ET e Cancel Tank Selection The tank the delivery has been made to from the list of available tanks Volume The volume of the delivery The maximum delivery volume is 167772L Docket Information the docket information relating to the delivery The docket information can be no longer than 32 characters Delivery Date the date when the delivery was made to the selected tank Delivery Time the time when the delivery was made to the selected tank The time is in 24 hour format e g 5pm is 17 00 Select Supplier the fuel supplier The fuel suppliers are configurable via the Forec
233. nk density data for each tank setup in the system The following fields are displayed for each line of this report e Tank number 2012 POSTEC Data Systems e Grade assigned to the tank e Reference fuel density this figure is configured in the Forecourt Configuration application e Start of day fuel density e Ambient fuel density e Compensated fuel density e Vairance Reference Compensated e Temperature This report is only relevant if the system has density probes configured and can only be viewed when there is a LAN WAN connection to the PCC This data cannot be viewed if there is a serial connection to the PCC this includes connections made by dialing directly to the PCC modem Sample 14 8 2 Shift Daily Monthly 14 8 2 1 Hose Sales Totals This report displays the volume and value sales totals for each hose in the system for the chosen shift day or month This report groups dispensers by grade The following fields are displayed for each line of this report Grade name Dispenser number Hose number The hose sales volume at the start of the shift day month The hose sales volume at the end of the shift day month The total hose sales volume for the shift day month i e end start this calculation also takes into account the wrapping of volumes The hose sales value at the start of the shift day month e The hose sales value at the end of the shift day month The total hose sales value for the shift day mon
234. nk into one entry for the selected period Historical Tank Wetstock Summary A Historical Tank Wetstock Summary report is effectively a tank reconciliation report displayed in a different format layout for a month period Select the Wetstock Summary report and click Create Report The Monthly Wetstock Summary dialog will be displayed allowing the selection of the month to report on Select the month and year to report on and click OK Historical Price Changes A Historical Price Changes report displays scheduled price change data Select the Historical Price Changes report and click Create Report The Historical Price Changes Report dialog will be displayed allowing the selection of the reporting period and price change type The reporting period can be selected by specifying the last x Day s Week s or Month s or by checking the Custom checkbox and selecting a From and To date When selecting the Last x Week s or Month s the start of the reporting period will be back to the start of last whole Week or Month E g Last 2 weeks on the 29 05 02 will result in a reporting period of 13 05 02 to 29 05 02 The reporting period will be displayed in the From To controls even if the custom period is not being used The Price Change Type can be selected so the report will display only entries where the price has been increased decreased or both Click Default to restore the default reporting period of the last 30 da
235. nly when the site node is selected The editing process involves accessing the desired configuration entity via the relevant configuration node a Summary of the current configuration for the site is then displayed in the configuration details area The controls are then used to add delete and modify this data The Cancel button will be enabled once any changes have been made the changes can then be either saved to the database and or sent to the PCC by clicking Save Send or the changes can be cancelled by clicking Cancel The Save Send button changes its image depending on the connection state when the application is online the image is Save Send as the data will be saved to the database and sent to the controller However when the application is offline the data can only be saved to the database therefore the image is Save When the advanced user option is enabled data may be requested from the controller and stored in the database Once the data has been requested and stored this operation cannot be reversed therefore care should be taken when requesting data from the controller Click Request to request specific configuration data from the controller When data is sent to or requested from the controller the status panel displays the sent request progress lt gt Sending data to the PCC In Progress Send Site Parameters A Wy Send Tank Configuration The send request process can be stopped at any time by clic
236. nner update interval is defined The Receipt Date Range specifies the time in days hours minutes the controller will allow receipts to be printed for on the OPT e g set to 1 hour 30 minutes means that receipts for sales that were made more than an hour and 30 minutes ago cannot be reprinted Misc Control The PCC has an internal Extended Transaction File ETF for logging transactions This is mainly used on unmanned sites to bring transaction stack to a central management system like Foresight However the ETF can be used to recover transactions from the PCC on a PoS controlled site should the PoS go offline from the PCC The PCCs internal ETF is a circular file which holds the last 450 transactions This can be expanded up to around 5000 transactions using the Postec Data Logger The Log Transaction Control groupbox allows the configuration of the following parameters 1 Logging of transactions to ETF e Log all transactions in ETF e Log FPoS EFT sales only in ETF e Log all transaction in ETF If PCC enters Fallback mode no PoS clients online only log FPoS EFT sales in ETF 2 Stop the forecourt when ETF is ready to wrap e Never stop the Forecourt even if the ETF is ready to wrap e Stop the Forecourt if the PCC is in Standalone mode no PoS clients and the ETF is ready to wrap to prevent the system making transactions which the PoS cannot recover The Emergency Stop Configuration group box allows the configuration of the following parame
237. nser The following images display the sequence of events for a dispenser where three transactions are made the left image displays what would be shown when the Display Detailed Buffer option is set to Automatic and the right hand image displays what would be shown when this option is set to Always First transaction Unleaded Unleaded Second transaction Third transaction 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Visual Console KO Accessing the detailed transaction list 5 2 2 Prepay Mode Transactions Dispensers can operate in Prepay mode this means the dispenser is authorised to dispense a fixed amount of fuel after the customer has paid for it This is particularly useful in avoiding drive off s while operating the forecourt late at night Note The transaction stack depth must be set to greater than 1 for prepay to operate correctly Dispensers operating in Prepay mode will be displayed as a blue dispenser icon in the idle state Initiate a Prepay transaction by entering the dispenser number and pressing the Ready key or click on a dispenser that is in Prepay mode the Prepay dialog will be displayed 2012 POSTEC Data Systems i i i FOCUS User Manual Prepay Dispenser 6 zelel Clr a ajele Enter nar Cancel Enter the preset value using the keyboard provided and click Enter The decimal point may be disabled if the dispensers on the forecourt do not support fractional values this is confi
238. nstead of black The current filter if set is displayed in the tool bar The audit viewer can be refreshed to display new event records at any time using Refresh View Refresh Deleting Exporting Records Records can be selected individually or by using Select All Edit Select All The selected records can be deleted using Delete Edit Delete a confirmation dialog will be displayed as the event records will be permanently deleted Click Yes to permanently delete the selected records or No to cancel without deleting The deleting of event records can be restricted to certain users using the user manager in the Setup Utility When a user does not have rights to delete event records an error message will be displayed Selected records can also be exported to an Excel file This function can be used to send relevant event data when requested by support personnel without having to send the whole database which may be very large in size Export the selected records using Export Records Tools Export 2012 POSTEC Data Systems sat FOCUS User Manual Records a file will be created in the FOCUS support folder and if Excel is installed then the file will be automatically opened The file name is created using the date time to ensure each file is unique e g Event_160503_084834 sIk Note When no records are selected the system will automatically select all of them for the delete or export process Find A
239. nt statement will now show the payment for this statement 13 5 Local Account Server The Local Account Server LAS is a service that connects to the controller or PoS via LAN and provides the authorisation finalisation receipt interface to the Local Accounts database If you are running Windows XP then when the service is running an icon is displayed in the task tray right clicking on this icon allows the selection of the Status dialog 2012 POSTEC Data Systems FOCUS User Manual 13 5 1 13 5 2 13 6 BS QY 11 00 a m EN be BS Wednesday If you are running Windows Vista or newer you can check that the service is running by opening the Windows services manager Control Panel System Administrative Tools Services Find Postec Local Account Server in the list and check its Status Status The LAS Status dialog provides the following information e Database connection status e Controller connection status e Transaction count uy Local Account Server Database Online Clear Log Y Display 9 08 2006 11 03 13 Authorise Request Dispenser 7 Reply Code 9 Limit Exceeded Allocation 34 820 9 08 2006 11 03 13 Authorise Request Dispenser 8 Reply Code 0 Allocation 4416 760 9 08 2006 11 03 13 Authorise Request Dispenser 9 Reply Code 9 Limit Exceeded Allocation 34 820 08 2006 11 03 14 Authorise Request Dispenser 1 Hose Hose Hose Hose Transaction Count Approved 0000
240. o a site folder or vice versa Select the site you wish to move and drag it to either the site folder node when you want it to reside or the Sites root node ay Sites 7 AUCKLAND O CHRISTCHURCH fq Site 11 Grant s Gas Garage Site 287 Albany Motorcourt Site 301 Aaron s Airfield CO WELL TON 11 Grant s Gas Garage A Site 1 Westgate Motors Site 1234 Joe s Junk Cars Site 6543 Newton Road Gas General Properties Dial Properties i El Grades sha Tanks 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 6 2 Once you release the mouse button the site node will be moved to the appropriate position in the root or selected site folder g9 Sites 7 A 5 AUCKLAND CHRISTCHURCH Site 287 Albany Motorcourt Site 301 Aaron s Airfield Ey WELLINGTON AS Site 1232 Westgate Motors Site 1234 Joe s Junk Cars Site 6543 Newton Road Gas General Properties Dial Properties E Grades gt Tanks Connect Disconnect The power of the multi site version is in the connect disconnect functionality All sites can be edited while offline disconnected and a connection can be made at a later stage to send the configuration and complete the commissioning process Connection States The three main FOCUS applications Visual Console Forecourt Manager and Forecourt Configuration can be run in the following four connection states Disconnected Working Offline The s
241. o aid the use of this functionality by the attendant on site a set of quick reference guides have been developed These can be printed out and left behind the counter to assist your staff in using the Visual Console correctly when it has just been installed or a new staff member has been employed Using these guides ensures you get the most out of the FOCUS system quickly and efficiently Available Quick Reference Guides e Quick Reference 01 Shift Control e Quick Reference 02 Tank Management e Quick Reference 03 Grade Price Changes e Quick Reference 04 Operating Schedule 14 5 Visual Console Status Icons Ready Dispenser is authorised and ready for use 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 191 FOCUS User Manual Hold Dispenser is locked awaiting authorisation on hold Alert Dispenser is not authorised and the customer has lifted the nozzle 9 i alternating with Hold OPT Only FPoS sale Dispenser is idle not authorized like Hold status but is configured for OPT auth only Alert OPT Only FPoS sale Nozzle is lifted but not authorized like Alert status but is configured for OPT auth only alternating with EFT Authorised Idle FPoS sale FPoS sale has been authorised by EPS host and is waiting for final authorization by PoS cashier EFT Authorised Calling FPoS sale FPoS sale has been authorised by EPS host and is waiting for final authorization by PoS cashier Nozzle is lifted calling
242. o entire schedule The mode for all dispensers in that schedule will change to the selected mode Click Save Send to save the data to the database and send it to the controller or Cancel to cancel any changes 2012 POSTEC Data Systems FOCUS User Manual 4 2 3 4 2 4 4 3 The dispenser modes may be configured while the controller is offline in this case the data will be saved to the database but not sent to the controller This allows the user to send the data to the controller using the Forecourt Configuration applications Send Configuration function at a later date Note When running under xFuel Retail Postpay and Automemory modes behave the same Grade Pricing Each grade in the system must have a price assigned and a grade may have a different price for each of the four operating schedules The Forecourt Manager provides an interface to setup grade prices however this is normally only used during commissioning or after the dispenser hose configuration has been changed Subsequent price setting is typically done from the Visual Console using the Scheduled Price Change functionality Editing Grade Prices The grade prices for each of the four operating schedules are configured from the Dispensers Grade Prices page On entering this page the current grade prices are requested and displayed Edit the grade unit prices ensuring the decimal point is in the correct position Typically the price for a grade is the same in all
243. ocal Accounts database cars E Database location ThisPC Another PC PC p sonoPc Folder C Program Files x86 Postec LAMS LAMS FDB fe x When Another PC is selected the PC s name must be specified if This PC is selected the PC name is not necessary Once the PC name has been specified the folder file name of the database must be defined When the database resides on the local PC the Browse button can be used to search for the database file however this facility is disabled when using a master database on another PC because the folder will probably not be visible Click OK to save the settings or Cancel to abort Click Test to perform a test connection to the database specified if the database can be connected to then a success dialog will be displayed When the test connection fails this may take a couple of minutes to timeout an error dialog will be displayed 2012 POSTEC Data Systems FOCUS User Manual 14 14 1 Appendix Installing FOCUS A new installation of FOCUS requires the installation of two components to be performed e the FOCUS suite itself these are the FOCUS program files help images etc e the Firebird Database Server 2 1 the database engine used by the FOCUS suite When upgrading from a previous version of FOCUS that has been installed or the FOCUS suite but not the Firebird Database Server has been completely un installed the FOCUS suite can simply be upgrade
244. ocal accounts database this includes site number name address grade titles and units Therefore to ensure the local accounts functionality operates correctly ensure the controller is fully configured via the FOCUS Forecourt Configuration application Refer to the Database Setup for more details Applications Local Accounts uses the following applications e Local Accounts Database Location Utility used to specify the location of the local accounts database Local Accounts Database Maintenance used to upgrade purge backup and restore the local accounts database Local Account Server service that communicates with the controller or PoS and processes authorisation finalisation receipt requests Forecourt Manager the Local Accounts page is used to manage account card holders statements payment and suite setup 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 13 2 13 3 13 3 1 13 3 2 Local Accounts Quick Start The following steps provide a clear concise outline of what needs to be done to get LAMS up and running from scratch Refer to the appropriate section for more details on each step to aid in this procedure the help is ordered as per the steps below Note This assumes TVD and controller hardware has been installed and commissioned correctly from Forecourt Configuration Step 1 Install Install FOCUS but choose a custom install Choose to install the Local Accounts component Step 2 Setup Local Account Server LAS ser
245. ode number records the TVD node address TVD numbers less than or equal to the number of dispensers configured for use on a site are dispenser mounted for exclusive use by that dispenser side or filling position The can be used for e Attendant tagging for dispenser authorization e Customer tagging for card tag read and customer profile data e Displaying Automatic Vehicle Identification status display Supernisor tagging to release a dispenser from a exception error lock down 14 7 2 21 Tank Probe Node contains the tank number Event Delivery Detected Start of delivery detected Data measured Delivery measured Description contains the amount delivered and the new tank volume Delivery Aborted Delivery no longer detected Amount measured less than minimum Too small threshold Triggered Description contains the active alarm type and hex code word eg High Product Low product High water Suspect leak sudden loss Device Reset Alarm condition reset Description contains the active alarm type and hex code word Calibration On Tank calibration process activated manually by host or automatically by PCC Calibration Off Tank calibration process deactivated manually by host or automatically by PCC 2012 POSTEC Data Systems FOCUS User Manual Tanks dip manually entered by console Data Added Tank delivery added by console Data Subtracted Tank level adjustment made by console Device Error Probe error detected Description
246. ode number specified This setting is irrelevant when using the Ethernet bridge interface The Business Logic field is used to set a specific client s business logic this is set on a per client configuration basis and the value as such will be advised by a Postec development engineer The Start of Day property defines at what time on a daily basis the PCC will perform its internal End Start of day This process sums dispenser totals tank information snapshot and statistics The Hourly Log Options group of properties define whether the three data entities maintained by the PCC will be summed on an hourly basis Otherwise this is done on a daily basis at the sites configured start of day time The Display Running Sales property specifies whether the Visual Console will display the sale progress data for a transaction that is in progress When the Forecourt finalized transaction to POS is selected transactions finalised on the forecourt via OPT equipment and the like will be available for processing from the Visual Console PoS application The TVD banner property specifies the banner every TVD on the forecourt will display while in it s idle state this can also be configured from the Forecourt Manager application The transaction stack depth defines how many transactions the PCC will allow to be stacked in an XFuel setup this can be set up to a maximum of ten When Xfuel is not setup this parameter is ignored and the PCC defaults to stacking two Wh
247. of 24 11 08 7am Consolidated Sample Wetstock Summary This report displays the wetstock summary for a month and is very similar in format to the tank reconciliation report This report groups the information by tank and is relevant for both ATG and logical tank gauging The following fields are displayed for each line of this report e Day day of the month See Note below e Opening Stock volume at the beginning of the day e Receipts tank receipts made into the tank during the day For ATG tanks this is measured 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 214 215 FOCUS User Manual 14 9 receipts and for logical tanks this is from entered receipts using the FOCUS Tank Delivery Wizard This figure excludes dispenser tests Total Stock the Opening Stock Receipts Sales By Meter sales made through the dispensers for the day Pump Test total dispenser test volumes for the day Net Sales By Meter Sales By Meter Pump Test Cumm Sales cumulative net sales figures Sales By Dip Total Stock Closing Dip Variation daily Sales By Dip Net Sales By Meter and cumulative Invoice No docket information for receipts made into the tank during the day The relevant grand totals for the month are displayed at the bottom of each tank group The reporting period is displayed in the top right hand corner of the report Day When a site is running 24 hours the Day is the date of the FOCUS start of day Example
248. oftware versions dated 11 11 05 and later Pay at Pump support is configurable with the default being disabled To enable Pay at Pump support you must set the AVI box number to 1 To disable it again simply set the AVI box number back to 0 The dispenser hose and box number assignment must be unique for each channel used Click OK to save or Cancel to abort all changes Adding AVI Channels A site can have up to thirty two grades add a new AVI channel by clicking New File New Enter the relevant details into the AVI Channel Properties dialog and click OK to save or Cancel to abort all changes Deleting AVI Channels Only the last AVI channel can be deleted to do this select the last AVI channel and click Delete File Delete When the confirm delete option is on a confirmation dialog will be shown click Yes to delete the AVI channel or No to cancel Note Older PCC software fixes the number of AVI channels to sixteen Save Send Once the AVI configuration is complete click Save Send Operations Save Send to save the data to the database and send it to the PCC or Cancel Operations Cancel to cancel all changes The AVIs may be configured while the PCC is offline in this case the data will be saved to the database but not sent to the PCC This allows the user to send the data to the PCC using the Send Configuration function at a later date Request When the PCC is online and the advanced user opt
249. ogram Files Postec FOCUS Logs Socket 020403_ 121855 Socket log The socket monitor displays the socket messages being sent to from the PCCClient32 dll and PCC Server Since the protocol is propriety to the system the messages are usually deciphered by a Postec engineer The monitoring can be started stopped using the Start Stop buttons The message window can be cleared using the clear button Forecourt status messages may be filtered out using the filter button Connections 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 199 FOCUS User Manual 14 7 2 Properties Communication Port Socket Connections 1 eseseesesescececeseseecececcecesesoececesosorcecesoeoceeseeoeceeesseoeeeeceoe oeococseserocceseceroesesoeecoeseceeoesesoseesesoscecesesoreesssosoceesesesse PCC version Software 6 31 19 06 04 S Africa Hardware 4 3 Serial No 00000761CF8F cea A list of client applications that are currently connected to the PCC Server is displayed on the Connections tab The grid displays the node number application version DLL version and socket number Analysing Site Events The purpose of this section is to provide assistance in interpreting the Site Events report The Event file consists of a structured record containing the following fields e Date e Time e Device Code e Node number e Event Code e Description block The Device and Event codes are predefined values that decode into specific descriptors This enables a
250. ogram is to be given to another FOCUS user it needs to be exported to an external file so it can be imported by the other user Open the Export FPoS Program Wizard by clicking Export FPoS Program Tools Export FPoS Program Navigate through the wizard using the Next and Back buttons answer the questions to export the desired FPoS program Select FPoS Program Select the FPoS program that is to be exported FPoS programs are global to all sites therefore all the FPoS programs available in the system are displayed External File Name Specify the name of the external file the selected FPoS program will be exported to The external file that will be created will be a paradox 7 0 file therefore the extension will be DB External File Folder Specify the folder the external file will be saved to use the Browse button to browse for a particular folder Summary A summary of the export details is displayed The FPoS program code will be exported to one external file and the FPoS program details will be exported to another the system takes care of this automatically Once the summary has been checked click Next to start the export process Export Progress The export progress is displayed should an error occur the error text will be displayed in red Once the export is complete click Finish to close the Export FPoS Program Wizard 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Forecourt Logger 10 10 1 10 2 Forecourt Logger Fore
251. oloured in teal When the FPoS program needs to be cleared from the PCC set the BLANK Empty FPoS Program as the active FPoS program Editing FPoS Programs Any FPoS Program can be manually edited select a specific FPoS program select and click Open File Open The FPoS Program Editor application will run allowing the editing of the selected FPoS program Refer to the FPoS Program Editor section for more details The BLANK FPoS program cannot be modified Adding FPoS Programs Add a new FPoS program by clicking New File New The FPoS Program Editor application will run allowing the editing of the newly created FPoS program Deleting FPoS Programs Any FPoS program can be deleted to do this select the FPoS program and click Delete File Delete When the confirm delete option is on a confirmation dialog will be shown click Yes to delete the FPoS program or No to cancel The BLANK FPoS program cannot be deleted Save Send Once the selection of the active FPoS program is complete click Save Send Operations Save Send to save the data to the database and send it to the PCC or Cancel Operations Cancel to cancel all changes The active FPoS program compiled code is sent to the PCC therefore the FPoS program must be complied before it can be sent to the PCC Refer to the FPoS Program Editor section for more details The active FPoS program may be configured while the PCC is offline in this case the data will be
252. on Parameter C2 Return Code 0 Send configuration succeeded 1 Send configuration failed view the audit log for more details Send everything except UPI s Units and Aux Devices Parameter C3 Return Code 0 Send configuration succeeded 1 Send configuration failed view the audit log for more details 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Forecourt Manager 4 1 Forecourt Manager Forecourt Manager Forecourt Manager provides functionality to manage the forecourt on a day to day basis This is mostly configuration for FOCUS behaviour but includes some controller configuration This application is used in conjunction with the Visual Console to provide complete on site forecourt control Management functionality provided by the Forecourt Manager includes General management operating schedule dispenser modes grade pricing and dispenser allocation limits Totals management shift hose grade totals accumulated hose grade totals dispenser electronic totals and reset shift totals Tank management tank inventory deliveries density and tank dips Attendant management attendants profiles and dispenser assignment Reports real time shift day and historical Utilities System date time reset dispenser unlock return transactions and POS offline functions Site Setup Site name address TVD banner transaction expiry time methods of payment and forecourt receipt setup FOCUS Setup Appearance console menu shift
253. on is available to force entry for all tanks that have been setup for logical tank gauging Stop Dispensers Dialog It is usually desirable to place the sites dispensers stopped place on hold on before the shift change procedure this prevents sales from being made outside the current shift Select Yes to show the stop dispensers dialog to appear as part of the shift change procedure Restart Dispensers 2012 POSTEC Data Systems ss FOCUS User Manual 4 9 2 3 If the dispensers have been stopped i e placed on hold at the start of the shift change procedure then they would probably need to be restarted i e authorised on completion of the shift change procedure Select Yes to restart the dispensers on completion of the shift change procedure Check Dispenser Status Before a shift change procedure is started it may be desirable to have forecourt in an idle state i e all dispensers stopped idle and outstanding transactions payed off The system will check the dispenser status and not allow the shift change procedure to continue until the forecourt is in an idle state Select Yes to force the system to check the dispenser status Shift Day Reports The internal report can be configured to print shift day reports automatically on completion of the shift change procedure Check the desired shift day reports to have them printed automatically Historical Reports The internal report can be configured to print historical re
254. on Wizard Welcome page click Next PCC Interface Type select Local Area Network Ethernet Bridge click Next PCC IP Address enter IP address of PCC click Next Client Node Address setup node numbers as required click Next Summary click Finish ook Oy 2 3 2 Serial Connection PCC Server Location When a serial interface is chosen the PCCClient32 DLL communicates with PCC Server application that in turn communicates with the PCC serially The PCC Server Location page asks which PC has the serial cable from the PCC plugged into it s COM port and hence where the PCC Server application will be running Select This PC if you are plugging the serial cable into the PC you are running the PCC Connection Wizard from or Another PC if you are going to plug the PCC into a different PC and connect to the PCC Server application via the LAN Remote PC IP Address When the PCC Server is being run on another PC e g Remote the PCCClient32 dll needs to know the IP address of that PC The Remote PC IP Address page asks for IP Address of the remote PC where the PCC Server application is running Note When the PCC Server is being run on the same PC e g Local the IP address is automatically set to the local loop back address 127 0 0 1 Client Node Address Each FOCUS application that communicates with the PCC requires a unique ID this is called the client node address The Client Node Address page allows which applications will
255. on background will turn yellow to confirm the click and dispenser will then change state The transaction buffers hold the current transactions yet to be paid off click the desired buffer to pay off a transaction A transaction can be shifted from the first buffer into the second buffer by clicking on the dispenser status Icon stacking This enables the dispenser to be re authorised and used even though the last transaction hasn t been paid off yet The transaction buffer is highlighted in yellow to indicate a sale is ready for processing It displays the transaction value a coloured panel representing the grade and optionally the transaction volume Dispenser Status Example Basic Retail Postpay Operation Dispenser is idle in Autohold mode Dispenser status displays Hold 2012 POSTEC Data Systems KO FOCUS User Manual Dispenser is lifted by a customer who is now awaiting authorisation Dispenser status displays Alert and sound is played Dispenser is authorised by clicking the dispenser status icon Dispenser status displays Nozzle Lifted MPD Customer starts dispensing fuel Dispenser status displays Delivery in Progress and sale data is displayed in sale buffer Unleaded Customer finishes dispensing fuel and hangs up nozzle Dispenser status displays Transaction Available sound is played and final sale data is displayed Unleaded 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Visual Console 106
256. on of the Ethernet bridge board HW PLDU13 version The hardware version of the PLD U13 on the Ethernet bridge board IP address The IP address of the Ethernet bridge board Subnet mask The subnet mask of the Ethernet bridge board Default gateway The default gateway of the Ethernet bridge board MAC address The MAC address of the Ethernet bridge board PC Windows version The version of the windows operating system Platform The windows platform information Language FOCUS can support multiple languages the language list box allows the selection of the language FOCUS will run in this can be changed dynamically Changing the language here will also update the language setting the Visual Console uses A Multilizer dictionary file mld is required in the installation directory of FOCUS The following language dictionaries are available e Arabic e Chinese Traditional and Simplified e Spanish e Thai 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Forecourt Manager os The translations for each dictionary are usually performed by the client POSTEC supplies a software package to enter translations into the various dictionaries Contact a POSTEC development engineer for more details 4 11 Command Line Functionality Some functions can be started by running the Forecourt Manager with a command line parameter these are detailed below All the functions that are implemented from the command line can be performed from either the Forecourt Manag
257. onciliation is consistent Tank Inventory When logical or automatic tank gauging is being used the controller maintains a set of tank inventory data This data can be viewed from the Tanks Tank Inventory page Click Request to request the current tank inventory data Auto Request To automatically request the tank inventory check the Auto request every checkbox and specify the request frequency using the spin edit control The inventory data will be automatically requested every X seconds where X is specified by the spin edit control Setting the frequency to zero will cause the request to be done repetitively with no delay For each tank configured in the system the grade is displayed the current product volume water level and associated data such as capacity ullage etc Tanks using ATG tank 1 in this example will display more information than tanks setup as logical The high and low product alarms are displayed using dotted lines If a tank has other slave tanks manifolded to it then these will be displayed in the heading e g Tank 1 Super 3 4 When alarms are present for a tank a bell icon will be displayed in the top left hand corner click this icon to display a list of alarms present for the selected tank Some of the graphical display settings are user configurable by clicking on the Graphical Options button The product water alarm and background colours can be changed from the Colours group click on the des
258. opment environments Click Locate to open the Master Database Location dialog Master Database Location Database location C ThisPC Another PC PC name POSPC1 Folder C Program Files POSTEC FOCUS Database FOCUS GDB ys Cancel The master database can be located on the PC running this utility or another PC When Another PC is selected the PC s name must be specified if This PC is selected the PC name is not necessary Once the PC name has been specified the folder file name of the database must be defined When the database resides on the local PC the Browse button can be used to search for the database file however this facility is disabled when using a master database on another PC because the folder will probably not be visible Click OK to save the settings or Cancel to abort Click Test to perform a test connection to the database specified if the database can be connected to the a success dialog will be displayed When the test connection fails this may take a couple of minutes to timeout an error dialog will be displayed Should the master database also be the local database this could occur when all other FOCUS PC s are connecting to the database residing on this PC or the system is to use all local databases check the Master database is local database checkbox In this case the local database location will inherit it s settings from the master database settings and the controls w
259. ormation should also be provided FOCUS software version details This can be gathered easily from the About dialog of any FOCUS application Click More Details to obtain a summary of the version information this can be saved as a text file Controller software version details This can be gathered and saved to a text file from the Forecourt Manager s System tab Store configuration This includes the number of PC s connected to the controller and how they are connected Site configuration A configuration report can be generated from the Forecourt Configuration application and saved as a PDF Audit data The relevant audit records can be exported to an external csv file from the Audit Viewer Database The FOCUS GDB file is an important source of information close down all FOCUS applications including services and copy the file off the PC To reduce its size do a backup restore then zip the file Log files The FOCUS system writes various log files during its operation this is sometimes dependent on configuration options Log files are written for database maintenance operations certain application errors and serial socket communications The log files are stored in the Logs folder located in the FOCUS installation folder O 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Setting up Controller Connection 13 FOCUS User Manual 2 1 Setting up Controller Connection Hardware The PC running FOCUS can connect to the PCC using o
260. ould only take a few minutes Once the program has been un installed the FOCUS program files folder will need to be deleted to completely remove any files folders that were created after the installation The registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Postec FOCUS should also be deleted using regedit exe to ensure all registry settings created after the installation are also removed BE VERY CAREFUL to only delete the specified registry key as deleting other keys may cause operating system failure Un installing the Firebird Database Server To uninstall the Firebird database select Add Remove programs from the Windows Control Panel Select the Firebird item and click Change Remove the uninstall confirmation will be displayed Click Yes the removal progress is displayed this should only take a few minutes When the uninstallation is complete a dialog will be displayed indicating success 14 3 Advanced Database Configuration Operation As mentioned in earlier sections the FOCUS system uses an Firebird database for data storage In a multiple POS BO system all PC s will access a central master database Of course in a single POS system there is only one database so it is both a local and master by default i e the connection can never be lost When using a master database that has more than one client connected the FOCUS system has to account for the loss of connection to this database due to network errors etc When a PC running FOCUS loses its
261. ourt Manager application Cost Price the cost price of the delivery this is the unit price of the fuel delivered The text to the right hand side of the cost price and the decimal points are configurable contact your distributor for more details Summary Page Once all details of the delivery have been entered a summary is displayed Click Finish to save these details to the database and send the delivery information to the controller Should the details be incorrect use Back to move back through the wizard and make any alterations or click Cancel to close the wizard without saving sending the delivery information Tank Delivery Wizard Summary Tank 1 Super Volume 8400 Docket TD2693 Date 13 05 2004 Time 14 00 Cost Price 0 210 Unit Price Supplier Fast Fuel lt Back Cancel jo When Finish is clicked and the information has been saved sent a dialog will be displayed allowing the wizard to be started again to enter another tank delivery This can be used when all deliveries for one day are being entered at one time In this case the docket information and date time of the delivery will be retained from the last delivery processed by the wizard 2012 POSTEC Data Systems i E FOCUS User Manual 5 3 3 5 3 4 Tank Dips When logical tank gauging is being used the controller maintains a theoretical tank level by adding deliveries and subtracting sales This level can be kept accurate by performi
262. p access the Methods of Payment page in the Forecourt Manager TVD Banner access the TVD Banner page in the Forecourt Manager Appearance Menu Setup access the FOCUS Setup Appearance Menu page in the Forecourt Manager VC Operation Setup access the FOCUS Setup Operation page in the Forecourt Manager Advanced Setup access the FOCUS Setup Advanced Setup page in the Forecourt Manager POS Setup access the FOCUS Setup POS Setup page in the Forecourt Manager Keyboard Setup access the FOCUS Setup Keyboard Setup page in the Forecourt Manager ePurse Setup access the FOCUS Setup ePurse page in the Forecourt Manager 4 5 3 Dispenser Assignment On some sites attendants work a specified number of dispensers and are accountable for the money collected from the sales on the dispensers they work The Tanks or PoS or Dispensers Attendants Attendant Dispenser Assignment page allows attendants to be assigned to one or more dispensers The attendant sales report can then be used to determine the sales totals for each attendant at the end of a shift or day Different profiles can be setup for each day of the week and the shifts for that day Select the day of the week using the drop down control and specify the shift number using the spin edit control Select the attendant that will be assigned to a specific dispenser from the drop down list provided Select None for any dispensers that have no specific attendant assigned If the same group
263. plications The Forecourt Manager and Visual Console applications use attendant s for its security these are also linked into the attendant tagging functionality The other FOCUS applications use user s for its security The Forecourt Manager maintains the available attendants and associated attendant rights levels and the Setup Utility maintains the available users and associated user rights Because the Setup Utility and Forecourt Configuration application setup configure parameters that are critical to the system they always require a login The remaining applications FPoS Program Viewer require a login by default but this can be skipped Use the relevant check box in the Applications that require a login group box to specify whether an application requires a login lt is recommended that on a site all applications are left requiring a login to prevent the system from being changed by the end user however in a safer environment e g in house test labs logins could be turned off for convenience Only the Administrator can change these settings should another user login to the Setup Utility this group box will be disabled The FOCUS system allows multiple users to be setup Click User Manager to open the user manager dialog The user manager dialog is used to create delete and modify users of the FOCUS system The Administrator can add users delete users and change user properties All other users may modify their own password but nothing e
264. plications from logging in and thus communicating with the controller Applications can share the same client node address provided 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 21 FOCUS User Manual they will not be run at the same time for example in a POS BO Back Office system the Forecourt Manager may be run on the POS or the BO but not at the same time therefore they can be configured with the same client node address The Client Node Address page allows which applications will be used on the PC and their respective client node addresses to be configured If a certain application is not going to be used on the PC in this example it is the Forecourt Configuration application the checkbox can be unchecked and the client node address control will be disabled Es PCC Connection Wizard Client Node Address Which applications will be used on this PC and what are their client node addresses Forecourt Configuration V Forecourt Manager 2 NV Visual Console fi The serial interface allows client node addresses are 0 to 7 allowing up to eight clients to be logged in and communicating with the PCC at any one time The LAN interface allows client node address of 1 to 16 allowing up to sixteen clients to be logged in and communicating with the controller at any one time Should an application be started without setting up the client node address the an Invalid Client Node Address warning message will be displayed Note
265. port fields are calculated Show unit headers causes column headers to be added for fields units Shift Change End of Day Report Generator Options The FOCUS system provides a comprehensive set of wet stock reports via its internal report generator refer Appendix Sample Reports However sometimes a custom report may be required This can involve the execution of an external report generator at the completion of a shift change or end of day Use the drop down list control to specify on of the following three options e Use Internal Report Generator e Use External Report Generator e Use Internal and External Report Generators When an external reporter is being used select the file using the Browse button or alternatively type the file path name directly into the File control provided Should any run time parameters be required enter these into the Params control This option can also be used to run any external application not just an external report generator on the completion of a shift change or end of day if required Price Change Although grade prices can be set from the Forecourt Manager it is more common to use the Visual Console s scheduled price change procedure There are a few configuration options available for this procedure these are configured from the FOCUS Setup Price Changes page Auto Price Change Options The schedule price change is set up via the price change setup wizard Click the Price change
266. ports automatically on completion of the shift change procedure Check the desired historical reports to have them printed automatically Use the controls provided to configure the time periods report types for each historical report that is to be printed Other Reports The internal report can be configured to print real time reports automatically on completion of the shift change procedure Check the desired real time reports to have them printed automatically The tank inventory report can be printed out in one of two formats standard where the data is displayed in text format or graphical where the data is displayed pictorially Select the desired report type from the radio group provided Schedule A shift change can be scheduled to take place at preset times without requiring the user to invoke the shift change Set a desired time within the Add section and then click the Add button To remove a scheduled time click the time in the list and click the Remove button Note that shift changes can not be scheduled within 5 minutes of one another Finish Click Finish to save the shift change settings or Cancel to discard any changes End of Day Setup Wizard The end of day setup wizard is used to set up the end of day procedure Navigate through the wizard using the Next and Back buttons answer the questions to set up the end of day procedure as desired Please note some of the wizard pages may or may not be shown depending on t
267. ports is fixed at sixteen auxiliary ports cannot be added or deleted Details from one auxiliary device can be copied select the auxiliary device and click Copy Edit Copy and then pasted on to another auxiliary device select another auxiliary device and click Paste Edit Paste Save Send Once the auxiliary device configuration is complete click Save Send Operations Save Send to 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Forecourt Configuration as save the data to the database and send it to the PCC or Cancel Operations Cancel to cancel all changes When the Advanced user or Allow offline editing of auxiliary device configuration options are on the auxiliary devices may be configured while the PCC is offline in this case the data will be saved to the database but not sent to the PCC This allows the user to send the data to the PCC using the Send Configuration function at a later date Request When the PCC is online and the advanced user option is on the current auxiliary device configuration may be requested from the PCC by clicking Request Operations Request The requested data will be stored in the database and will replace any previous changes made The request can be performed safely at anytime as the auxiliary device configuration is stored in non volatile configuration memory within the PCC EEPROM and is NOT lost on a flat battery or during the master reset process 3 2 7 UPls The PCC interfaces to
268. ppropriate action when it is required This causes delays in messages sent from the PCC to dispensers and vice versa Therefore the PCC must be programmed to show how many PEC Autoserves are present in the system this is set using the Forecourt Configuration application under the General Properties node 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 5 4 4 Visual Console When the DCA takes over the dispenser the monitor will display E2 card symbol alongside the relevant dispenser status icon The delivery will be finalised at the DCA For DCA unattended forecourt operation the dispenser must be configured into Autohold mode It may be useful to program one of the four operating schedules for DCA use The dispenser and product totals and tank management levels will be updated by these DCA deliveries The dispenser totals report also contains a dollar subtotal of deliveries that have been done through the DCA Remote Price Setting To disable price changing and checking at the PCC program the PCC price for the dispenser to zero using the Forecourt Manager Grade Prices Manual and remote price changes lock the dispenser out of use for between 10 seconds and 1 minute as required by the authorities in some countries During this period the dispenser status icon will change to an hour glass with Change being displayed in the status text for the dispensers affected by the price change H Change PEC Dispensers In the case of a single hose dispens
269. quired for the FPoS Program Editor application User Interface The FPoS Program Editor provides a graphical user interface to develop new and edit existing FPoS programs The program code is displayed in a grid and a message window below this displays hints warnings and information messages resulting from program compilation Program Name E CAT Program Editor GPAY Qu File Edit Program Tools Help z M r m bea R amp lL X MEA EA Line Label Instruction Address Parameter Numeric Parameter 1 Numeric 1 CardTag_1 Tag Read CardTag_1 2 ChkRecPrntStat_1 10 227777 3 3 03 Prompt Receipt ReprintLoop 5 55 Switch OPT UI ChkRecPrntStat_1 2 6 12 Request Authorization 7 55 Switch OPT UI End_1 1 3 48 Branch ICR Mode 9 51 Lift Nozzle WaitFinalisation_1 10 Fuelling_1 52 Fuelling Fuelling_1 v lt Message gt Error Line 02 Unknown Address Parameter 272777 ao information Compile Failed There is 1 error lt gt Appends a new line to the end of the current CAT program Open an existing FPoS program by clicking Open File Open the Open FPoS Program dialog will be displayed All available FPoS programs are displayed along with the author create date and last compile date Select the desired FPoS program and click OK to open The current FPoS program can be closed at any time by clicking Close File Close A new FPoS program can be created by clicking
270. r click Cancel to abort Managing Templates All templates can be managed using the Template Manager Templates Manage Templates The Configuration Template Management dialog allows the selection of the template type using the drop down control and then the deletion of templates or modification of template details An existing template s details can be modified Click Open to open a templates details the Edit Template Details dialog will be displayed Modify the template details as desired and click OK to save the changes or Cancel to abort the changes An existing template can be permanently deleted select the template and click Delete A confirmation dialog will be displayed Click Yes to delete the specified template or No to cancel Some templates come pre loaded with the FOCUS installation these are system templates and therefore cannot be deleted The Configuration Template Management dialog can be closed at any time by clicking Close 3 1 3 Customizing The Forecourt Configuration interface can be customised to allow the user more flexibility in the configuration process This customization includes e General Settings offline editing grid appearance warnings etc e Communication Settings settings for dialling a remote PCC e Customize View customise summary grid displays ols Options Help En E General Settings 1 Communication Settings i EN Customize View 4 Dimer 3 1 3 1 G
271. rade code property is an optional field that can be used to store an Oil Companies internal code used to uniquely identify the grade This property is stored in the database and is not sent to the controller The temperature coefficient property is used by the controller in automatic tank gauging applications for temperature compensation of measurements to 15 Celsius The two most common temperature coefficient values are available by right clicking on the temperature coefficient edit control Tax fields are currently stored in the database but are not sent to the controller Click OK to save or Cancel to abort all changes Details from one grade can be copied select the grade and click Copy Edit Copy and then pasted on to another grade select another grade and click Paste Edit Paste Adding Grades A site can have up to 15 grades add a new grade by clicking New File New Enter the relevant 2012 POSTEC Data Systems FOCUS User Manual 3 2 4 details into the Grade Properties dialog and click OK to save or Cancel to abort all changes Alternatively the duplicate functionality can be used to create a new Grade which is duplicate of the selected Grade Simply select the Grade you wish to duplicate and click Duplicate Edit Duplicate a new Grade will be created with the identical configuration as the selected Grade This can be used to quickly add grades that are of similar texture however grade names should
272. rceizRuniPCCServer_S exe Started FOCUS Multi Site Server D a a a Cisoftware ProjectsiFocustSourcelzRunMultiSiteServer_S exe Stopped Operation Services can be Started Stopped and Installed Uninstalled using the controls provided Select a 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Introducing FOCUS 3 service in the list and then click the desired control 1 4 3 Registering The standard FOCUS suite requires one licence per site multiple copies of FOCUS can be run on that site provided a site licence has been purchased If you are using the multi site version of FOCUS a licence is required for each installation and the number of sites the applications can maintain When FOCUS is first installed it is unregistered this will be displayed in the About dialog accessible from most of the FOCUS applications There are two types of registration required software and hardware The software registration registers the suite itself and what features will be available within the suite The hardware registration registers the controller that will be used with the FOCUS software on site the hardware registration does not apply to Multi site versions as the FOCUS Multi site configuration connects to many different controllers Software Registration The Registration Utility Start FOCUS Utilities Registration or this can be started by clicking the Unregistered label in any About dialog is used to register the FOCUS suite using the software key s
273. rd holders account payments statements etc Home Point of Sale Dispensers Back Office Attendants Tanks Wetstock Totals Site Utilities FOCUS Setup OPTs Local Account Attendant 1 ais lele El J Account name tame oiscount Balance BuckANCards mores TA All Accounts 0 No 1 Account 1 0 00 12 Randolph Street Mewton Auckland 2 5 45 Paul Matthews Rd Albany Auckland 3 Account 3 y 90 Waimarie Rd Hobsonville Auckland 4 Account 4 y 65 Bush Road Albany Auckland gm Card Holders Account 2 Blelx la Account Card number Card Blocked ha No 1234561234567804 1234561234567802 Site 1111 Postec Motors PCC Status Connected Logged In Online 6 36 24 11 10 Global 13 6 1 1 Login By default attendants do not have access to the Local Accounts pageon startup Attendant access rights can be managed under Forecourt Manager Attendant Profiles 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 169 FOCUS User Manual 13 6 1 2 General Settings The General Settings dialog is split into two tabs Manager and Server Manager General Settings Manager Server General Statement Save Folder CADocuments and Settings jonathanh My Documents Default Account Limit 1000 Receipt Width 31 characters Maximum Sale Value 999999 Whole dollar sale value only Grid options Confirm delete options Y Display horizontal grid lines JV Display vertical grid lines Confirm delete operations Logging
274. rd is case sensitive The user name of the last user to login is displayed The initial default login after installation is User name Administrator Password password The Setup Utility is used to manage users and specify if a login is required for the Audit Viewer application 7 1 Audit User Interface When the Site Audit tab is selected the Audit Viewer displays audit records in the grid y Audit Viewer Qu File Edit View Tools Help 2B amp xaa E H e Site Audt Site Events Current filter Date Time gt 10 Jul 2004 15 56 55 Date Time Type Node User Attendant Details 12 07 2004 10 48 04 a m i 1 initial User Visual Console Clean Up 12 07 2004 10 47 55 a m A 1 Initial User Dispenser 16 Online 12 07 2004 10 47 55 a m A 1 Initial User Dispenser 15 Online 12 07 2004 10 47 55 a m A 1 Initial User Dispenser 14 Online 12 07 2004 10 47 55 a m A 1 initial User Dispenser 13 Online 12 07 2004 10 47 55 a m A 1 Initial User Dispenser 12 Online 12 07 2004 10 47 55 a m A 1 initial User Dispenser 11 Online 12 07 2004 10 47 55a m A 1 intialUser Dispenser 12 07 2004 10 47 55 a m A 1 Initial Use Dispenser 09 Online 12 07 2004 10 47 55 a m A 1 Initial Use Dispenser 08 Online 12 07 2004 10 47 55 a m A 1 Initial User Dispenser 07 Online 12 07 2004 10 47 55 a m A 1 initial User D er 06 Online 12 07 2004 10 47 55a m A 1 initial User Dispenser 05 Online 12 07
275. re coefficient setting is used by the automatic tank gauging therefore it is sent down as part of the tank configuration Therefore if this setting is changed be sure to re send the tank configuration to ensure the new settings are sent to the controller The grades may be configured while the controller is offline in this case the data will be saved to the database but not sent to the controller This allows the user to send the data to the controller using the Send Configuration function at a later date Request When the controller is online and the advanced user option is on the current grade configuration may be requested from the controller by clicking Request Operations Request The requested data will be stored in the database and will replace any previous changes made Ensure the controller is in a working state i e not master reset before requesting the grade configuration Tanks The tanks configuration node allows the configuration of tanks that will be used on a site When automatic tank gauging equipment is installed on the site care must be taken to ensure all tank parameters are entered correctly and match the actual tank parameters of the tanks installed on the site 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Forecourt Configuration ss Editing Tanks Tanks can be manually edited or a configuration template can be applied To manually modify a specific tank select the appropriate tank and click Open File Open The Tank P
276. reate Account Card Holder Using Forecourt Manager setup the account and card holder issue the RF tag to the card holder Step 2 Authorisation When the card holder arrives at the site to dispense fuel that will be charged to his her account the 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Local Accounts 166 following authorisation process takes place Card presented to TVD on selected dispenser Authorisation request sent to the LAS service by controller LAS service checks the card exists is not blocked and the account limit is not reached Authorisation response sent back to the PCC by the LAS service If the response is Approved then the dispenser is authorised ready for use on a Declined response an appropriate authorisation rejection message displayed on the TVD NANA For a PoS transaction the following authorisation process takes place 1 A sale is created in the PoS system and the customer presents their card as payment 2 The PoS reads the card information and requests authorisation for the transaction amount with LAS 3 LAS service checks the card exists is not blocked and the account limit is not reached 4 Authorisation response sent back to the PoS by the LAS service oO If the response is Approved the PoS finalises the transaction with LAS and pays off the sale If the response is Declined the payment is rejected and the PoS requests another payment method When an authorisation request is declined the LAS se
277. rect Instead the FOCUS reporting module will automatically add 1000000 to the end figure so the calculation becomes 1001000 00 900000 00 101000 00 which is the correct total 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 21 i FOCUS User Manual 14 8 2 2 14 8 2 3 In some cases helpdesk receives reports of 1000000 being added incorrectly however this is due to the rule that if the end value is ever less than the start the only assumption that can be made is the value has wrapped If this is not true then the problem will be with the dispenser itself either sending erroneous data totals to the PCC or someone has reset changed the dispenser hardware resulting in the totals being reset In the latter case the error will only exist until the end FOCUS end of day as the new totals will then be stored however if the dispenser is sending erroneous totals data then this needs to be addressed Sample Grade Sales Totals This report displays the volume and value sales totals for each grade in the system for the chosen shift day or month The following fields are displayed for each line of this report e Grade name e The total grade sales volume for the shift day month e The total grade sales value for the shift day month The overall total grade sales figures are displayed at the bottom of the report Should a volume and or value be unavailable for a dispenser at the time of the shift day month start or end an will be displayed on the report to indica
278. red day to report on and click OK to generate the report or Cancel to abort Shift Select the month day and check the Shift check box the Shift drop down control will be populated with the available shifts for the selected day If only one shift is available this will automatically be selected and the shift drop down control disabled The start and end date time of each available shift is displayed Select the desired shift to report on and click OK to generate the report or Cancel to abort Historical Reports The FOCUS system provides extensive historical wetstock reporting Some of these historical reports are based on the FOCUS shift day processes and others on calendar days When a large reporting period e g 1 months is selected a report may take a few seconds to generate Historical Tank Deliveries A Historical Tank Deliveries report displays tank deliveries that have been entered through the FOCUS system Select the Historical Deliveries report and click Create Report The Historical Tank Delivery Report dialog will be displayed allowing the selection of the reporting period An optional report sub heading may be entered into the edit box this will be displayed at the top of the report The reporting period can be selected by specifying the last x Day s Week s or Month s or by checking the Custom checkbox and selecting a From and To date When selecting the Last x Week s or Month s the start of the
279. rform the PCC software upgrade and then afterwards run the Forecourt Configuration application and perform a Send Configuration to reconfigure the PCC The Forecourt Configuration application can be run with the command line parameter C3 this will perform a silent send configuration returning O on success or 1 on failure Note The Aux Devices and UPI s configuration are not stored in the Forman 4 database therefore the upgraded FOCUS database at this point will not contain them either if you are not using the silent send configuration parameter C3 be sure to request these items up individually before doing the send Step 7 If it has not been already done in step 6 perform a Send Configuration using the Forecourt Configuration application The Forecourt Configuration application can be run with the command line parameter C3 this will perform a silent send configuration returning O on success or 1 on failure See Note above Step 8 Perform a final Request Configuration using the Forecourt Configuration application The Forecourt Configuration application can be run with the command line parameter C1 this will perform a silent request configuration returning O on success or 1 on failure Step 9 2012 POSTEC Data Systems FOCUS User Manual When this has been done and the upgrade has been completed the old Forman 4 folder should be copied to a backup Then Forman 4 should be uninstalled using Add Remove and the old Forman
280. rices for the dispensers It also allows the user to allow some dispensers to continue to operate by programming them into Attend mode while shutting down others by programming them into Autohold mode The Forecourt Manager is used to configure the Dispenser Modes and Grade Prices for each operating schedule Power Down Error Due to loss of power or a dispenser going offline while it is in use the delivery data may not be available to the PCC this is dependent on dispenser type When the PCC detects this event the dispensers involved are put into the Power Down Error state Each affected dispenser is put on HOLD and the PCC dispenser status icon displays PD ERROR The delivery must be verified on the dispenser s display face To continue operation simply enter the dispenser number and press the Ready key or click the dispenser status icon If the dispenser still has the delivery data available the PCC will extract it and go to the TO PAY state for payment The sale can be processed from here in the normal fashion Should the PCC be unable to recover the delivery data the wetstock totals should be adjusted manually from information on the dispenser s display In line DCA Operation The PCC can be used with In line DCAs Driveway Card Accepters such as a PEC Autoserve In this scenario the in line DCA sits between the PCC and the dispensers The in line DCA monitors the messages between the PCC and dispensers and takes the a
281. rogram and are only required if these commands are being used These prompts are displayed alongside the command in the code window eee ey ee epee ee See Enter Pump Enter Pump Enter Misc Data 1 Enter Contract Code Scan Barcode Enter Bar Code orization Request Authorization Program End Erter Cartrarct i imhar 9 4 Import FPoS Program An existing Forman 4 FPoS program or one exported from FOCUS by another user can be imported into the FOCUS system Open the Import FPoS Program Wizard by clicking Import FPoS Program Tools Import FPoS Program Navigate through the wizard using the Next and Back buttons answer the questions to import the desired FPoS program Select FPoS Program File Select the FPoS program file that is to be imported using the Browse button FPoS Program Name Specify the name of the FPoS program that will be created in the FOCUS system using the imported FPoS program data Summary A summary of the import details is displayed The FPoS program code and details if available will be imported Once the summary has been checked click Next to start the import process Import Progress The import progress is displayed should an error occur the error text will be displayed in red Once the import is complete click Finish to close the Import FPoS Program Wizard When the import is successful the imported FPoS program will now be displayed in the editor 9 5 Export FPoS Program When a FPoS pr
282. roperties dialog will be displayed allowing the editing of the chosen tank General Tank 1 Properties Site 225 General Advanced Tank Tank gauge Type 6 YR 50 300 350 R Grade Petrol Full raw Empty Raw Capacity s0000 Diameter ooo Step bo E None Calibration Levels Start 180 End 20 Density Ref 0 00 Alarm Levels High 37000 Theft 40000 Water 25 Auto Low 3000 Leakage 40000 Water offset 0 omes The tank must be assigned the grade that is stored in that tank Use the drop down control to assign a grade to a tank only the grades that have been setup under the grade configuration node will be available The nominal capacity of the tank in the units of tank volume is particularly important for ullage calculations as represented in the tank Inventory reports Set the diameter field to the internal diameter of the tank in the units of tank level When a tank is manifolded to a master tank i e is a slave tank use the drop down control to select the master tank All slave tanks inherit their grade from the master tank therefore the grade assignment field is disabled for slave tanks The list of master tanks will only display tanks of the same grade that has been specified for the slave tank The Density Ref field allows the setup of a reference density kg m for the selected tank The tank gauge group provides controls to setup the gauge type and parame
283. rrect otherwise transactions events and other operations will have the incorrect date time information Synchronising the Date Time The controller date time can be synchronised with the date time of the PC using the System Date and Time dialog This dialog can be accessed by selecting the sites master node and clicking PCC Date Time Tools PCC Date Time System Date and Time 2S Computer Date and Time Tuesday 20 03 2012 12 14 53 Synchronise from PCC Set PCC Date and Time Tuesday 20 03 2012 12 14 53 Synchronise from Computer Set The current PC and controller date time are displayed and updated every second Synchronise the date time by clicking Synchronise from Computer do not be concerned if there is a difference of 1 2 seconds this is normal Reset Dispenser A dispenser can be reset if a recoverable fault occurs A reset will delete any outstanding transactions from the buffers as well as clearing status error flags It can be used to delete an invalid transaction caused by a faulty dispenser Warning This deletes all transactions currently buffered for the dispenser Resetting a Dispenser A dispenser can be reset using the Reset Dispenser dialog This dialog can be accessed by selecting the sites master node and clicking Reset Dispenser Tools Reset Dispenser Reset Dispenser Reset a dispenser by entering the appropriate dispenser number and clicking Reset A confirma
284. rs from the Forecourt Manager e g Switching from day operating mode where dispensers may be in auto hold into night mode where dispensers may be in Prepay mode Changing Current Operating Schedule Typically a site manager will configure the necessary operating schedules and then allow the site s attendants to select the current operating schedule from the Visual Console menu the current operating schedule can also be configured from the Dispensers Operating Schedule page On entering this page the current operating schedule is requested from the controller see note and displayed Select the current operating schedule and click Save Send to send the data to the controller or Cancel to cancel any changes Note The controller must be online to change the current operating schedule Operating Schedule Names Clicking on the Edit Schedule Names button opens the Operating Schedule Names dialog This dialog allows the schedule names to be changed from the default settings Change the names to reflect the operating schedule function and click OK to save to cancel changes at any time click Cancel Fall Back Schedule The controller will automatically change into operating schedule four named Manual in this example after all FOCUS clients have been offline for more than the Fallback Timeout default is two minutes When a FOCUS client comes back online the controller will change to the operating schedule that was previously sel
285. rvice will pass back one of the following error codes 04 System error occurred 05 Invalid card 08 Card blocked 09 Account limit reached 20 LAMS registration invalid Step 3 Finalisation When the dispenser is hung up the final transaction data is sent to the LAS service by the controller This transaction is recorded against the card holders account for future billing Step 4 Receipt The controller PoS will request a receipt from the LAS service for the transaction The LAS service will send back the EFT component of the receipt and the complete receipt for the local account sale will be printed at the 4DET or PoS receipt printer Step 5 Billing Account Statement When an account needs to be paid this is at the discretion of the site owner a current account statement needs to be generated Select the account in Forecourt Manager and then click Account Statement on the toolbar staying with the default option of Current Print this statement to file via the print option Close the report and answer Yes to the prompt asking if this statement is to be used for billing the customer Send the statement to the customer Step 6 Payment On receipt of an account payment for the statement issued in Step 5 select the account in Forecourt Manager and then click Account Payment on the toolbar Select the statement from step 5 in the drop down control and enter the payment amount the account balance will now be updated The curre
286. s 174 Options Upgrade Purge Backup Restore Delete Logs Command Line Functionallity 0 0 0 0 vc secesceseessessesesssesseeseeseeseesaesessessevsevseeseesneneesaesnesaesaesaesseeseeeneeoeeas 176 8 Advanced Database Configuration ccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeees 177 Part XIV Appendix 179 Tilnstalling FOCUS coii2 2d ceeeeece aiats ceccad A AVAA AEO NAAA VEn de cevadecotcavesceansddeccceavesctenvddzccteavessenes 179 Direct Interface Setup nccniccinninicnicninincannn rancia 182 2 Uninstalling FOCUS ie 182 3 Advanced Database Configuration Operation ccooonnnccccconnnncnnnnnnnennnnnnnennnnnnnrrnnnnnnernnnnn 182 Upgrading Interbase to Firebird cece soeeatenence ccevecnecucdseesucerdevecaerussanerecees 189 Fire bird CON igual aan 189 4 Quick Reference Guides ccsccsscessceseeeseeeseeeeeeenecenecenesenecusecueeeeeeseesneesnesenssensanesss 190 5 Visual Console Status ICONS ccscccsceseceeeceeeeeeeceneseneseneceseceeeceeeseseeneesneeeneseeseenseneses 190 Gy Timer DETMITONS lt a a sid avie Riek tees hn Teaia ETa 196 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Contents 7 Diagnoses enia nE ENAERE Ea ENEA AEEA EEEREN E A AEEA AEA EEEa ENEN 196 POC SO reve i EAN EEEE EENE LEANER SE ENEE E T ENE AEE TEERAA EEE EEA EEEE OESE E EE EE A ERETT 196 Analysing Site Events ccccsssssssesseseesseeseeseeseseeseesessesseeseesoesoesaesaessesaevevenvaneaneneenaesnesaesaesaesseeseesneeneoas 199 O R
287. s Options Help Ao Aa st q p Q a Site 10 Grant s Gas Garage A Manifolded To Tank Gauge Type Capacity Diameter High Alarn General Propertie Ste Node 1 Diesel 0 VR 50 300 350 R 23662 2130 206i E Dial Properties a gt EA gt ani E 2 Turbojet 0 WR 50 300 350 R 23662 2130 206 sl 3 Diesel 0 VR 50 300 350 R 23662 2130 2064 dEl Dispensers E io 4 Power 0 VR S0 200 250 R 23662 2130 206 Auxiliary Devices 5 Unleaded Configuration 0 300 350 R 24 000 64 UPI Universal Pump Interface lt Details ai gt 33 Timers us Units Sending data to the PCC Complete E Forman 3 Attendants oY Send Site Parameters amp AVI Automatic Vehicle Identification OPT Outdoor Payment Terminal Y Send Tank Configuration Forecourt Receipt Send Tank Density Reference v ES OPT Settings E Hide EZ FPOS Prooram pe Save data to the databa Site 10 Connected Logged In Online 6 33 25 06 08 Global LAN 10 0 0 169 Connection Status General Operation As mentioned earlier the configuration functionality is accessed va the node system When editing is involved the data has to be either saved to the database sent to the controller or both In some 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Forecourt Configuration 25 cases specific data can be requested from the controller Tools are available to perform site specific tasks such as resetting dispensers setting the PCC date time master reset etc these are available o
288. s selected a summary of the relevant configuration details are displayed in a grid on the right hand side of the main form In some cases due to the sites setup not all fields need to be displayed i e hose four grade tank is not always relevant The grids view can be customized using the Customize View dialog Options Customize View This dialog allows the selection of which fields will be displayed and their order The column widths and positions can be changed directly using the grid controls All these settings are stored locally on the PC Customize View Default Available fields Displayed fields Schedule 3 Mode Schedule 4 Mode Central Pricing Tag Display Type v Special Setting v Cancel To add a field to the summary grid select the chosen field from the list on the left hand side and click Add To remove a field from the summary grid select the chosen field from the right hand list and click Remove The displayed fields are shown in the order they will appear This order can be changed by selecting the chosen field and moving it up and down by clicking Move Up and Move Down Click OK to save the settings or Cancel to abort all changes The default settings can be restored at any time by clicking Default 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 31 FOCUS User Manual 3 2 3 2 1 Controller Configuration The Forecourt Configuration application presents the controller configur
289. s the Tank Inventory page in the Forecourt Manager access the Tank Dips page in the Forecourt Manager access the Fuel Density page in the Forecourt Manager access custom utility through the Visual Console s menu access the Wetstock Reports page in the Forecourt Manager access the Shift Totals page in the Forecourt Manager access the Accumulated Totals page in the Forecourt Manager access the Dispenser Electronic Totals in the Forecourt Manager access the Dispenser Modes page in the Forecourt Manager access the Dispenser Allocation Limits page in the Forecourt access the System Information page in the Forecourt Manager access the Reset Dispenser PEPS page in the Forecourt access the Transaction Recovery page in the Forecourt Manager access the Return Transaction page in the Forecourt Manager access the System Date Time page in the Forecourt Manager access the Utilities POS Fallback Control page in the Forecourt access the Attendants Details and Profiles pages in the Forecourt access the Attendant Dispenser Assignment page in the Forecourt 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Forecourt Manager Site Details access the Site Details page in the Forecourt Manager Forecourt Receipt access the Forecourt Receipt page in the Forecourt Manager Transaction Expire Timeout access the Transaction Expiry Time page in the Forecourt Manager Fuel Supplier Setup access the Fuel Suppliers page in the Forecourt Manager Method of Payment Setu
290. saved to the database but not sent to the PCC This allows the user to send the data to the PCC using the Send Configuration function at a later date Should a FPoS program other than the active FPoS program be selected when the Save Send is selected a prompt will appear to confirm whether the selected FPoS program should be made the active FPoS program before the save send is actioned Request When the PCC is online and the advanced user option is on the current FPoS program may be requested from the PCC by clicking Request Operations Request The requested data will be stored in the database and will replace any previous changes made Ensure the PCC is in a working state i e not master reset before requesting the FPoS program Tools The Forecourt Configuration application provides various tools to complete site commissioning All of these tools excluding the FPoS Program Editor and Audit Viewer can only be used when a sites main node is selected because they are site tools and reflect on the entire site 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 55 FOCUS User Manual 3 3 1 tions Tools Options Help 18 Request Configuration 1 BF Send Configuration Si FPOS Program Editor Audit Viewer e Service Management EA Master Reset 8 set PCC Date Time XK Reset Dispenser inter Setup Grade Prices e ic E Export Configuration File 3 Import Configuration File icle Ide Go Live tte ent Te X ee m ipt ve e EN
291. schedules therefore an option is available to quickly set this Set all the schedules to the same price for a particular grade by selecting the appropriate cell right click and select Apply to all schedules All schedules for the grade selected will be set to the selected price Click Save Send to send the data to the controller or Cancel to cancel any changes Note The controller must be online to change the grade prices Fall Back Schedule The controller will automatically change into operating schedule four named Manual in this example after all FOCUS clients have been offline for more than the Fallback Timeout default is two minutes Therefore the schedule four grade prices must be set up to account for this possibility Setting the prices to zero in schedule four will allow the price to be manually configured at the dispenser should the controller fall back Dispenser Allocation Limits Each dispenser in the system can be assigned a money limit delivery amount this may occur in the case of rationing Editing Dispenser Allocation Limits The allocation limit for each dispenser in the system is configured from the Dispensers Dispenser Allocation Limits page Configure the dispenser allocation limits for each dispenser by entering the money value in the appropriate cell Click Save Send to save the data to the database and send it to the controller or Cancel to cancel any changes The dispenser allocation limits m
292. sing the Change button click Next The Setup Type page is displayed Select Typical unless you are an experienced user and only wish to install certain components of the FOCUS suite in which you case you can select Custom click Next The FOCUS suite is now ready to be installed click Install to install the FOCUS suite using the parameters specified earlier The installation progress is displayed this should only take a few minutes Once the installation is complete the Completed page is displayed click Finish to close Firebird Installation Click the Install Firebird Database Server 2 1 button on the FOCUS installer screen to start the Firebird installation if the FOCUS installer cannot be displayed run the E Firebird Setup exe where E is your CD ROM drive The Firebird Database Server Installation Welcome page will be displayed click Next Read the licence agreement and click I accept the agreement to continue if you do not agree with the terms click Cancel to abort the installation The Information page is displayed read this for information on the Firebird database click Next The Destination Directory page is displayed this specifies where the Firebird program files will be installed on this PC The default folder is displayed if you wish to change this do so using the file explorer provided click Next The Select Components page is displayed unless otherwise advised always select the options as displayed below 2
293. sired receipt printer from the drop down list this setting allows receipts to be printed to a specific printer that isn t necessarily the Windows default printer Specify the left margin characters receipt width characters and font size A custom logo can be selected using the browse button The receipt allows 4 custom header and footer lines and a receipt comment A blank line can be inserted into the custom header or footer lines by entering B or right clicking and selecting Insert Blank Line The receipt extended transaction data can be selected using the Select Fields button in the Extended transaction data group box This can be used to print specific data for applications such as card numbers odometers and vehicle registration Should the card number be selected a masking scheme and character can be setup to meet any IP requirements Extra Line Feeds can be added at the bottom of the receipt 2012 POSTEC Data Systems os FOCUS User Manual 4 9 5 The fields shown in the Visual Console Reprint Receipt dialog can be customised using the Select Fields button in the Reprint Receipt group box the period of the reprint selection can also be defined in days Click OK to save the changes or Cancel to discard changes Key Setup The FOCUS system can be run in either a touch or keyboard driven environment therefore the Visual Console s numerous control functions are assigned to keys These key assignments
294. site general properties node provides the configuration of a sites properties including name number password contact details address TVD banner etc To edit a sites general properties select the General Properties node and click Open File Open the General Properties dialog will be displayed The dialog consists of three tabs General Address Contact and Additional Information An additional tab Forman 3 Attendant Tagging may be visible but this requires an extra configuration setting to be turned on contact Postec for more details General and Address Contact The General tab contains general site information and miscellaneous site parameters Some properties can only be edited when creating a new site and are disabled when editing an existing site e g dispenser count tank count etc The Address Contact tab contains the sites address and contact details including the site s modem phone number and IP address which are used to connect in a multi site installation The country MUST be set correctly as this is what the global software build uses to identify country specific operating rules 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Forecourt Configuration 32 General Properties Site 10 E Address Contact Additional Info F3 Attendant Tagging OPT Specific Misc Control Site identification Password Number 10 New PASS Name Grant s Gas Garage Current PASS Site entities Hourly log options OTE fo OS fo gt P
295. sk Parameters 14 7 2 15 POS PCC Console client Usually a Point of Sale terminal or application Node number records the client or terminal node number All Offline All clients are now offline StandAlone Mode All clients are offline and the PCC has been programmed to revert into stand alone mode In standalone mode the PCC automatically releases pumps locked by exception errors and releases from an emergency condition 14 7 2 16 Price Sign Automatic Price Sign Node number used to identify the sign protocol or type Event Online PCC established communications with the Auto Price Sign Offline PCC lost communications with the Auto Price Sign i 14 7 2 17 Printer Node Dispenser number Node 0 Central journal Online PCC established communications with the Printer Offline PCC lost communications with the Printer Device Enabled Printer reports ready to print Device Disabled Printer error condition reported Print Spooler buffer reset PCC Master reset 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 14 7 2 18 Pump Controller Passive UPI monitoring a third party pump controller Node number Passive UPI channel number PCC detected communications from a third party pump controller PCC no communications monitored from third party controller after a preset l time 14 7 2 19 STP Run Box PCC lost communications with the STP Run Box Card i 14 7 2 20 Tagging Visual Display Postec Tagging Visual Display TVD N
296. spensers Not Used or a specific dispenser number range Selecting Open to all dispensers or Not Used options for the start dispenser automatically sets the stop dispenser to the same option When a specific range is selected the stop dispenser number must be equal to or greater than the start dispenser number The OPT options allow the customisation of the hardware that will be available on the OPT device The Swipe Mag Card Reader Insertion Mag Card Reader options have two functions e to enable the card reader in the OPT terminal This should not be checked if a OPT is not 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 53 FOCUS User Manual 3 2 15 configured with a card reader as the OPT may falsely always report a card inserted e to configure the OPT prompt for Inserting a card or presenting a tag or both The Tag Reader option is used to configure the OPT prompt for presenting a tag this assumes the tag reader is integrated within the OPT device The TVD Tag Reader option is used to instruct the PCC that a Postec TVD device is mounted with the OPT device and will serve as a tag reader For more information on this reference the TVD documentation The Receipt Printer option controls whether the Forecourt POS customer dialog will offer receipts at this specific OPT node When the Receipt Printer option is on the Printer Address can be edited This allows a specific OPT to offer receipts even if it does not have
297. ssible this will prevent site wetstock management Forecourt Configuration Save Send will be disabled this will prevent site configuration PCCClient32 dll Login will be disabled this applies to the direct interface using the DLL not a standard FOCUS installation WARNING These limitations will STOP the site from trading The unregistered warning and error dialog includes the functionality to generate a Registration Support File click the Registration Support File button This file contains version details internal controller serial number and site details Save this file and send it to Postec to receive the appropriate registration codes Hardware Failure Should the controller fail and have to be swapped out the Hardware Key can be cleared to prevent invalid registration with the new controller use the Clear button in the Hardware Codes group In this case the grace period will be reduced to 10 days It is the distributor s responsibility to register the FOCUS suite 30 days is more than enough time to achieve this Registration Files The registration process can be automated by using a registration file This file may be supplied by POSTEC or it can be created by the distributor using the codes assigned by POSTEC Ifa file has been supplied click Load Registration File select the file from its location and the registration details will automatically be added into the system 2012 POSTEC Data Syste
298. st data is not required e g no AVI channels are setup etc Send request data has been disabled Send request data is not supported by this version of controller software es OS XA When configuration data has been changed the node cannot be exited until the changes have been either cancelled or Saved Sent If an attempt is made to change nodes or exit without saving changes a confirm dialog will be displayed Click Yes to return to the node and automatically Save Send the changes or No to cancel all changes Each node provides different editing controls depending on functionality please refer to the appropriate help section for more details When working offline from the controller the data can only be saved to the database therefore in some cases where the data is not stored in the database editing is disabled Just about all functionality can be accessed a number of ways through a menu system located at the top of the application using a pop up menu activated by right clicking on an item or using the many shortcut keys provided Login The Forecourt Configuration application requires a valid user to login on startup Enter a valid user name and password to login to the Forecourt Configuration application Only the password is case sensitive The user name of the last user to login is displayed The initial default login after installation is User name Administrator Password password The Setup Utility is used to manage
299. stec documentation For more information reference the relevant Postec system commissioning documentation Editing Auxiliary Devices When the Advanced User option is enabled the Auxiliary Devices can be edited straight away However when it is disabled the editing is disabled to ensure the Auxiliary Devices are not inadvertently changed When editing is disabled click Edit Settings Operations Edit Settings to start editing the Auxiliary Device configuration In doing so a warning will be displayed click Yes to enable the editing controls or No to cancel Should the PCC be offline editing will only be enabled if the appropriate allow editing offline option is enabled Once editing is enabled auxiliary devices can be manually edited or a configuration template can be applied To manually modify a specific auxiliary device select the appropriate auxiliary port and click Open File Open The Auxiliary Device Properties dialog will be displayed allowing the editing ofthe chosen auxiliary port Select the appropriate device and specific device for the chosen auxiliary port The specific devices available are dependant on the device chosen A blank device first in the list can be selected if there is no device for that particular auxiliary ports Aux Port 9 Properties Site 10 Port Device 110 POS Terminal v Specific device 8 Click OK to save or Cancel to abort all changes The number of auxiliary
300. t i e not a whole dollar amount To allow decimal points in the prepay value check the Allow decimal points in prepay values option In a typical POS Back office setup the site manager may wish to run the Visual Console on the back office PC to keep an eye on the forecourt In this case sale processing should be disabled on the back office PC to stop the manager accidentally paying off fuel sales however he will still be able to authorise dispensers emergency stop etc Check the Disable sale processing option to prevent sales being processed on the Visual Console The Visual Console plays an integral part in attendant tagging When a request for authorisation is made by an attendant on the forecourt the Visual Console will check the attendants authorisation status and pass this back This process will only work on the PC that has tagging support enabled Check the Enable tagging support option to enable this authorisation process In a multi console set up this option should only be enabled on one console In an attended forecourt scenario an attendant can finalise transactions at a 4DET 4REC on the forecourt In this case the Visual Console must be configured to automatically pay off the forecourt finalised transaction Check the Process forecourt finalised transactions option to enable this feature The Visual Console has an emergency stop button in the control panel that is used to stop all dispensers in use or otherwise In
301. t or day summary is displayed at the end of the report breaking down the totals by method of payment and also displaying the overall sales figures The reporting period and whether it is a shift or daily report is displayed in the top right hand corner of the report Sample 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 14 8 2 4 Console Transaction Summary This report displays a summary of the volume value and number of transactions for the chosen shift day or month The report is grouped by Type of transaction The following fields are displayed for each line of this report e Shift Day FOCUS day and or shift number e Type type of transaction refer Transaction Types e Number of transactions the total number of transactions for the given type and time period e Volume the total volume of transactions for the given type and time period e Value the total value of transactions for the given type and time period The overall summary of totals is displayed at the bottom of the report The reporting period and whether it is a shift daily or monthly report is displayed in the top right hand corner of the report Sample 14 8 2 5 Dispenser Console Sales Reconcilation This report provides a reconciliation between transactions that have been processed through the Visual Console and the dispenser electronic totals for the chosen shift day or month This report groups dispensers by grade This report is used to provide an indication of
302. te not all figures were available for the specified grade The reporting period and whether it is a shift daily or monthly report is displayed in the top right hand corner of the report The figures in this report are calculated by the calculation of end start total The figures are stored in the database at each start of day shift change and end of day this is a snap shot of what the totals were at this time For each dispenser the total field will use the controller accumulated field if the NRT option is set to false and the dispenser electronic total if the NRT option is set to true This calculation also takes into account the wrapping of totals refer to Hose Sales Totals section for more detail on wrapping Sample Attendant Sales This report displays attendant sales volume and value totals for a chosen shift or day in a system where attendant tagging is being used This report groups attendant s sales totals by the method of payment The following fields are displayed for each line of this report e Attendant name number e The method of payment used to finalise the sale e The total number of sales for the specified attendant and method of payment e The total volume of sales for the specified attendant and method of payment e The total value of sales for the specified attendant and method of payment The total number of sales volume and value for each attendant is displayed at the end of each attendant block A shif
303. tec FOCUS Logs Socket 020403_ 121856 _FLSocket log Socket Monitor The socket monitor displays the socket messages being sent to from the PCCClient32 dll and controller Since the protocol is propriety to the system the messages are usually deciphered by a Postec engineer The monitoring can be started stopped using the Start Stop buttons Monitor Start Monitor Stop The message window can be cleared using the clear button Monitor Clear A filter may be applied by clicking the filter button Tools Filter Options the Filter Options dialog will be displayed Setup the desired filter options dispenser status messages can be shown and decoded also only status messages for specific dispensers or node can be displayed Node numbers can be included excluded to allow the vewing of messages for just one application 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 155 FOCUS User Manual The log window font may be changed by clicking the Font button Format Font 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Transaction Viewer FOCUS User Manual 11 Transaction Viewer The FOCUS system can be configured to write all fuel transactions processed by the Visual Console to the FOCUS database The Transaction Viewer application Start Program Files FOCUS Utilities Transaction Viewer provides an interface to view filter and report on transaction records The transaction table is purged during a database purge operation to prevent its size from growing to an
304. ted by FOCUS The report view can be customised and different views saved for future reference the desired fields can be set at the time of creating the report Due to the customisability this report has no fixed format The data source for this report is the same as Transaction Viewer so the full list of available fields can be viewed from within this application Historical Historical Price Changes This report displays the details of scheduled price changes entered into the FOCUS system through the Visual Console Scheduled Price Change wizard This report is grouped by grade Price changes made using the Forecourt Manager are not reported on in this report The following fields are displayed for each line of this report e Grade name Date and time this is either the scheduled time or time of confirmation as per the Action field Attendant name of attendant scheduling the price change or confirming it as per the Action field Action whether this entry is the scheduling of the price change or the confirming of the price change Shift FOCUS shift number Old Price old price of grade before change New Price new price of grade after change The reporting period is displayed in the top right hand corner of the report Sample Historical Deliveries This report displays the details of tank deliveries entered into the FOCUS system through the FOCUS Tank Delivery Wizard and the dispenser calibration tests This report is group b
305. tems FPoS Program Editor 9 1 FPoS Program Editor 148 FPoS Program Editor The FOCUS system allows FPoS programs to be developed and maintained This allows the construction of custom OPT customer dialogs to suite the system and business application requirements The FPoS Program configuration node in Forecourt Configuration application is used to send a FPoS program to the PCC and request a FPoS program from the PCC as well as the management of FPoS programs within the FOCUS system The FPoS Program Editor application is used for the development of new FPoS programs and editing of existing FPoS programs FPoS programs are created modified and compiled using this editor Integration between the Forecourt Configuration application and the FPoS Program Editor means the FPoS program development configuration process is easy FPoS programs can be exported to a file so they can be sent to other user who can then import the FPoS program into their system and start using it Login The FPoS Program Editor may require a user to login this allows the access to the editing of FPoS programs to be restricted Enter a valid user name and password to login to the FPoS Program Editor Only the password is case sensitive The user name of the last user to login is displayed The initial default login after installation is User name Administrator Password password The Setup Utility is used to manage users and specify if a login is re
306. ters e The PoS Console can emergency stop all dispenser including FPoS and resume all dispenser including FPoS e The PoS Console cannot deauthorize or authorize temp stop or resume a specific dispenser under FPoS control Note The Emergency Stop Configuration will only work if XFuel is enabled in the Aux Devices The Disable OPT dispenser selection when nozzle lifted setting is used to control dispenser availability at an OPT When checked the user of the system must select the dispenser from the OPT before lifting the nozzle of the selected dispenser Save Send Once the general properties configuration is complete click Save Send Operations Save Send to save the data to the database and send it to the PCC or Cancel Operations Cancel to cancel all changes The general properties may be configured while the controller is offline in this case the data will be saved to the database but not sent to the controller This allows the user to send the data to the controller using the Send Configuration function at a later date Request When the controller is online and the advanced user option is on the current general properties configuration may be requested from the controller by clicking Request Operations Request The requested data will be stored in the database and will replace any previous changes made Ensure the controller is in a working state i e not master reset before requesting the general properties
307. ters Select the appropriate gauge type or brand of tank probes installed into the tank from the drop down list provided Note that this should be set to None when no tank gauge is used The Full Raw setting specifies the maximum level reading for this probe This value may be less than the maximum fuel level in the tank This indicates that the actual fuel level may be greater than this however the reading does not go any higher The default setting for the full raw is ten times the tank diameter The Empty Raw specifies the minimum level reading for this probe This is the offset value of the probe This indicates that the actual fuel level may be less than this however the reading does not go any lower The default setting for the empty raw is zero The step value is automatically calculated using the following formula Full Raw Empty Raw 500 These settings are automatically calculated for almost all tank gauge types in this case manual editing is disabled The calibration levels group contains controls used for automated tank calibration and are relative values as a percentage of the tank s total capacity The start calibration level indicates the top most level as a percentage of the capacity which when reached will start the calibration process The end calibration level indicates the bottom most as a percentage of the tank capacity which when reached will stop the calibration process 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 39 FOCUS User M
308. tes you wish to compare in single site FOCUS there is only the option to select the controller and site in the database as shown above Check the Only show entities that are different checkbox if you want to only display the changes if this is left unchecked the entire configuration will be shown with differences highlighted Click OK to start the compare process If the comparison is being done with the controller the configuration is requested from the controller first this is stored temporarily for the comparison report 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Forecourt Configuration ss and does NOT overwrite the configuration stored in the database A report is generated and displayed showing the differences 3 3 2 Send Configuration The send configuration function is a powerful tool in site commissioning or site upgrade process The send configuration function sends all the necessary configuration data to the controller in one go Click Send Configuration Tools Send Configuration to start this function The status panel shows the progress of the send configuration function as it works its way through sending each configuration entity This function allows a user to setup a remote site offline i e saving the information to the database and then connect at a later date and send all the configuration This can also be done to commission an existing site after a master reset has be performed due to a controller soft
309. th i e end start this calculation also takes into account the wrapping of values The total volume and value for each grade is displayed at the end of each grade block and the overall total hose sales figures are displayed at the bottom of the report Should a volume and or value be unavailable for a dispenser hose at the time of the shift day month start or end an will be displayed on the report in place of the missing figure The reporting period and whether it is a shift daily or monthly report is displayed in the top right hand corner of the report The figures in this report are calculated by the calculation of end start total The figures are stored in the database at each start of day shift change and end of day this is a snap shot of what the totals were at this time For each dispenser the total field will use the PCC accumulated field if the NRT option is set to false and the dispenser electronic total if the NRT option is set to true Wrapping Both the PCC accumulated and dispenser electronic totals increase over time and are then reset back to zero to start increasing again This can mean that the end figure is actually less than the start figure in this case FOCUS automatically adjusts the total to take into account the wrap Example Note dispenser wraps at 999999 99 Start Value 900000 00 End Value 1000 00 Normal calculation of end start would be 1000 00 900000 00 899000 00 which would be incor
310. the POS PC TX signals in a wire or configuration e g 1N4148 1N914 LAN Connection The controller can be connected to the PC running FOCUS with a standard network cable This connects between the controller outlet marked 10 Base T and a network port on the PC This configuration requires the PCC to be fitted with an Ethernet Bridge This configuration will require TCP IP and the relevant network hardware to be installed on any PCs that are connected to the PCC via the LAN connection Under this configuration the Client DLL communicates directly with the PCC therefore the PCC Connection Wizard needs to be run to set up the IP address that the PCC is configured with The default IP address of a PCC is set to 192 168 0 100 the PCC internal network settings can be changed using the PCC Connection Wizard 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Setting up Controller Connection 16 PCC With Ethernet Bridge Fitted PCC Client PC LAN Includes TCP IP Protocol We PCC Client 2 2 PCC Network Setup Wizard The PCC Network Setup Wizard is used to configure the PCC s internal network settings this includes the IP address default gateway and subnet mask Note The PCC needs to be fitted with an Ethernet bridge card or Combo main board Login The PCC Network Setup Wizard may require a user to login this allows the access to the setting of PCC connection parameters to be restricted Enter a valid user name and password to login
311. the controls provided the format will be fixed depending on the units configuration i Should the unit price be the same for all operating schedules simply enter the unit price in one of the controls right click in that control and select Apply to all schedules The unit price from that control will be automatically written into all the controls Save Send Once the grade unit price configuration is complete click Save Send Operations Save Send to send it to the controller or Cancel Operations Cancel to cancel all changes The grade prices are NOT saved in the database Request The current grade unit prices may be requested from the controller by clicking Request Operations Request 3 3 8 Export Configuration File The Export Configuration File function allows the selected sites configuration to be exported to an external file This is useful for sending a sites configuration to other FOCUS users to import without sending the entire database and associated data Click Export Configuration File Tools Export Configuration File to start this function Click the Export button to start the process The export process is displayed On completion of the export a save dialog is displayed select the folder to 2012 POSTEC Data Systems a FOCUS User Manual 3 3 9 3 3 10 3 4 3 5 save the configuration file and click save Import Configuration File The Export Configuration Fi
312. the situation where the Visual Console is being used for monitoring only and running in a locked state it may be desirable to hide this button to prevent a user inadvertently emergency stopping the forecourt Un check the Show emergency stop button to hide this button The emergency stop button is a requirement for the Australian market and MUST be shown atall times A warning will appear to remind you that it may be a requirement to have the emergency stop visible The Visual Console can use new transaction processing functions that allow up to ten transactions to be stacked and the stacking of un confirmed transactions The Use legacy transaction processing functions check box determines whether the Visual Console will use the old legacy functions or the new functions The Price Change and Tank Delivery wizards can be configured to print a report to the default printer with the details entered on completion of the wizard Use the two check boxes provided to enable this functionality For attendants to be able to authorise dispensers which are in Autohold state for a particular Hose Grade only if pump is multiproduct or be able to perform a prepay for a particular hose grade on a dispenser in AutoHold state To activate this function check Allow Prepay in AutoHold mode option Forecourt Manager Options The accumulated hose totals can be synchronised to the electronic dispenser totals This is a good O 2012 POSTEC Data Systems
313. ti line mode on off and customise it s appearance The following properties are available e Multi line gap the gap between lines of dispenser cells e Forecourt width specifies how many dispensers will be on one line If this is set to zero the Visual Console will fit as many as it can on one line before moving to the next Colours The following colours configurations are available e Console background the background colour of the Visual Console e Status icon spaces the colour of the spaces between status icons The Best Fit button will setup the dispenser cell size settings according to the number of dispensers in the system while trying to maximise the screen real estate Transaction Buffers Each dispenser in the Visual Console is displayed with a configurable number of transaction buffers This is determined by the site setup When legacy transaction processing is being used the number of transaction buffers is fixed at two otherwise the transaction stack depth property determines how many buffers are available this can be set up to a maximum of ten Dimensions The dimenisons of the transaction buffers must be modified to allow for screen real estate touch screen functionality and displaying large transaction data The following properties are available to modify the transaction buffer s appearance Visible transaction buffers this allows the number of visible transaction buffers to be set lower than the actua
314. tically print reports after shift control procedures no user access Service Management Utility management of FOCUS services PCC Server and Multi site Server Setup Utility used to setup the FOCUS suite includes general options and user security Transaction Viewer used to view search print export and delete transaction records Visual Console used for the control of the forecourt itself and processing of sales The console allows uses to process fuel transactions perform shift control process dispenser tests enter tank deliveries schedule price changes and change operating schedules The console can be interfaced to a POS application to provide a complete wet stock dry stock solution The following applications may be supplied by Postec to add to complement the standard FOCUS applications e Batch Utility used to extract certain types of wetstock data from the PCC and export it into a common format for external processing System Requirements The following minimum hardware and software requirements apply Hardware Requirements Windows XP Windows XP Home Edition or better 500 MHz Intel AMD CPU 256 MB RAM 150 MB available Hard Drive space 1024x768 Screen Resolution Windows Vista 7 Windows Vista Home Basic Edition or better or 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 1 3 Introducing FOCUS 4 Windows 7 Starter Edition or better 1 GHz Intel AMD CPU 1 GB RAM 150 MB available Hard Drive space 1024x768 Screen Reso
315. tion Compiling Once a FPoS program has been developed edited the program must be compiled to ensure that the program is of the correct syntax The program MUST be compiled before it is sent to the PCC from the FPoS Program node in Forecourt Configuration application The current FPoS program is compiled by clicking Compile Program Compile The program will be automatically saved when compile is selected The compile progress dialog will be displayed showing the number of lines hints warnings and errors When the compile is unsuccessful the message window will display the error information The message window also displays any hints or warnings that have resulted from the compile process Error Line 06 Numeric Parameter Range Error Numeric parameter must in the range 1 to 20 Error Line 08 Numeric Parameter Range Error Numeric parameter must in the range 1 to 20 Information Compile Failed There are 3 errors When the compile is successful the message window will display the compiled code Information Compile Successful Compiled Code 20 45 06 9E OF 43 62 05 9F OF 44 07 10 8C OF 8D BF AO OF 920G WARNING The FPoS program option allows the user to construct custom OPT customer dialogs to suit the system and business application requirements The FPoS program development environment does not provide any checks on the logic of the program Some instructions must not be executed before others e g Authorising
316. tion dialog will be displayed click Yes to reset the specified dispenser or No to cancel without resetting Setup Grade Prices The grade prices are usually controlled via the Forecourt Manager application or more commonly the scheduled price change functionality of the Visual Console However in some instances initial grade prices may need to be setup as part of the commissioning process especially after the dispenser hose tank assignment has been altered The Grade Prices dialog provides the functionality to setup the grade prices Click Set Grade 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Forecourt Configuration 60 Prices Tools Setup Grade Prices the Grade Prices dialog will be displayed ia Grade Prices File Operations Schedule 4 1 100 0 980 0 763 0 652 The controller must be online to setup the grade prices On appearance the current grade will be requested from the controller and displayed Only the grades that have been configured in the system and are assigned to hoses will be displayed Editing Grade Prices Edit a grades price by selecting the row and clicking Open File Open The Unit Prices dialog will be displayed allowing the grade s unit price for each operating schedule to be edited Unit Prices Super Schedule 1 Price 1 100 Apply to all schedules Schedule 2 Price 11 100 Schedule 3 Price 1 100 Schedule 4 Price hao Cancel Enter the grade s unit price for each operating schedule using
317. to COM1 e 9600 baud e 8 data bits e 1 stop bit e Even parity Click Default to return the communication port settings back to these factory defaults The baud rate set in the PCC Server must match the baud rate set in the PCC The PCC baud rate is set using the DIP Dual Inline Package switches 1 and 2 as per the following table Switch1 Switeh2 BaudRate 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 23 FOCUS User Manual 4800 2400 9600 Factory default setting For information on the Serial Monitor Socket tab and Connections tab refer to the PCC Server section in the Diagnostics appendix 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Forecourt Configuration 25 FOCUS User Manual 3 3 1 Forecourt Configuration The Forecourt Configuration application is used to configure the controller This application is used to commission new sites alter existing sites and upgrade old sites The configuration of the FOCUS application behaviour and parameters e g console appearance that are not stored in the controller and relate to each PC on site is performed from the Forecourt Manager application The Forecourt Configuration tool runs on site in single site mode and may be run in multi site mode version dependant to enable the configuration support of a network of sites User Interface The Forecourt Configuration application uses a file explorer like graphical user interface The site s are represented in a tree view on the left han
318. to the PCC Network Setup Wizard Only the password is case sensitive The user name of the last user to login is displayed The initial default login after installation is User name Administrator Password password The Setup Utility is used to manage users and specify if a login is required for the PCC Network Setup Wizard application Welcome Step through the wizard answering the questions to set up the PCC s internal network settings The setting of the PCC s internal network settings can be restricted to certain users using the user manager in the Setup Utility When a user does not have rights to set the PCC internal network settings an error message will be displayed Set PCC Internal Network Settings Interface The PCC s internal network settings can be configured using either the serial or LAN interface The Set PCC Internal Network Settings Interface page allows the selection of the configuration interface The serial interface is used when the PCC is not already on the LAN or in an unknown state If the PCC has been previously setup and is communicating on a LAN then the LAN Same Network interface can be used Should the PCC be on a different network select LAN All Networks When the serial interface is selected the PCC Server is started automatically if it is not already running 2012 POSTEC Data Systems FOCUS User Manual 2 2 1 Quick Start Setup PCC Internal Network Settings via Serial 1 Start PCC Network Se
319. to the selected key some functions can be assigned an optional dispenser number using the control provided Click the Clear Assignment button to clear the previous assignment Click OK to save the changes or Cancel to discard Once a function is assigned to a key the appropriate text will be displayed indicating what that key will be used for ePurse System Information The Back Office System page provides miscellaneous information about the FOCUS system This includes the controller version details and language settings System Details The System Details displays miscellaneous version information about the system this information may be requested by a POSTEC support engineer This information can be refreshed at any time by clicking Refresh Click Save to save all information to a text file which can then be emailed to a POSTEC support engineer on request FOCUS suite DLL version The version of the PCCClient32 dll Server version The version of the PCC Server application Database version The version of the FOCUS database PCC software Version The controller software version Date The controller software date Name The controller software name PCC hardware Version The controller hardware version Serial number The controller internal serial number used for hardware key generation registration Ethernet bridge Only applies when an Ethernet bridge board is fitted to the PCC SW version The software versi
320. tup Wizard Welcome page click Next Set PCC Internal Network Settings Interface select Serial click Next New PCC Internal Network Settings enter network settings click Next Setting PCC Internal Network Settings check change status click Next Finish click Close DIAN Setup PCC Internal Network Settings via LAN PCC is on the same network as the PC 1 Start PCC Network Setup Wizard 2 Welcome page click Next 3 Set PCC Internal Network Settings Interface select LAN Same Network click Next 4 New PCC Internal Network Settings enter network settings click Next 5 Select PCC select the PCC you wish to change from the list click Next 6 Setting PCC Internal Network Settings check change status click Next 7 Finish click Finish Setup PCC Internal Network Settings via LAN PCC is on a different network to the PC 1 Start PCC Network Setup Wizard 2 Welcome page click Next 3 Set PCC Internal Network Settings Interface select LAN All Networks click Next 4 New PCC Internal Network Settings enter network settings click Next 5 Select PCC select the PCC you wish to change from the list click Next 6 Setting PCC Internal Network Settings check change status click Next 7 Finish click Finish 2 2 2 Serial New PCC Internal Network Settings Specify the new internal network settings from the New PCC Internal Network Settings page PCC Network Setup New PCC Internal Network Settin
321. tus panel at the top of the application is used to display errors such as PCC is offline the error message will be displayed for five seconds before automatically clearing Forecourt Manager T A PCC is offline Initi 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Forecourt Manager 68 When data on a page has been changed the page cannot be exited until the changes have been either cancelled or Saved Sent If an attempt is made to change pages or exit without saving changes the Confirm dialog will be displayed Click Yes to return to the page and Save Send the changes or No to cancel all changes Each page provides different editing controls depending on functionality please refer to the appropriate help section for more details When working offline from the controller the data can only be saved to the database therefore in some cases where the data is not stored in the database editing is disabled The online help file can be accessed by clicking the Help button To log another attendant into the Forecourt Manager without having to restart click Login This may be required if an attendant with a low security profile is using the Forecourt Manager and another attendant who has a higher security profile needs to access a page that is currently restricted An alternative is a security override the manager can click on the page with the restricted functionality this will bring up the login dialog as the currently logged in atten
322. ulate the MaskValue A Mi 2l A M1 M2 M3 For example to select the first and fourth processors processor O and processor 3 calculate as follows A 20 23 1 8 9 Remote AuxPort Firewall Conflicts The inherited InterBase behavior of passing event notification messages back to the network layer through randomly selected TCP IP ports has been a persistent source of network errors and conflicts with firewalls sometimes to the extent of causing the server to crash under some conditions This parameter allows you to configure a single TCP Port for all event notification traffic The installation default 0 retains the traditional random port behaviour To dedicate one specific port for event notifications use an integer which is an available port number for example 4560 Port 3050 also needs to be allowed in the firewall as this is the primary communcation port for Firebird NOTE All other parameters and those listed above are documented in the configuration file Caution should be taken when changing these parameters ensure you have a full understanding of the effect it will have before implementing the change Please contact the Postec FOCUS development engineer for more details 14 4 Quick Reference Guides The FOCUS system provides forecourt functionality that requires an attendant to perform some sort of action This includes shift control tank deliveries price changes and changing the current operating schedule T
323. ull e Sales are automatically sent to memory when the nozzle is lifted for a second delivery Prepay Dispenser is normally PREPAY ie on hold Customer must pay first Dispenser will only dispense amount paid for After sale dispenser goes back to PREPAY hold Automatic refund for short delivery e o o o oU Autohold As for POSTPAY mode except dispenser is not authorised when sale is paid for Dispenser is manually Authorised before each sale If dispenser is pre authorised authorised before the nozzle is lifted the dispenser will time out after 30 seconds and return to the HOLD state eee Attend The dispenser is always automatically authorised Final sale amounts are displayed for reference only in the Windows Highlight colour They are not available for downloading to the Point of Sale Regulations in some countries call for an X time delay before automatically re authorising the dispensers This X factor can be incorporated if required eeeewn Editing Dispenser Operating Modes The dispenser operating modes for each of the four operating schedules is configured from the Dispensers Dispenser Modes page Configure the dispenser modes for each dispenser using the drop down control Typically the dispenser mode is the same for all dispensers in one schedule therefore an option is available to apply a mode to the entire schedule select the mode in the drop down control and right click select Apply t
324. upplied and add product features including which applications are to be used and multi site functionality Enter the software key using the four edit controls the cursor will automatically move from one to the next Once a valid software key has been entered the edit controls will be disabled and the Add Feature button will be enabled If an invalid software key is entered an error message will be displayed Once a valid software key has been entered an application feature code is required to register the applications that will be used There are many options available just the Visual Console just the Forecourt Manager just the Forecourt Configuration all of these or a combination of any two When a multi site version has been purchased two feature codes will have to be added one to activate multi site functionality and the second to set the number of sites purchased Software Feature Codes Click Add Feature to add a new software feature code the FOCUS Feature Code dialog will be displayed Enter the software feature code using the four edit controls provided the cursor will automatically move from one to the next Once a complete software feature code has been entered click OK if it is a valid feature code it will be added to the feature code list along with a description of the feature 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 9 FOCUS User Manual lt Registration Utility FOCUS Suite 1 4 3 Software Codes y a a al a
325. urge Automatic purges are performed every two weeks Upgrade Sometimes when new versions of FOCUS are released the Local Accounts database may require an upgrade When Local Accounts applications are started the current database version is checked against the required database version If the versions do not match the relevant warning message will be displayed and the application will not run The database upgrade is performed from the Local Accounts Database Maintenance Utility Click Upgrade to start the database upgrade process The upgrade progress is displayed in a dialog that can be closed by clicking OK once the upgrade is complete Should the database be at the correct version already when the Upgrade option is selected the Database Upgrade dialog will display an appropriate message Note All Local Accounts applications must be closed while performing the updrade Transactions will not be possible during this time Purge During the purge process historical transaction data is permanently deleted from the database to stop the database size growing too large The length of time data is kept and how a purge is performed is setup in the options dialog Click Purge to perform a manual purge of the database The Database Purge dialog displays the progress of the purge procedure Click OK to close this dialog once the purge is complete When automatic purging is setup refer Options Forecourt Manager will initiate the pur
326. vailable in the Wetstock Transactions report within Forecourt Manager 2012 POSTEC Data Systems Database Export Utility Database Export Utility 160 12 Database Export Utility This application can be used by third party applications to export data from the FOCUS database It is run va command line parameters which determine the type of export operation and returns an error code depending on success or failure of the operation The application currently supports e The exporting of unconfirmed transactions 12 1 Export Unconfirmed Transactions Any transactions that were processed by the Visual Console when the POS application was not running ie POS offline mode and transactions recovered from the controller when it has been offline from the POS PC are marked as unconfirmed These transactions can be exported to a csv file for processing by a POS BO application There are two commands involved Export and Confirm Batch as detailed below Export Command line parameter U1 This will export all the transactions stored in the database up to the current date time that have not been confirmed by the POS application Each time this is called a batch number will be automatically generated by incrementing the previous batch number The file will be saved in the FOCUS installation directory under the Exports folder with the following naming convention FOCUS_Trans_Export_xxxxxx csv where xxxxxx is the six digit batch number
327. vant details into the Attendant Properties dialog and click OK to save or Cancel to abort all changes Deleting Attendants Only the last attendant can be deleted to do this select the last attendant and click Delete File Delete When the confirm delete option is on a confirmation dialog will be shown click Yes to delete the attendant or No to cancel Save Send Once the Forman 3 attendant configuration is complete click Save Send Operations Save Send to save the data to the database and send it to the PCC or Cancel Operations Cancel to cancel all changes The Forman 3 attendants may be configured while the PCC is offline in this case the data will be saved to the database but not sent to the PCC This allows the user to send the data to the PCC using the Send Configuration function at a later date Request When the PCC is online and the advanced user option is on the current Forman 3 attendant configuration may be requested from the PCC by clicking Request Operations Request The requested data will be stored in the database and will replace any previous changes made Ensure the PCC is in a working state e not master reset before requesting the Forman 3 attendant configuration 3 2 11 AVI Channels The PCC can interface to a AVI Vehicle Identification Device The AVI configuration node allows the configuration of the AVI channels that will be used Editing AVI Channels The AVI channels can be
328. vice controller Connection Run Forecourt Manager and open Back Office Local Accounts Setup the LAS PCC and or PoS connection by clicking General Settings on the toolbar Restart the LAS service right click and check status to ensure connection is successful if running Windows XP Step 3 Registration Using the Forecourt Manager Local Accounts page enter the product feature codes supplied by clicking Registration on the toolbar Step 4 Setup Accounts Card Holders Using the Forecourt Manager Local Accounts page setup accounts and card holders setup a test account with a test card Step 5 Test Use a test card to test the system and check the Forecourt Manager Local Accounts page for the transaction details Step 6 Go Live Once the test is successful remove the test account from Forecourt Manager and perform a Go Live under General Settings on the toolbar Local Accounts Installation Local Accounts is installed via the FOCUS installer as an optional package For installation details refer to Appendices Installing LAMS Database Configuration The Local Accounts system uses a Firebird database for data storage this database is the backbone of the Local Accounts system This database is separate to the FOCUS database used for all other FOCUS functionallity The default database setup is usually sufficient for most users however for details of the configuration and operation of an advanced setup refer to appendix Advanced
329. viour of the system when going from integrated to standlone mode these are setup under from the POS Settings page The Visual Console is restarted when switching in either direction 4 7 5 Return Transaction The Visual Console may be integrated with a POS application Transactions processed from the Visual Console are sent to the POS and are locked in the un confirmed state e g gt 20 00 until the POS application confirms or returns them lfa POS application should crash these transactions may remain in the un confirmed state and there is no way of processing the transaction again Return Transaction The Back Office Site Utilities Return Transaction page provides the ability to return un confirmed transactions and allow them to be come available for future processing A list of un confirmed transactions is displayed this can be refreshed by clicking Refresh Please note the Visual Console must be running to display and return un confirmed transactions Select the transaction you wish to return and click Return a confirmation dialog will be displayed Click Yes to return the transaction or No to leave it in the un confirmed state Note This functionality should be only need to be used in failure situations if it is becoming a regular occurrence then contact your POS distributor as this would point to a more underlying problem with the POS interface When there are no transactions in the un confirmed state the list displays a
330. ware upgrade or catastrophic failure The send configuration process can be aborted by clicking Cancel however this should only be done if errors because it will result in a site only being partially configured The send configuration sends the following configuration entities General properties Dial Properties TVD banner Site number Units General settings dependant Auxiliary devices General settings dependant UPIs General settings dependant Tanks Dispenser hose tank assignment Dispenser allocation limits Dispenser modes Dispenser miscellaneous settings Grades Timers Forman 3 Attendants OPT settings XFuel enabled FPoS program XFuel enabled OPT prompts XFuel enabled Forecourt receipt XFuel enabled AVIs XFuel enabled The entities marked XFuel enabled will only be sent when the system is configured as a XFuel system The entities marked General settings dependant are only sent when the appropriate allow offline editing option is on or Advanced User option is on In this case the system will first check to ensure the Units UPIs or Aux devices are not empty If this is the case an appropriate warning will be displayed Click Yes to continue with the send configuration or No to abort without sending any configuration Some configuration is dependent on the version of PCC refer to Limited Configuration Functionality appendix for more details 2012 POSTEC Data Systems FOCUS User Manual 3 3 3
331. y now and then The end of day procedure can automatically set the controller date time to the PC date time which is usually automatically adjusted by the operating system Select Yes to synchronise the controller date time to PC s date time during the end of day procedure Transaction Recovery The EOD process can extract the internal transaction file from the controller via TFTP and add any transactions that are missing from the FOCUS database into the FOCUS transaction table Note This will potentially cover up any reconciliation problems that may have occured due to transactions not being processed via the POS i e reset by a dispenser reset Shift Day Reports The internal report can be configured to print shift day reports automatically on completion of the end of day procedure Check the desired shift day reports to have them printed automatically Historical Reports The internal report can be configured to print historical reports automatically on completion of the end of day procedure Check the desired historical reports to have them printed automatically Use the controls provided to configure the time periods report types for each historical report that is to be printed Other Reports The internal report can be configured to print real time reports automatically on completion of the end of day procedure Check the desired real time reports to have them printed automatically The tank inventory report can be printed out in one of
332. y tank The following fields are displayed for each line in the delivery section of this report Date and time of the tank delivery Tank number Grade name Delivery Volume volume of the delivery as entered into the wizard New Volume in the case of the tank being setup for ATG this is the volume read from the controller at the time the wizard is run Logical tanks this is the current volume read from the controller delivery volume Cost x optional price field of the delivery used to specify cost per unit where x is units Supplier optional name of fuel supplier Docket Info 1 and 2 docket information relating to the delivery The following fields are displayed for each line in the dispenser calibration tests section of this report e Date and time of the dispenser test e Tank number O 2012 POSTEC Data Systems 14 8 3 3 14 8 3 4 Appendix e Grade name e Test volume The reporting period is displayed in the top right hand corner of the report somes Historical Reconcilation This report displays the tank reconciliation figures for the selected reporting period This report groups the information by tank and is relevant for both ATG and logical tank gauging The tank reconciliation report can be presented in consolidated form as well in which case it will consolidate all the records for each tank into one entry for the selected period The following fields are displayed for each line of this report e Opening
333. yout of receipts produced by the Forecourt POS printer can be modified as can the labels which describe various receipt fields Editing Receipt Layout Multiple receipt layouts can be configured depending on receipt type Currently two receipt types are possible Customer and Merchant Upon selecting a line which represents a layout a preview will be displayed below the grid To modify a layout select the layout and click Open File Open The FPos Layout dialog will be displayed allowing the layout to be modified los Receipt Layout Recept Type Copy Count 1 Avalable Fields E E I Terminal tansacton number A PAN number HIT Driver ID 9 Registration details Attendant 1234 Odometer reading Engine hours Termination Code R E Pump number Petrol oe Transaction money o ses E e Method of payment L 1 23 Signature Customer Signature Merchant EPS recept block Epurse opening balance Epurse new balance Come again soon Trans Seq 12345 Duplicate GST 12345 7 Discount value Sale value alter discount Receipt name VID ovemde waning Order number Copy Count controls the number of receipt copies that will be printed The Available Fields list displays the fields that it is possible to print on the receipt To add a field to the receipt click and drag it from the Available Fields list and drop it onto the receipt Once on the receipt the field s label will be represented
334. ys and price change type of Both Utilities The Forecourt Manager provides four utility functions e Synchronise System Date Time e Reset Dispenser e Transaction Recovery recover transactions from the PCC that have occurred while the POS was Offline e POS Control switch the Visual Console between integrated POS and standalone operating 2012 POSTEC Data Systems FOCUS User Manual 4 7 1 4 7 2 4 7 3 modes e Return Transaction return transactions to the Visual Console that have been sent to the POS and are locked in the unconfirmed state System Date Time The controller date time is an important part of the FOCUS system the date time must be correct otherwise transactions events and other operations will have the incorrect date time information Synchronising the Date Time The Back Office Site Utilities System Date Time page allows the controller date time to be synchronised with the date time of the PC The current PC and controller date times are displayed Click Send Date Time to PCC to set the controller date time to the PC s date time Reset The Back Office Site Utilities Reset page allows a reset of a dispenser or a PEPs node Resetting a Dispenser A dispenser can be reset if a recoverable fault occurs A reset will delete any outstanding transactions as well as clearing status error flags It can be used to delete an invalid transaction caused by a faulty dispenser Warning This

FOCUS User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents